Focus Handheld-Inspection User Guide

Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual
Copyright © Nikon Metrology

All rights reserved
This publication or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Nikon Metrology ® and the Nikon Metrology logo are registered trademarks of Nikon Metrology N.V.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the respective
owners.
Nikon Metrology N.V. or any of its group companies (Nikon Metrology) make no claim to these trademarks.
The use of these Nikon Metrology products, services and materials is subject to the Nikon Metrology General Sales
Terms and Conditions.
Contents
Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................6
2 Authorizing Focus Software............................................................................ 7

2.1 Obtaining a license......................................................................................................8
2.2 Transferring a software key license.......................................................................... 10
2.3 License Admin Control Center................................................................................. 11
3 Using the software.......................................................................................... 13

3.1 The User Interface.....................................................................................................13
3.2 Using the three mouse buttons..................................................................................14
3.3 Getting started........................................................................................................... 15
3.4 Configuring Ribbon groups.......................................................................................17
3.5 Property sheets.......................................................................................................... 18
3.6 Selection.................................................................................................................... 19
3.7 Modifying the view of the model............................................................................. 20
3.8 Keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................20
3.9 Conventions used in the documentation................................................................... 21
3.10 Starting Focus from a command line......................................................................21
4 The Focus Menus............................................................................................23

4.1 The File menu........................................................................................................... 23
4.2 The View menu.........................................................................................................29
4.3 The Workflow menu................................................................................................. 38
5 The Focus Toolbars........................................................................................ 43

5.1 The Quick Access toolbar.........................................................................................44
5.2 The Additional toolbar.............................................................................................. 45
5.3 The Inspection toolbar...............................................................................................46
5.4 The Named Views toolbar........................................................................................ 49
5.5 The Info/Visibility toolbar........................................................................................ 57
5.6 The Feature Flyouts toolbar...................................................................................... 59
6 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Solid) Workflow.................... 62

6.1 Nominal Task (solid).................................................................................................62
6.1.1 Import Nominal............................................................................................ 63
6.1.2 Feature Fitting.............................................................................................. 68
6.1.3 Construct Feature..........................................................................................99
6.1.4 Modify Nominal......................................................................................... 112
6.1.5 GD&T Dimensions.....................................................................................118
6.1.6 Sections.......................................................................................................140
6.2 Handheld Measurement Task (solid)...................................................................... 140
6.2.1 Previews......................................................................................................141
Contents
6.2.2 Measure.......................................................................................................143
6.2.3 Settings....................................................................................................... 201
6.3 Measured Task (solid).............................................................................................203
6.3.1 Import Measured........................................................................................ 205
6.3.2 Cut/Merge................................................................................................... 208
6.3.3 Filter / Mesh............................................................................................... 217
6.3.4 Feature Fitting............................................................................................ 221
6.3.5 Construct Feature........................................................................................279
6.3.6 Modified Measured.................................................................................... 280
6.3.7 Sections.......................................................................................................293
6.3.8 Advanced.................................................................................................... 293
6.4 Align Task (solid)................................................................................................... 299
6.4.1 Align........................................................................................................... 299
6.4.2 Transform....................................................................................................320
6.5 Compare Task (solid)..............................................................................................326
6.5.1 Compare......................................................................................................327
6.5.2 Sections.......................................................................................................347
6.6 Report Task (solid)..................................................................................................364
6.6.1 Flyouts........................................................................................................ 364
6.6.2 Reporting.................................................................................................... 384
6.6.3 Dimensions................................................................................................. 395
6.6.4 Export......................................................................................................... 410
7 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (STL) Workflow.................. 414

7.1 Nominal Task (stl)...................................................................................................414
7.1.1 Import Nominal stl..................................................................................... 415
7.1.2 Cut/Merge................................................................................................... 420
7.1.3 Filter / Mesh............................................................................................... 421
7.1.4 Feature fitting............................................................................................. 422
7.1.6 GD&T Dimensions.....................................................................................465
7.1.7 Modified Nominal...................................................................................... 466
7.1.8 Sections.......................................................................................................467
7.2 Handheld Measurement Task (stl).......................................................................... 467
7.3 Measured Task (stl).................................................................................................468
7.4 Align Task (stl)....................................................................................................... 469
7.5 Compare Task (stl)..................................................................................................470
7.6 Report Task (stl)......................................................................................................471
8 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Airfoil Inspection)

Workflow.......................................................................................................472
8.1 Nominal Task (Airfoil Inspection).......................................................................... 472
8.2 Handheld Measurement Task (Airfoil Inspection)..................................................473
8.3 Measured Task (Airfoil Inspection)........................................................................ 474
8.4 Align Task (Airfoil Inspection)...............................................................................475
8.5 Airfoil Task............................................................................................................. 476
8.5.1 Airfoil Inspect.............................................................................................477
8.6 Report Task (Airfoil Inspection).............................................................................499
Contents
9 Information Dialog....................................................................................... 501

9.1 The Numbers tab.....................................................................................................501
9.2 The Colors tab.........................................................................................................502
9.3 The Interrogate tab.................................................................................................. 504
9.4 The Drawstyle tab................................................................................................... 505
9.5 The Attributes tab....................................................................................................508
10 Automation.................................................................................................. 510
11 Glossary....................................................................................................... 516
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Focus 2019 Inspection is the successor to Focus 2018 Inspection, the next-generation software
for point cloud to CAD inspection built on the new Nikon Metrology software platform,
Together with greatly improved functionality, Focus 2019 Inspection is ready for all your
Inspection needs.
Details on the configuration of the scanning hardware is contained in the Handheld API
manual.
• The software offers a complete tool set for measuring and processing pointclouds.
• Points can be imported from any source; both standard and machine dependent formats are
supported.
• The representation of the size of the points is varied to provide a mesh-like appearance of
the point cloud. An actual closed triangulated mesh can be generated through the points.
The accuracy of this mesh is guaranteed by the integrated 3D filter.
• The triangulated mesh can be exported to standard formats such as STL, ready for copy
milling.
The user interface, composed of different worksheets guides the user through each task in the
workflow.
The following workflows are available:
• The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary Nominal model.
• The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal models.
• The Airfoil Inspection workflow deals with airfoil data and provides specific computations
and reports.
Reporting is smoothly integrated with Microsoft Excel in which users can create their own
report templates. The conventional 3D deviation and section reports can be annotated with
user defined fly-outs, text, and comments. The use of Microsoft Excel for reporting enables
easy sharing of results with colleagues or customers.
This Reference Manual describes each of the tools provided in the user interface. For more
extensive or customized training, contact your Nikon Metrology Dealer.
For technical support you can consult the Support Page on the Nikon Metrology Web site
http://www.nikonmetrology.com.
6 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual

Published November 2018
2 Authorizing Focus Software

Focus software is protected with a licensing mechanism that requires either a hardware key
(dongle) or a software key.
If Focus is started without a valid license, the following message will be seen.
This means that you either need a new or an updated key to unlock the software. See
Obtaining a license (see page 8).
If a license disappears while Focus is running, you will see the following dialog:
This dialog will also notify you if a license is going to expire in less than 14 days. See
Obtaining a license (see page 8) for instructions on updating existing licenses
Published November 2018 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual 7
At any time you can consult the License Admin Control Center (see page 11) to obtain
information about current licenses.
2.1 Obtaining a license

Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a license to unlock Focus. Focus can be
unlocked with either a hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.
Hardware key (Dongle)
A hardware key (Dongle) can be used :

• to unlock a new software license
• to unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid.
Both procedures are explained below.
To transfer a license, please contact your Nikon Metrology dealer.
To unlock a new software license
1. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a new hardware dongle. Once you have
received your dongle, follow the steps below.
2. Close all instances of Focus.
3. Connect the hardware dongle to a USB port on the machine.
4. Start Focus, which will now be licensed.
To unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid
If you already have a compatible hardware dongle, it can be upgraded with a new license as
follows.
The first stage is to create a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file:
1. Open the Start menu in Windows,
2. Go to Nikon Metrology > Licensing > License Remote Update System.
The following window will appear.
8 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual

Published November 2018
3. Click on the Collect Status Information tab.

4. Connect the hardware dongle to be upgraded to the machine.
5. Disconnect all other dongles.
6. Click on the [Collect Information] button.
7. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on “Save”.
8. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.
The second phase is to install a new V2C (Vendor to Customer) file which will be sent to you
by your Nikon Metrology dealer.
1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Licensing > License Remote
Update System.
2. Click on the Apply License File tab.
3. Click on the […] button next to Update File and select the V2C file you have received.
4. Click on [Apply Update].
After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the upgraded license on the
corresponding dongle.
Software Key
Software locks are licenses locked to a specific machine, and must be installed using a process
called activation. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to start this process.
See also Transferring a software key license (see page 10).
The first stage is to generate a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file which contains a fingerprint of
your machine.
Update System.
2. Make sure all hardware based dongles are disconnected from the machine.
3. Click on the Collect Key Status Information tab.
4. Click on the [Collect Information] button. If you are asked to select a specific key, select a
‘provisional’ key.
5. These are keys that have 19 digits.
6. Click [OK].
7. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on [Save].
8. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.
The second stage is to install the license key. This will be contained in a V2C (Vendor to
Customer) file that you will receive from your dealer.
Update System.
2. Click on the Apply License Update tab.
3. Click on the […] button next to Update File and select the V2C file you have received.
4. Click on [Apply Update].
After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the available licenses.
Network License
It is possible to install a network license on your company's network.

1. Choose the server on your company's network where network license is to be installed.
2. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to order a network license, which can be either a
hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.
3. Install the license following the same procedure as described for non-network licenses.
2.2 Transferring a software key license

A software key license is associated with a particular computer. This procedure describes how
to transfer an existing license from one computer to another.
To transfer a license
1. Install Focus on the computer to which you wish to transfer the license (the recipient
computer).
2. From the Start menu select Nikon Metrology > Licensing > License Remote Update
System.
3. Click on the Transfer License tab.
4. Click on [...] in the upper (Step 1) panel.
5. Choose a location and file name where the information about this computer will be stored.
6. Click [Collect and Save Information].
7. Transfer the generated .id file to the computer where the current license is installed (the
source computer).
8. On the source computer select Nikon Metrology > Licensing > License Remote Update
System from the Start menu.
9. Click on the Transfer License tab.
10 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

Manual Published November 2018
10.Click on [...] next to the Read the recipient information file from field and select the .id file
that you have just created on the recipient computer.
11.Click on [...] next to the Generate the license transfer file to field. Choose a location and file
name for the new license file (.h2h).
12.Click [Generate License Transfer File].
13.Transfer this file to the recipient computer.
14.On the recipient computer click on the Apply License File tab in the RUS dialog.
15.Click on [...] next to the Update File field and select the license file (.h2h) that you have just
generated.
16.Click [Apply Update].
You can now use Focus on the recipient machine.
2.3 License Admin Control Center

The License Admin Control Center provides an overview of all licenses found on your
machine or on your company’s network.
To open the License Admin Control Center: from the Start menu select All programs > Nikon
Metrology > Licensing > License Admin Control Center
: this icon indicates a software key
: this icon indicates a hardware key

The following shows an example of a machine on which one Hasp HL Pro hardware dongle is
found.
Clicking on the [Features] button provides a list of the specific licensed features on that key.
The feature called “Focus Maintenance Contract End Date” specifies when your maintenance
contract expires in the “Restrictions” column. In the above example, the maintenance contract
expires on 201304. This is always in the format YYYYMM (Year Month), thus 201304 means
that the contract expires in April 2013, and more specifically, on the first day of that month.

3 Using the software

This section describes the arrangement and the terminology associated with the interface as
well as some general procedures for using the Focus software.
3.1 The User Interface

The various elements of the Focus interface are shown in the Figure below.
The File menu

provides access to a number of basic functions for managing the complete document and
for setting preferences. For more details see The File menu (see page 23).
The Quick access toolbar
provides direct access to a number of functions. The contents of this menu can be
configured by the user. For more details see the Quick Access toolbar (see page 44).
The Task tabs
allow you to step through each task in the workflow.
The Additional toolbar
provides access to functions relating to the presentation of the interface as well as
information and help. For more details see The Additional toolbar (see page 45).
The Ribbon bar
groups all the tools associated with a task. The contents of the ribbon groups can be
configured by the user. For more details see Configuring Ribbon groups (see page 17).
The Toolbar
contains tools that are accessible in all the tasks. For more details see The Focus Toolbars
(see page 43).
The Graphical scene

is where the models and associated features are displayed. The arrangement of the
windows in the graphical scene can be modified using the Layout options from the The
View menu (see page 29). See also Getting started (see page 15).
The Inspection tree
consists of a set of panels listing the contents of the different elements of the document.
The Message line
displays useful information concerning the progress of requested functions. The Cursor
position displays the current coordinates of the cursor.
The Units panel
displays the currently used units and allows you to change them. See The Units panel (see
page 14).
The Workflow menu
allows you to switch between different workflows and to configure the workflow. For
more details see The Workflow menu (see page 38).
The Units panel
Clicking on the Units panel schedules the Model Units dialog in which you can view and set
the model units, i.e. the units the object was scanned in. Setting the units, tags your Inspection
file with a unit's reference when you export or save the file. The units do not affect your object
while in a session. The information is provided for downstream applications that may read the
units reference information.
The Model Units dialog
Select one
Select the model units to use in your document.
Decimals
Sets the number of decimals for display.
3.2 Using the three mouse buttons

Use of a three buttoned mouse is assumed when working with Focus software. The three
mouse buttons are used for specific purposes. The three buttons are described as:
• LMB – the Left Mouse Button, used for selecting objects in the tree or the graphical scene.
• MMB – the Middle Mouse Button or scroll bar used for initiating the operation of
commands from tools.

• RMB – the Right Mouse Button, used for displaying a contextual menu on items in the
inspection tree as well as in the graphical scene.
3.3 Getting started

The software will start with a specific workflow in operation.
The title of the workflow is shown above the graphical scene.
To select a different workflow: select the required option from the Workflow menu in the
bottom right hand corner of the screen.
Each workflow has a number of tasks that are displayed below the workflow title.
These tasks should be executed in sequence in order to accomplish most workflows.
Click on a tab to execute a task.

The tools used in a specific task are presented in Ribbon Groups.
Items can be selected for operation either by clicking on them in the graphical scene or in the
inspection tree.
The layout of the graphical scene can be adjusted using the Layout options from the View
menu that is available in the top right hand corner of the screen. This would enable you to
divide the scene into separate areas to provide different aspects of the same model. In the
Align task one area can be used to show the nominal model and the other the measured one for
example.
By default the inspection tree appears on the right hand side of the screen. It consists of three
panels relating to the nominal model, the measured model and results of the inspection. You
can choose which panels you wish to display by selecting the required option from the View
menu.
Individual panels can be closed by clicking on the cross. By default the panels are "pinned"
into position on the right hand side of the screen. This is indicated by the vertical pin icon as
shown below.
The panels can be set "auto-hide" by clicking on the pin icon so that it turns horizontal. The
panel will then be hidden and replaced by a tab on the right hand edge. This is the case for the
"Inspect" part of the tree as shown above. The panel will appear when the mouse is moved
over the tab.
Items are selected in the tree using the LMB. Multiple items can be selected using the
<Shift> or the <Ctrl) key.
To hide items: check the box in front of an item OFF, as is the case of the "Slots" as shown
above.
To perform an operation on the model with the default parameters: use the LMB to select
an item and then the MMB to execute the function.
To set the parameters for an operation: open the property sheet for a a tool by clicking on
the small arrow next to the tool.

To deactivate a tool: click on the Mixed Object Select tool.

The status of any operation or messages regarding functionality can be seen in the Status
bar that is to be seen at the bottom of the application interface. If the status bar is red, then it
indicates an error message.
3.4 Configuring Ribbon groups

The most commonly used functions provided in Focus software are accessible from groups of
tools in the ribbon. The contents of these groups depends on the current task and workflow.
There are a set of general tool bars (see page 43) below the ribbon which provide a range
of general operations that apply to all workflows and tasks.
The tools presented in ribbon groups are color-coded:
Gold
- the tool relates to a Nominal object.
Blue
- the tool relates to a Measured object.
Green
- the tool relates to a Constructed object.
(A constructed object is an object created from a nominal and measured object.)
A ribbon group can be configured from a popup menu obtained by right clicking on the group.
It contains the following operations that relate to ribbon groups.
Add to Quick Access Toolbar

If the menu has been obtained by right-clicking on the name of the group (as shown
above) this will add the complete group to the Quick Access toolbar. If the menu has
been obtained by right-clicking on a single tool, this will add the tool to the Quick Access
toolbar.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar...
This option schedules the Customize dialog in which the presence and the contents of the
ribbon group can be customized (see page 38).
Show Quick Access Toolbar Below/Above the Ribbon
This toggles the position of the Quick Access Toolbar.
Minimize the Ribbon
This option will hide the complete ribbon. It can be shown again by right-clicking on the
down-arrow to the right of the The Quick Access toolbar (see page 44). All operations
provided within a task can also be accessed by using the RMB in the graphical scene to
open a popup menu.
3.5 Property sheets

Functions are executed through the tools in the ribbon group. These functions can operate in
two ways:
• By scheduling a dialog box in which you can enter the parameters required and then using
the action buttons to perform the operations. Some dialogs are "dockable" as described
below.

• By using parameters defined in Property sheets. In this case you can either execute the
function directly using the default parameters or you can open the property sheet to set the
parameters and exercise more control over the operation.
Opening Property sheets
A property sheet is opened by clicking on the small arrow next to the tool, as illustrated in the
picture below.
In the property sheet you can set the required parameters, then click on the tool again to
execute the function.
Not opening the Property sheets
If the property sheet is not opened, the function is executed using the default parameters. The
usual procedure to execute a function without opening the property sheet is:
1. Click on the tool.
2. Click on the object with the LMB that is to be selected for the operation.
3. Click with MMB to execute the function with the default parameters.
This represents an efficient means of executing functions for which the parameters do not
require modification.
Dockable dialogs
Focus uses dockable dialogs that appear within the main application interface. They can be
'undocked' by clicking on the title bar and then dragging it to the required position.
3.6 Selection
There are often two ways of executing a function:
• Pre-selecting an item in the Inspection tree or the scene before activating the tool.
• Not making a selection before activating the tool.
Pre-selection
If an item is selected before a tool is activated, then it will be the target of the operation.
Depending on the function this may be the reference item.
If the tool schedules a dialog or has a property sheet, then there will be the possibility to select
a different item as either the reference or the moveable item.
No pre-selection
In this case the Focus Inspection will make an automatic selection of items for the operation.
This will depend on the tool but generally all possible items are selected and operated on.
When making selections in the scene, the cursor changes to an appropriate shape to indicate
the type of selection.
3.7 Modifying the view of the model

The view of the models can be modified within the graphical scene using several methods.
There are a number of general tools provided in The Inspection toolbar (see page 46).
In addition there are alternative ways to interactively move the model using the keyboard and
the mouse.
The manipulation methods given below depend on the View Manipulation option set in the
Preferences (see page 26) dialog available from The File menu (see page 23).
Unified Style
To rotate
The view of the model can be rotated by dragging with the Right Mouse Button (RMB).
For more details on the centre of rotation see the Rotation Center (see page 47) tool in
the The Inspection toolbar (see page 46).
To pan
Press and Drag with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)
To zoom
Scroll with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)
Space Mouse
The Space Mouse from 3Dconnexion is supported to provide a means of manipulating the
model (zooming, rotating and panning) without having to use the keyboard or specific tools.
3.8 Keyboard shortcuts

The table below lists the define keyboard shortcuts.
You can define your own keyboard shortcuts for specific tool using the Keyboard tab in the
Configure dialog. This is accessed from The Workflow menu (see page 38).
Table 1: Keyboard shortcuts
Key Action Explanation

S Return to Selection mode When in a picking mode (e.g. detecting
features), this ends the picking
Esc operation and selects the Selection tool.

Key Action Explanation

V Zoom selected Zooms in on the currently selected item
so that if fills the scene.
F5
W Zoom allZoom selected Zooms in so that the view of all the
items in the scene fill the scene.
F4
Drag+RMB Rotate Rotates the view of the model (see page
20)
Drag+MMB Pan Moves the view of the model across the
scene (see page 20)
Scroll+MMB Zoom Interactively zooms the view of the
mode (see page 20)
CTRL+A Select all This is task dependent: it selects all
solids in the Nominal task, and all point
clouds/meshes in the Measured task.
CRTL+I Invert selection Deselects items currently selected and
selects those not selected.
CTRL+Z Undo Undoes the last operation performed.
CTRL+Y Redo Removes the effect of the previous
Undo operation.
F1 Help Schedules the online help.
3.9 Conventions used in the documentation

[OK] Action buttons that will initiate a function are
enclosed in square brackets, e.g. click [Create] to
create a section.
<Alt> Keys to be pressed on the keyboard are indicated in
angled brackets.
Model Units The name of a dialog or a tab within the dialog.
Opens a document short description of a tool.
user interface field indicates a field in the user interface
file name the name of a file or path
3.10 Starting Focus from a command line

Starting Focus normally involves using the shortcut created on the desktop or the options
available from the Start menu. These operations open Focus with an empty document for
interactive use. There are means to start Focus and open an existing document or automation
script or to start Focus remotely from another application (e.g. CAMIO).
To start Focus from a command line
The following is an example of starting start Focus from a command window:

"C:\Program Files\Nikon\Focus 11.3\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa
The various parts of the command are described below:
"C:\Program Files\Nikon\Focus 10.3\Focus.exe"

The path to the executable to be run. If the path is longer than 8 characters, or
contains a space, then it must be enclosed by quotes " ".
-script
This indicates the next entry will be an automation script. c:\temp\test.mfa is
the path to the script.
Additional Parameters
In addition to the script, some additional parameters can be added to the command line. These
are parameters that also can be defined in Focus Automation.
-script "FilePath/Name"
Allows you to open Focus and start a script designated by the Filepath and the
Name
-import "FilePath/Name"
Allows you to open Focus and immediately import a file designated by the
Filepath and the Name.
/ContinueOnFail
When this parameter is included, the designated script will continue even if an
error is generated by the script. If this parameter is not set, the script will stop at
the line that fails.
Example:
"C:\Program Files\Nikon\Focus 11.3\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp
\test.mfa /ContinueOnFail
/CloseReport
When this parameter is set, the Excel report created by the automation script
will automatically be closed when Focus is closed. it this parameter is not set,
the report will remain open when Focus is closed.
Example:
"C:\Program Files\Nikon\Focus 11.3\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp
\test.mfa /CloseReport
/Quit
Setting this parameter will close Focus at the end of the script playback.
These additional parameters can be entered in one command line.

4 The Focus Menus
4 The Focus Menus

A number of menus are provided containing functions that are common to all workflows and
tasks.
This section describes:
The File menu
The File menu (see page 23) accessed by clicking on the Focus icon in the top left corner.
The View menu
The View menu (see page 29) available in the top right corner.
See also The Additional toolbar (see page 45) in this group.
The Workflow menu
The Workflow menu (see page 38) available in the bottom right corner.
Note: an Action menu is available from a pop-up menu in the scene.
4.1 The File menu

The File menu groups all commands to manage the complete analysis document. The File
menu is access by clicking on the Focus icon in the top left corner.
4 The Focus Menus
Note: functions in this menu can be added to and removed from The Quick Access
toolbar (see page 44).
Note: keyboard shortcuts can be modified using the Keyboard tab in the Configure
dialog which is accessed from The Workflow menu (see page 38).
New
Creates a new document.
This closes the active document to create the new one. If the current document has been
modified, you will be prompted to save changes.
Open
Opens an existing document.
This closes the active document to open an existing document. If the current document has
been modified, you will be prompted to save changes.
Save
Saves the current document.
This tool saves the current document. If this document has not yet been saved, the Save As
dialog box prompts you for the file name and location as described below.
Save As…
Saves the current document with a new name and format.
This tool saves the current document with a new name and format. The Save As dialog
box prompts you for the file name and location.
It allows you to save the document in two different formats:
• MFI - Focus Workspace (.mfi)
This is the standard format for saving a current work session and includes the solid
model.
• MFR Focus Report (.mfr)

4 The Focus Menus
This saves the document in format suitable for use with the Focus Inspection Viewer. A
document saved in this format will strip out the solid and point cloud information, but
retains all reporting and compare information.
Edit - >
Undo {last operation}

This removes the effect of the last operation you have performed.
Note: not all actions can be undone. In this case the function is labeled ‘Can’t
undo’.
Note: that the undo functionality can be disabled using the Preferences function
(see below) to improve performance when working with large models.
Redo {last operation}

Restores an undone operation.
Erase
This operation removes objects that have been selected either in the graphical display or
the Inspection tree.
Import ->
Import Solids…
This enables you to import solid models of various formats. This operation can also be
performed using the Import Nominal Solid (see page 63) tool where all the details
are described.
Focus Workspace Files…

This enables you to imports objects from Inspection’s native files. It schedules the
Import Focus Workspace Files dialog.
Solid Display Accuracy: This defines settings for the visualization of the solid. The
further the slider is to the right, the more accurately the solid is displayed but the higher
the memory usage.
Import Sections
Import sections.
Import Alignment
Imports as alignment. Various file types are supported including those used by scanners.
Export
Export Point Clouds…

Exports point clouds in various formats.
4 The Focus Menus
Export Meshes…
Exports meshes in various formats.
Exports Solids…
Exports solids in various formats.
Export Sections/Mesh Borders

Exports selected sections and mesh borders in various formats.
Export Alignment
Exports selected alignments.
Print…
Prints the current view.
Print Setup
Defines the layout to be used for printing.
Preferences
Sets user preferences for the application
This option allows you to set some user preferences for the operation of the application.
The Preferences dialog three tabs.
The General tab.
Registry [Reset]
This saves the settings in the operating system’s registry.
Visual References Show Origin
Shows or removes the origin and orientation of the XYZ axes in the scene.

4 The Focus Menus
Security [Set Password]

This allows you to set a password that will be used to protect the operation of the Registry
Reset. A dialog appears in which you can enter the password to be used. Click [OK] to
confirm the password.
Language
Sets the language in which the interface is displayed. The new language setting will take
effect the next time the application is started.
Automation Stop playback in case of error
When this option is enabled, if an automation script encounters a command that it can
not execute, then it will halt at this point in the script until some manual operation is
performed. If not enabled, then the script will continue to the next command.
Sounds
Plays sounds when enabled.
Advanced 3D Graphics Engine
Enabled
When this option is checked ON , the Advanced 3D Graphics Engine is enabled, if your
computer has a suitable graphics card. If you do not have a suitable graphics card, the
default graphics engine is used.
Shadowing
When this option is checked ON, the rendering of shadows within recesses is improved.
This use of shadowing may cause small delays in scene manipulations (rotate, move, ...)
for some models in which case you can switch if OFF.
The Shadowing option is only available if the Advanced 3D Graphics Engine is

enabled.
The Appearance tab.
4 The Focus Menus
The Appearance tab sets the appearance of the Focus Inspection interface.
Scheme
A list of previously defined schemes (see the instructions below for creating a scheme).
[Save As…]
Save the current scheme with a specified name.
[Delete]
Deletes the current scheme from the scheme list.
Note: The Default scheme can not be deleted.
Item
This panel in the dialog enables you to select an interface item from the drop down list and
then define how it is to be displayed. The fields controlling the display will depend on the
type of item selected.
View Manipulation
The options from the Style drop-down list allow you to choose the manner in which the
view of the model will be manipulated in the scene. Each of these options is described in
Modifying the view of the model (see page 20).
UI Color Scheme
Sets the color scheme for the user interface. A list of styles is presented from which you
can choose the color scheme for the user interface.
To define a display scheme
1. Select the interface aspect to be modified from the Item drop down list.
2. Specify how each of the parameters associated with that item are to be displayed; colors
and line widths.
3. Select another item, and repeat the process for all display items.
4. Click [Save As…]
5. Enter a name for the scheme.
6. Click [Save].
7. Click [OK] in the Save Scheme dialog. This new scheme will be available from the
"Scheme" drop down list.
8. Click [OK] in the Preferences dialog when all preferences have been set.
The Auto Save tab.

4 The Focus Menus
This tab allows you to define auto-save options for the document.
Enabled
Check this button ON to enable automatic saving of the document. Click the [Apply]
button to activate the setting so that you can define the other Auto save parameters.
Note: Enabling this function takes a lot of memory.
Save Interval
This defines the period between two automatic save operations.
Count Down
This parameter represents the amount of time remaining for the next Save.
[Save Now]
The Save Now button saves the document. If the active document is a new document, the
Save As dialog box prompts for the file name and location.
[Restart]
The Restart button resets the count down time to Save interval time. The save process is
started afresh from the current state. By clicking the Restart button, the current status is not
saved, but the timer process to save is started.
Save Location
The Save Location represents the location to save temporary (automatically) saved files.
The file is typically named as #AUTOSAVE#.mfi. In case of application crash, restarting
the application resumes the status from the last saved session.
You can enter the location in the field or browse to select one.
Exit
Closes the application
This closes the Focus application. If unsaved modifications have been made to the document,
you will be prompted to save them.
4.2 The View menu

The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual
appearance.
4 The Focus Menus
Auto Hide All

Hides all Inspection trees
When this option is selected all the visible Inspection Trees are removed from their positions
in the scene and appear as tabs on the right hand edge of the application interface. The number
of tabs corresponds to the number of tree panels defined as visible using the Inspection Tree
entry described below.
In Auto-hide mode the panel will appear when the mouse is placed over the tab and remain on
view for as long as the mouse remains over the tree.
To permanently fix a tree as a panel, click on the pin icon in the top left corner.
When this option is unchecked all the visible trees will appear as fixed panels in the interface.
Inspection Tree
Toggles the presence of the Inspection Trees
The Inspection Trees are where Nominal and Measured data as well as Comparison data are
listed and can be manipulated. They allow you to select, de-select, show or hide objects.
This option allows you to choose which Inspection Trees you wish to have visible in the
interface. When a tree is checked on it will appear as a fixed panel in the interface. You can
Auto Hide a fixed panel by clicking on the pin icon as shown in the screen shot above. It will
then appear as a tab as is shown for the Inspect tree in the screenshot below.

4 The Focus Menus
The use and the positioning of an Inspection Tree is described in Getting started (see page 15)
Properties
Shows the properties of select objects or the camera
This option displays the Properties panel. It has three tabs. These display the global properties
relating to the document, the properties of the selected objects and the camera object
properties.
The Global tab
The Global properties sheet displays information relating to Point clouds, Meshes and Solids.
Two-sided Lighting
If this option is checked ON, the model has both sides of its faces lit. When checked
OFF, the model has its faces lit on the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual
inspection of Face Normals. This parameter is also available in the Align Normals and Flip
Normal property sheets.
Backface Rendering
The backfaces of an object are those faces whose normals point away from the camera.
Check this option ON to display all faces. Check it OFF to display only those faces facing
the camera.
Point cloud
From Focus 11.3 the point cloud is represented with shading. The size of the points are
varied automatically as the user zooms in and out.
Sparse Motion
Check this option ON to substitute a low density version of the point cloud for display,
while the scene is in motion. This option is useful for high density point clouds during
smooth motion when tumbling or zooming the camera.
4 The Focus Menus
Shading
Displays shading on the model. This only works on point clouds made with recent
versions of the software.
Mesh
Rendering Optimization
This option allows you to optimise the rendering of the mesh. Two possibilities are
provided:
• Speed: mesh rendering will be optimized for fastest rendering but will use more
memory of the graphics card.
• Memory: mesh rendering will be optimized to use the graphics card memory more
efficiently to avoid the slowing of the system that results when the graphics card
memory is used up.
Static Rendering
Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for
objects displayed in a stationary view. Setting the Static Rendering style sets the display
style for all scene elements.
Motion Rendering
Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for
objects when the camera or objects are in motion. Setting the Motion Rendering style
sets the display style for all scene elements.
Solids
Boundaries
Toggle to switch the display of the boundaries of a solid.
Faces
When this option is checked ON the surfaces of a solid are displayed. When checked
OFF, the model appears as a wire frame.
Show Nurb Surface of Selected Solid Face
Shows a representation of the face as a NURB (Non-Uniform Rational Basis) spline.
Surface Points
When checked the direction arrow will be displayed.
The Object tab
The Object tab of the Properties sheet is used to view or modify the properties of the selected
object. The properties listed depend on the selected object.
Solid
Name
Name of the solid

4 The Focus Menus
X/Y/Z
Coordinates of the origin of the selected feature relative to the origin of the "world"
coordinate system.
#Faces
Number of faces
#Edges
Number of edges.
Solid display Accuracy
Defines the quality of the visualisation of the solid. It is set when the solid is imported.
The higher this is set, the higher the memory used.
Draw Coord Sys
Draws the coordinates of the origin of the feature.
Mesh
Name
Name of the object
X/Y/Z
Coordinates of the origin of the selected feature relative to the origin of the "world"
coordinate system.
#Vertices
Number of vertices.
#Faces
Number of faces
Draw Coord Sys
4 The Focus Menus
Diffuse Color
Selects the colour for the "overall" color of the object.
Specular Color
Selects the colour for the shiny reflection on the part.
Shininess
Represents how shiny (mirror-like) an object is.
Transparency
When checked the object will be shown as transparent, with the amount of transparency
defined by the Aplha value.
Alpha
Defines how transparent an object is. Alpha = 0 is fully transparent.
Pointcloud
Name
Name of the point cloud.
X/Y/Z
Coordinates of the origin object
# Points
The number of points contained in the point cloud.
Draw Coord Sys
The Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to view and modify camera properties.

4 The Focus Menus
Type
Specifies the camera view of the active view pane. To change the camera view, click in
the field and select the desired view from the pull down list. The choices are: Perspective,
Orthographic, Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back.
Pan Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for panning the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this
value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Tumble Style
Selects the behavior for tumbling the camera. To change the tumble style, click in the
field and select the desired style from the pull down list. Your selection persists until you
change it. Each camera has its own value, even though you can only tumble in Perspective
view. The tumble style options are: Local, Global and Trackball.
Tumble Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for tumbling the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this
value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Zoom Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for zooming the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the degree of zoom you will get for a given mouse drag distance. The value is a relative
number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The
default value is 1.
Zoom Reverse
Changes the direction of zoom associated with the mouse movement.
Dolly Style
Specifies the behavior when you dolly the camera. To change the style, click in the field
and select the desired style from the pull down list. By default, the Dolly Style is set to
Local. The styles available are: Local, Global.
The Local dolly style moves the camera forward and backward along the direction of the
lens without altering the center of interest.
The Global dolly style moves both the camera and the center of interest forward and
backward. A global dolly may be used to navigate your camera view through objects along
the direction of the lens.
Dolly Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for dollying the camera. The greater the value, the more the
camera will move for a given mouse drag. The value is a relative number, so if you want
greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Headlight
Turns on and off the camera headlights. By default, each camera view has an associated
headlight. When the camera moves, so does the headlight. This provides constant
illumination for the camera view. Checking this option OFF, turns the headlight off. You
may want to do this to illuminate the object using only the session lights.
Headlight Diffuse Color
Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the diffuse area of the
illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a color
from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to light grey. Setting the light color to
black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all colors of light are
emitted.
Headlight Specular Color
Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the specular area of the
illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a color
from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to medium grey. Setting the light color
to black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all colors of light
are emitted.
4 The Focus Menus
Automation
Displays the Automation panel
This option shows the Automation panel that displays the automation script that has been
recorded as well as buttons for loading/saving as well as recording/play-back of a script.
See Automation (see page 510)
Toolbars
Sets the visibility of general toolbars
A list of the general toolbars is presented from which you can select those to be displayed. See
also The Focus Toolbars (see page 43).
Views Layout
Sets the current screen layout
A list of available screen layouts is displayed from which you can select the one required. See
also Getting started (see page 15)
Object templates
Defines templates used for Reports
This option schedules the Object Information template dialog that enables you to create
templates that will be used for Reports. When selecting the Object Information (see page
393) tool in the Reporting toolbar, you will be able to choose one of the templates that are
defined here.
Note: that definition of templates is an operation that can be password protected.

4 The Focus Menus
[Save]
Saves the current template definition in a file. It schedules the ‘Save as’ dialog in which the
name and the location of the file can be specified. The file is saved with the extension .otp
(object template file).
[Load]
This loads a previously saved object template file. You can select a template from the
recently opened list, or you can selection the option "From file". In this case the ‘Open’
dialog appears in which you can search for the required file. Once a template is loaded all
the fields in it will be displayed in the dialog.
Description
The description that will be appear when the data is added in the Reporting tool and will
appear in the output file.
Line
This list contains line numbers for the output file.
Excel field
The name of the Excel field where the information needs to be written.
[Add]
This adds the entered description and line number to the end of the list in the Object
information templates preview.
[Update]
This updates the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview with
the entered Description and Line.
[Delete]
Deletes the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview.
Up and Down Arrows
Moves up or down the selected line (description + line number + Excel Field) in the
preview of the Object information templates on the left. This is the sequence as they will
appear in the Object information templates.
[Close]
Closes the dialog, saving the settings.
4 The Focus Menus
To define an object template
Note: that this operation can be password protected.
1. Load an existing template if necessary by selecting the required one from the list and then
clicking [Load].
2. Enter a description for the line in the description field.
3. Enter a value for the line number in the file. This does not refer to its position in this list.
4. Enter a value for the Excel field.
5. Click [Add].
6. Add further lines as required.
7. To adapt the line if necessary enter the new data and push [Update].
8. To remove a line select it and click [Delete].
9. Click [Save].
10.Click [Close] when the definition is complete.
This template can be accessed using the Object Information (see page 393) tool in the
Report task.
4.3 The Workflow menu

The Workflows menu allows you to switch or configure a workflow. The Workflow menu is
accessed by clicking on the current workflow which is displayed in the bottom right corner of
the interface.
Configure Workflow…
Customizes the appearance and behavior of the Focus software
The Customize dialog
This dialog allows you to create and configure workflows. Workflows consist of Tasks and
Tasks have a number of ribbon groups associated with them. Tools are organized in Ribbon
Groups. This dialog allows you to manage the tasks and the tools associated with a workflow.
In addition it allows you to configure the The Quick Access toolbar (see page 44), to
define keyboard shortcuts and set a number of Options.

4 The Focus Menus
The Workflow tab
Workflow Name
This field represents the name of the currently selected workflow and can be used to define
the name of a new one.
Workflow File Name
The name of the file containing the current configuration. The name of a new configuration
can be entered here.
[Save To Disk]
Saves the current workflow to disk with the defined file name. The newly defined
workflow will appear in the Workflow menu list.
Tasks Manipulation
This area allows you to manipulate the tasks in your workflow. The tasks currently
associated with the workflow are represented by the tabs. Five buttons are provided to
manipulate the tasks.
Creates a new task. A dialog appears in which you enter the name. The new task will
appear as the last tab. Its position can be moved to the left if required.
Deletes the currently selected task (tab).
Renames the currently selected task.
Moves the currently selected task one position to the left.
4 The Focus Menus
Moves the currently selected task one position to the right.

Operable Objects
Operable Objects are objects that have operations performed on them. Click on the [+]
button to see the operable objects. For each task, operable objects can be set.
Visible Objects
Visible Objects are objects that are visible in the document. Click on the [+] button to
see the visible objects. For every task, visible objects can be set. The operable objects are
selected by default.
Ribbon groups
This panel allows you to create new Ribbon Groups and modify the tools contained within
them.
A list of groups defined in the current task is presented. A set of tools allows you to create
a new group , delete a group , move a group up or down .
When a new group is defined it will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface. Tools can
be added to the group by dragging them from the right hand list directly into the ribbon
group. Tools can be removed by dragging them from the group back into the Module UI
Buttons list.

4 The Focus Menus
To configure a workflow
1. Enter a new name if required for the workflow.

2. Define the tasks to be associated with the workflow. Use the Task Manipulation buttons to
create, delete and organize tasks. The defined tasks will appear as a series of tabs.
3. Click on the [+] button next to Operable objects.
4. Step through each of the task tabs and define the operable objects for each task.
5. Click on the [+] button next to Visible objects.
6. Step through each of the task tabs and define the visible objects for each task.
7. Click on the [+] button next to Ribbon Groups.
8. Select a task tab.
9. Select a task tool bar from the left hand list, or click on the create new icon to create a new
toolbar. The new Ribbon Group will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface.
10.Drag the tools from the right hand list of Module UI buttons into the new group.
11.Repeat the process for the other Ribbon Groups and the other tasks.
12.When the workflow is configured click on [Save to Disk].
13.Enter a file name for the workflow and save it with the extension .wff Click [OK].
The workflow will become the current workflow.
The Quick Access tab
This tab enables you to manage the contents of the Quick Access toolbar.
Choose commands from:

Select the required command set from the drop down list presented. The list of tools shown
below will adapt.
[Add]
Adds the item selected from the left hand list to the item in the Quick Access toolbar that
are shown in the right hand list.
[Remove]
Removes the item selected from the right hand list from the Quick Access toolbar.
[Reset]
Resets the content of the Quick Access toolbar to the default setting (containing items from
the File menu).
4 The Focus Menus
Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon

When this item is checked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed below the ribbon.
When this option is unchecked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed above the ribbon.
For other methods of modifying this toolbar see The Quick Access toolbar (see page 44).
The Keyboard tab
This enables you to view, edit and create keyboard shortcuts.
Category:
Select the required command set from the drop down list presented.
Commands:
The list of functions that correspond with the selected category.
Description:
A short description of the selected command.
Key assignments:
The current keyboard shortcuts associated with the currently selected command.
Press new shortcut key:
The new key that will be associated with currently selected command.
[Assign]
Assigns the defined new shortcut key to the currently selected command.
[Remove]
Removes the currently selected key assignment from the command.
[Reset All]
Resets the keyboard shortcuts to the default values (see page 20).
To create a new keyboard shortcut
1. Select the Category to which the command belongs.

2. Select the command from the list.
3. Check the current key assignment if one exists.
4. Press the key(s) that you wish to use as a shortcut. The key combination will appear in the
Press new shortcut key field.
5. Click [Assign].

5 The Focus Toolbars

Focus 2019 Handheld-Inspection provides a number of toolbars which contain tools that are
common to all workflows and tasks.
These include:
• The Quick Access toolbar (see page 44)
• The Additional toolbar (see page 45)
• a set of General Toolbars located below the ribbon:
• The Inspection toolbar (see page 46)
• The Named Views toolbar (see page 49)
• The Info/Visibility toolbar (see page 57)
• The Feature Flyouts toolbar (see page 59)
Manipulating the General Toolbars
The general toolbars can be moved by grabbing them on the on the left hand edge and
dragging them into the scene as shown in the screenshot above.
The presence of these toolbars can be adjusted by right-clicking on the ribbon to open
the popup menu shown below. The toolbars can be hidden or shown by checking the
corresponding button. This same operation can also be performed from the View menu in the
Additional toolbar.
Tools that are contained in these toolbars can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar by
selecting the option Customize Quick Access Toolbar (see page 41) from this menu.
5.1 The Quick Access toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar provides you with direct access to a function with just a single click.
By default the Quick Access toolbar :

• is positioned next to the Focus icon that provides access to the File menu.
• contains items that are available from The File menu (see page 23).
Both the position and the contents of this toolbar can be configured by the user.
To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar
1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.

2. From the drop-down menu select More Commands ...
3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the left hand list.
4. Click on [Add].
5. Click on the <Up arrow> key on the keyboard to move it up the list.
Commands can also be added to toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group (see page 17) and the
Customize dialog accessed from The Workflow menu (see page 38).
To remove commands from the Quick Access toolbar
Either
1. Right click on the icon in the Quick Access toolbar.
2. Select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.

Or
3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the right hand list.
4. Click on [Remove].
Commands can also be added to toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group (see page 17) and the
Customize dialog accessed from The Workflow menu (see page 38).
To move the Quick Access toolbar
Either
2. Select Show Below the Ribbon (or Show Above the Ribbon).
Or
3. Check (or uncheck) the option Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon.
5.2 The Additional toolbar

The Additional toolbar provides tools to determine the content and style of the interface as
well as providing help and information.
The View menu

The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual
appearance.
The View menu (see page 29) is described in the Focus Menus section.
About
Displays information about the installed Focus Inspection framework and modules
This schedules the About dialog box.
[Close]
Closes the About… dialog box
[System Info…]
This schedules the System Info dialog box that shows information on the installed 3D
rendering hardware and on the operating system.
[View End User License Agreement…]
This schedules the End User License Agreement.
Enable / Disable Tutorial Help

Schedules the online help for the current task
This schedules the online help for the current task. Even if you close the Help window, it will
be re-scheduled when you move to another task. To stop the Help appearing click again on the
Help icon.
The Help will only be available if it was selected for installation. The help is also available in
a printable form in pdf format. This is accessible from Start > Nikon Metrology > Program Files
> Documentation.
5.3 The Inspection toolbar
The Inspection toolbar contains tools for manipulating, selecting and presenting the
Inspection models.
Mixed Object Select

Allows selection of different objects
The Mixed Object Select tool enables the selection of all types of objects in the document.
It ends the current operation – active tool. You can use Keyboard shortcuts (see page 20) to
perform these operations.
Component Selection
Creates a lasso for selection
This tool allows you to select all the objects that are contained within the boundaries defined
by a lasso.
To create a lasso for selection
1. Click on the Lasso tool. The cursor will change to the lasso form. This mode will be
scheduled automatically by some operations.
2. Click in the document using the LMB.
3. Check the Visible on button to restrict the selection to items that are visible.
4. Click on points to define a lasso to contain all the objects that you want to select.
5. Click with MMB to close the lasso and define the selection.
View All
Zooms to make all objects visible
This tool sets the zoom on your view so that all objects are visible.
View All - Property sheet

All Views
If the All Views check box is ON, the View All command is applied to all views. If it is
checked OFF, the command is applied to the current view only. The number of views is set
using the Views – Show layouts menu entry.
View Selected
Zooms to make all selected objects visible
The View Selected tool sets the zoom on your view so that all selected objects are visible.
View Selected - Property sheet
All Views
If the All Views check box is checked ON, the View Selected command is applied to
all views. If the All Views check box is checked OFF, the View Selected command gets
applied to the current view only. The number of views is set using the Views – Show
layouts menu entry.
Zoom
Zooms the view
The Zoom tool enables you to zoom in an a selected area of the active view. Drag the mouse to
create a box that will contain the view.
Dolly
Dollies the view
The Dolly tool enables moves the view of the object in a direction perpendicular to the screen
by dragging the LMB. It provides an accurate method of positioning the object.
Rotation Center
Sets the center of rotation
Rotation of an object in the scene is made by dragging the mouse with the right mouse button.
When the rotation operation is activated, a circle appears in the scene. When the mouse is
outside of the circle, the rotation is centered on the centre of the circle. When the mouse is
inside the circle the centre of rotation is set at the point where the mouse is first right-clicked,
as indicated by the presence of a solid cross cursor. This allows you to rapidly change the
centre of rotation by just a click of the mouse.
This tool allows you to pick the centre of rotation. When the tool is activated, the cursor
changes to a cross and you can pick the point on the item where the centre of rotation is to be
located. The item will then be shifted so that the defined centre of rotation is in the centre of
scene. The defined centre of rotation will be maintained while the icon appears as activated.
If however you reset the view using the View all or View selected tools, the Rotation
center tool will be de-activated and the rotation centre will once again be defined by where
ever the mouse is right-clicked.
If you wish to lock the centre of rotation at your chosen point, click on the arrow next to the
tool to open the Rotation Center Property Sheet.
When the Lock Rotation Center is checked ON, the selected point will be retained as the
center of rotation, even when the scene is refreshed.
Tumble
Tumbles the view
The Tumble tool tumbles (rotates) the view of the object, by dragging with the LMB.
Pan
Pans the view
The Pan tool enables panning the active view. Drag the mouse on the view to pan the camera.
Press the SHIFT key to constrain panning.
Note: The Pan tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while
dragging the MMB.
Roll View
Rolls the view
The Roll tool enables rolling the active view around the rotation center. Drag the mouse
horizontally on the view to roll the camera.
Note: The Roll tool can also be invoked by keeping the <ALT> key pressed while
dragging the RMB.
Evaluation Light
Toggles the presence of the evaluation light
The Evaluation Light tool toggles the evaluation light. Press the LMB to position and move
the evaluation light.
Evaluation Light - Property sheet
[Reset]
The Reset button resets the evaluation light to its original location.

Two sided lighting

Sets the evaluation light to the single or two-sided
The Two sided lighting tool toggles if the evaluation light is to be switched on in one direction
or both. If this tool is selected, the lighting is turned on from both the directions; if not then
only in a single direction. If they are flipped,the flip normal tool can be used to make them
consistent with the rest of the faces.
5.4 The Named Views toolbar
The Named Views toolbar contains tools to set the camera position to provide specific views.
With the named views that correspond to one of the six directions of the axes, an Automotive
grid can be displayed .
Top
Sets the view to the top of the object
The Top command sets the active view to the top view.
Bottom
Sets the view to the bottom of the object
The Bottom command sets the active view to the bottom view.
Front
Sets the view to the front of the object
The Front command sets the active view to the front view.
Back
Sets the view to the back of the object
The Back command sets the active view to the back view.
Left
Sets the view to the left of the object
The Left command sets the active view to the left view.
Right
Sets the view to the right of the object
The Right command sets the active view to the right view.
Top South West

Sets the view to the top south west of the object
The Top South West command sets the active view to the top south west view.
Top South East

Sets the view to the top south east of the object
The Top South East command sets the active view to the top south east view.
Top North East

Sets the view to the top north east of the object
The Top North East command sets the active view to the top north east view.
Top North West

Sets the view to the top north west of the object
The Top North West command sets the active view to the top north west view.
Bottom South West

Sets the view to the bottom south west of the object
The Bottom South West command sets the active view to the bottom south west view.
Bottom South East

Sets the view to the bottom south east of the object
The Bottom South East command sets the active view to the bottom south east view.
Bottom North East

Sets the view to the bottom north east of the object
The Bottom North East command sets the active view to the bottom north east view.
Bottom North West

Sets the view to the bottom north west of the object
The Bottom North West command sets the active view to the bottom north west view.
Align View to Entity

Aligns the view to a specified feature or a section
The Align View to Entity command works specifically on features and sections. It aligns the
view to a specified feature or a section.
The Align View to Entity dialog box

Align View
The Align View section aligns the view in two ways:
Perpendicular
The normal of the entity is positioned perpendicular to the view-plane.
Parallel
The the normal of the entity is positioned parallel to the view plane and pointing to the
top.
Scale
The value in this field sets the scale of the view. A default scale is selected when the
dialog is opened. This field allows you to define a specific magnification. By setting
a value higher than the default value, the view is magnified (zoom in). When a lower
value is set, the view is diminished (zoom out).
[Default scale]
This returns the magnification factor to the default for the view.
Rotate View
The rotate view section has options to rotate the view.
Rotate by
The Rotate by button allows the view to be rotated by the value specified in the edit
box in the anti-clockwise direction. To rotate in the clockwise direction, simply give a
negative value in the edit box.
Rotate 90o anti-clockwise

The Rotate 90o anti-clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the anti-clockwise
direction by 90o. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.
Rotate 90o clockwise

The Rotate 90o clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the clockwise direction
by 90o. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.
Flip Horizontal
The Flip Horizontal button will flip the model horizontally keeping the entity aligned to
the view.
Flip Vertical
The Flip Vertical button will flip the model vertically keeping the entity aligned to the
view.
Hide all except selected
When this option is selected everything except the selected item is hidden from the screen.
[Pick] / [Restore]
The Pick button allows to pick the entity – feature/section from the scene or the Inspection
tree. If the entity is pre-selected, then the caption of the button changes to Restore. Restore
button de-selects the entity and allows re-selection.
To align a view to a feature
1.
Click on the Align View to Entity tool .
2. Select the feature or section to which the view is to be aligned.
3. Choose whether the view is to be aligned perpendicular or parallel as to the feature or
section.
4. Click on [Align to Selected].
The view will be adapted.
5. You can now adjust the Scale, by entering the required value, or Rotate or Flip the view
using the buttons provided.
6. Click [Restore] to restore the view to its original orientation.
You can now select a different feature or section.
Named Views
Manages specific views
The Named Views tool manages customized named views. It allows you to save a specific
view of an object that can be retrieved when required.
The Named Views dialog box
Available Views
The Available Views list box lists all views that have been defined in the document.

[Restore]
This button sets the view to the view selected from the list.
[Rename]
This button renames the view selected from the list.
[Delete]
This button removes the view selected from the list.
View Name
This field allows you to enter a name for the current view.
[Save current view with this name]
This button saves the current view with the name specified in the View Name edit box.
[Close]
This button saves the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.
[Cancel]
This button cancels the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.
To create a named view
1. Position the object as required in the document.
2. Click on the Named Views tool.
3. Enter a name for the view.
4. Click [Save current view with this name].
5. Click [Close].
Clipping planes
Defines a pair of parallel clipping planes
This tool allows you to define a pair of parallel planes which can be used to clip away the parts
of the object outside of the clipping planes. The planes used to define the clipping planes can
be based on system axes, planar parts of the model or features. The clipping planes can also
be used to define sections on solids, meshes and point clouds. They can also be used to cut a
mesh or a point cloud along the planes and so create new objects in the inspection tree.
The Clipping Planes dialog
Selection
The Selection panel allows you to switch between the selection of objects or the
manipulation of clipping planes. The field shows the number of items that have been
selected in the Inspection tree and upon which the clipping planes actions will be
performed.
[Reselect]
The [Reselect] button allows you to update the selection field when the selection in the tree
or the scene has been changed.
Objects
When this option is checked, you can modify the objects that are selected in the tree or the
scene. The selection will be updated in the dialog when the [Reselect] button is used.
Clipping Plane Location
When this option is checked, you can click in the scene to define the position of the
clipping planes. The position information will be updated in the Method panel.
Add / Remove clipping planes
This panel lists the currently defined clipping planes. A number of clipping planes can be
defined allowing you to clip an object from different directions, for example in the X and
the Y directions. When the button next to a clipping plane is checked ON, the clipping
planes will be visible in the scene.
[Add]
This adds the current clipping plane definition to the list. A maximum of three clipping
planes can be defined. After that the [Add] button becomes insensitive.
[Remove]
This removes the currently selected (highlighted) clipping planes from the list.
Method
The Method panel contains a number of options for creating the clipping planes.
X, Y , Z
These options enable you to define planes that are perpendicular to the selected axis.

1. Click in the scene to define the position of one of the planes. This will be either the
front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling panel.
2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using either the To field (in which the position is
specified) or the Step field (in which the distance between the planes is specified).
Plane passing through three points
This option enables you to define a plane that passes through three point.
1. Click in the scene on each of the point that you want to use to define the planes.
This will be define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the
Handling panel.
2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
between the planes is specified).
Defined planar area
This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a planar area on
the model. Click in the scene on the planar area you want to use to define the planes. This
will be define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling
panel. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
Measured feature
This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a plane passing
through a selected measured feature.
1. The feature whose plane will be used to define the clipping plane can be selected from
the drop down list.
2. You can choose whether the clipping plane will be Parallel to, or Perpendicular to the
selected feature plane.
3. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
Handling
These buttons allow you to manipulate the defined planes.
Three buttons are provided to allow you to move the position of the
clipping planes. You can choose whether to move the front (yellow) plane, the rear (blue)
plane or both of the planes.
These buttons allows you to choose which of the parallel clipping planes will be
most visible in the scene. These buttons also define which of the planes will be used for the
Cut and Create Section operations. The yellow plane represents the front plane and the blue
plane represents the rear one.
[Cut]
This operation cuts away the part of the object that lies outside of the currently selected
clipping planes. This operation can be undone using the Edit-Undo function from the menu
bar if necessary.
Extra Points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the
defined plane. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order to create
a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 1: Cut effect with and without extra points
[Create section]
This operation allows you to create sections that correspond to the clipping planes. You
can create sections on either one or both of the clipping planes according to options
described above.
[Apply]
Applies the current settings in the dialog, i.e. clips the object according to the settings.
[Close]
This closes the dialog.
To define a set of clipping planes
1. Click on the Clipping planes tools.
2. If no object has been selected then you will need to do so, by checking the Objects button
and then selecting the object in the scene or in the inspection tree. Click the [Reselect]
button.
3. Click the Clipping Plane Location button.
4. Choose the method you want to use to define the clipping planes and follow the instructions
given above.
5. Choose whether you wish to clip on both planes or one plane by selecting the appropriate
option from the Handling panel ( ).

6. When the clipping plane is as required click [Add] to add the defined clipping planes to the
list.
7. Choose another method and create another set of planes to add to the list if required.
8. Select the clipping planes to be used by checking the buttons ON in the list.
9. Click [Apply] to clip the object.
10.Clip operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit menu.
To create sections on clipping planes.
1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.
2. If you wish to clip the object first, select the required pair of clipping planes and click
[Apply].
3. Otherwise select whether you wish to create the section along the front, the rear or both
clipping planes by pressing the required buttons in the Handling plane ( ).

4. Click [Create Section].

5. The sections will appear in the nominal or the measured section of the inspection tree.
To cut an object along clipping planes
Cup operations can only be performed on point clouds and meshes.
1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.
2. Click [Cut].
The point cloud mesh will be cut along the clipping planes. Three new point clouds/meshes
will appear in the inspection tree.
- The part that was on the side of the front plane will be termed _Inner
- The part that was on the side of the rear plane will be termed _Outer_Inner
- The part that was on between the rear and the front plane will be termed _Outer_Outer
Cut operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit menu.
5.5 The Info/Visibility toolbar
The Info/Visibility toolbar provides a set of tools that enable you to view different aspects
of information about objects. It also contains tools that control what is visible in the screen.
Objects which can be viewed or hidden from the scene and which can be manipulated using
this toolbar are those that have a check mark next to them in the Inspection Tree.
The illustration above shows that 'Alignments' can not be viewed because they do not have a
check box next to them. The visibility of any single object can be switched on and off using
the check boxes as well as the entries in this toolbar.
Info
Provides information on selected objects
This tool displays the Object Info dialog box with information on the selected objects.
[Copy ] - copies the contents of the dialog to the clipboard from where you can paste it into
another application.
[Save] - saves the contents of the dialog as a .txt file.
Colors
Allows you to define object attributes
This schedules the The Attributes Information dialog – Drawstyle tab (see page 507).
Automotive grid
Displays a grid on the scene with user-defined characteristics
This tool generates a grid on the scene, the characteristics of which are defined in the
Automotive Grid Properties dialog. The grid can not be used with a ortho view, it can only be
displayed on a Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left or Right view. The grid is defined in the planes
of the axes.
The Automotive Grid Properties
Text starts at X, Y, Z
The values along the three axes at which grid and values grid will be displayed.
Text interval
The distance between major grid lines with text on them. Ticker interval The distance
between minor tick lines between the major grid lines.
Decimals
The number of decimal places used to display the grid values.
Line type
A continuous line is shown across the entire scene.
Marks
represent short lines along the axes.
Text height
The font size (in points) used for the text.
Labels color
The color used for the text.
Lines color
The color used for the grid lines.
Show grid
When this button is checked ON, the grid will be displayed. The grid as defined in this
dialog will appear whenever a suitable view is selected.

[OK]
This button applies the defined grid.
Attributes info
Allows you to define object attributes
This tool schedules the Attributes dialog (see page 501) in which you can define the way in
which the current objects are displayed. The options that are available in this dialog depend on
the object selected.
Toggle Visibility
Toggles the visibility status of objects
This tool switches the visibility of objects in the scene. Objects that have been hidden using
the Hide Selected or Hide All Except Selected tools will be restored to visibility, and
objects currently on view will be hidden.
Show All
Displays all currently available objects
This tool restores the visibility of all the objects that are currently available in the Inspection
data tree.
Hide Selected
Hides selected objects
This tool will remove selected objects from the scene. Their visibility can be restored using the
Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.
Hide All Except Selected

Removes all objects except those that are selected from view
This tool will remove all objects that have not been selected from the scene. Their visibility
can be restored using the Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.
5.6 The Feature Flyouts toolbar
The Feature Flyouts toolbar contains commands to label existing features and sections.
Show Feature Name

Shows the name of a feature
This tool displays the labels of selected feature(s). If no features are specifically selected,
it displays the name of all features in the nominal and/or measured data. The picture below
shows an example.
To show the names of feature(s)

1.
Select Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Select the nominal and/or measure feature(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in the
data tree. If no features are selected, the names of all will be displayed.
3. Click on the Show Feature Name tool.
Hide Feature Name

Hides the name of a Feature
This tool hides the labels of selected or all feature(s) in nominal and/or measured data.
To hide the name of feature(s)
1.
2. Select the nominal and/or measured feature(s) for which you want to hide the label(s). If no
features are selected, all labels will be hidden.
3. Click the Hide Feature Name tool.
Show Section Name

Shows the name of a section
This tool reveals the name of sections.
To show the names of section(s)

1.
2. Select the nominal and/or measure section(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in the
Inspection Tree. If no sections are selected, the names of all sections will be displayed.
3. Click on the Show Section Name tool.

Hide Section Name

Hides displayed section names
This tool hides the name of all the sections revealed in the scene using the Show Section Name
tool. This tool will remove the names of sections that are selected in the Inspection Tree. If no
sections are selected, all labels will be removed.
Flyout Properties
Changes the flyout display style
This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout.
A flyout can be created using the Compare Flyouts (see page 365) tool.
6 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Solid) Workflow
6 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Solid)

Workflow
The Solid Based workflow uses solids as primary nominal models.
It provides sets of tools grouped intuitively within a series of tasks that enable you to
accomplish a full analysis of nominal and measured models.
It consists of the following tasks:
Nominal Task (solid) (see page 62)
Handheld Measurement Task (solid) (see page 140)
Measured Task (solid) (see page 203)
Align Task (solid) (see page 299)
Compare Task (solid) (see page 326)
Report Task (solid) (see page 364)
6.1 Nominal Task (solid)

The Nominal task is primarily used for importing and preparing the Reference or Nominal
model(s) ready for comparison. The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary
Nominal models.
The preparation of the nominal model for comparison includes:

• Importing the Nominal datasets and managing the membership of Nominal models in the
scene.
• Fitting features such as lines, circles, rectangular slots, round slots, key slots, planes, point
cloud/mesh-areas, spheres and cylinders. These are used for feature-based alignment with
measured models in the Align task.
• Constructing features based on existing features.
• Modifying the model in various ways including, merging and mirroring solids, aligning
and flipping face normals, deleting, duplicating, hiding and manipulating layered faces

• Creating GD&T annotation based on features and dimensions as well as determining other
dimensions.
• Creating sections and adding them to a rail.
The Nominal task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
Import Nominal (see page 63)
Feature Fitting (see page 68)
Modify Nominal (see page 112)
GDT Dimensions (see page 118)
Sections (see page 140)
6.1.1 Import Nominal
The Import Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to import the nominal solid models.
6.1.1.1 Import Nominal Solid
Imports a Solid model from various file formats

The Import Solid command imports solid models of types:
SAT-ACIS
IGS/IGES,
CATIAV4(EXP, MODEL, SESSION),
CATIAV5(CATPART),
Pro/Engineer(PRT, ASM),
STP/STEP,
VDA-VDAFS or
Unigraphics (UGS)
Solids can also be imported from Focus Inspection native mfi or pff files. If the mfi or pff
file does not contain a solid, its absence is reported in the status bar. This option also imports
GD&T information.
The Import Solids dialog box
The Import Solids dialog provides the means to browse to where the file to be imported is
located. It also includes some importation options.
Solid Display Accuracy

This defines settings for the visualization of the solid.
Setting the slider to the right, the Quality and the accuracy with which the solid is
displayed will be increased, but the memory usage will be also be increased.
Setting the slider to the left, the memory usage and performance will be improved but the
quality with which the solid is displayed will be decreased.
This value can also be set afterwards inside the application using the Solid Display
Accuracy (see page 66) tool.
Acis Healing
Check this option ON to initiate a healing process that sequentially analyzes, calculates
and fixes stages of geometry simplification. This option is recommended if the file being
imported has been corrupted.
Import Features
This option is only available for CATIAv5 models. When checked features that have been
defined on the model will imported and appear in the Nominal section of the Inspection
tree.
Import Attributes (PMI)
This option is for CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models. When checked attributes associated
with the model will be imported. Attributes include the colour, the material thickness and
the compare tolerance values. These values can be seen in The Attributes tab (see page
508) of the Global information dialog.
Roughness - this imports the roughness attributes associated with the CAD model.
Import Hidden Objects
This option can be used when importing CATIAv5 models. When this option is checked
ON, then all hidden objects associated with the CATIA model will be imported. When
checked OFF, only visible objects will be imported.
As Separate Solids
When this option is ON, all single solids are imported separately even if they are contained
in a layer. Once imported the separate solids can be deleted.
If this option is OFF, all entities contained in a single layer are imported as one solid.

To import a solid
1. Click on the Import Solid tool.

2. In the Import Solids dialog select the required file type in the 'Files of type' drop down list.
3. Select the required files.
4. Set the required Solid Display Accuracy. If the complexity of the model is unknown
set a low value (slider to the left). The accuracy can be adjusted using the Solid Display
Accuracy tool. Only move the slider one or two clicks at a time. Dragging may cause
memory problems.
5. Check the 'Import Features' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this
applies to CATIAv5 models only).
6. Check the 'Import Attributes' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this
applies to CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models only).
7. Check the 'Import Hidden Objects' button if you wish to import these with the solid model
(this applies to CATIAv5 models only).
8. Click the [Import] button.
9. If the status bar indicates problems, set the Acis healing option described above.
Note: Apart from importing IGES Solids, you can also import IGES surfaces as Solids.
While importing the IGES surfaces, watch the status bar for the IGES surfaces to Solid
processing information.
The solid is imported and automatically added to the Nominal window in the Inspection tree.
6.1.1.2 Solid to Mesh
Converts a solid to a mesh

This option enables you to convert a solid to a mesh from the tree or from a file.
The Solid to Mesh dialog
From tree
Use this option to select an already imported solid that is in the Nominal tree, or re-select
it.
From File
Click this option to select a solid that is not yet imported. It will be imported into the
current document when it is converted.
Solid sampling
These options control how the solid will be converted to a mesh.
Maximum error
The maximum deviation between the mesh tessellation and the real solid.
Planar sampling
This represents the maximum distance between the nearby vertices when creating the mesh
tessellation.
Angular sampling
This represents the maximum angle (degrees) between normals of the nearby vertices used
in creating the mesh tessellation.
Keep solid
This option is only available when the solid is already in the Nominal tree. When checked
the original solid will be retained.
[OK]
This button converts (and imports if necessary) the selected solid.
The mesh(es) appear in the Nominal tree. They can only be seen in the display if you are
working in the STL workflow .
To import a solid and convert it to a mesh
1. Click on the 'Solid to Mesh' tool.

2. In the "Solid to Mesh" dialog select the solid to be converted from the Inspection tree and
click [Reselect] if necessary
or
Click 'From File' and browse for the file to be imported and converted.
3. Enter the required solid sampling parameters.
4. If the solid has already been imported and is in the tree you can choose to keep the original
solid.
5. Click [OK] to import and convert the solid to a mesh.
6.1.1.3 Solid Display Accuracy
Sets the accuracy with which a solid is displayed

The Solid Display Accuracy tool is used to set the accuracy of the display of the Solids in the
scene. This tool is also useful to set the accuracy if it was not set earlier while importing using
the Import Solid command, see Import Nominal Solid (see page 63).
Note: This tool is active only when there is a solid model(s) under the Models node of
the Nominal tree.
The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box

In the Solid Display Accuracy dialog box, the accuracy of the display of the Solids in the
scene can be set. The more the slider is to the right, the more accurate the solid will be
displayed but the higher the memory usage will be.
The image below shows a solid model. The first image shows a simplified (inaccurate)
representation that can be used on complex and large models,
The image below shows an accurate representation that can be used on easy and small models.
To set the Solid Display Accuracy
1. Select a solid from the Models node of the Nominal tree if necessary.
If no solids are selected, the accuracy of all solids will be adapted.
2. Click the ‘Solid Display Accuracy’ tool. The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box appears.
3. Drag the slider 1 or 2 clicks at a time (moving the slider all the way to the right will allocate
a lot of (possibly too much) memory) .
4. Click [Apply].
5. Stop dragging the slider to the right when a satisfying result is achieved.
Do not set to a value higher than necessary to avoid using excessive memory.
6. Click [Close ].
6.1.1.4 Add to Nominal
Adds the Selection to the Nominal models

This tool adds an object (Solid / Point cloud /mesh / Feature ) to the Nominal model.
Note: This tool is only active when there is a model (Solid/Point cloud/mesh/Feature)
ready to be added to the membership. Since the application automatically adds the
model to the Models node when you import a Solid model, this tool is typically grayed
out after import.
All nominal models are displayed in the Nominal window of the Inspection tree. During
import, nominal models (Solid/Point cloud/mesh) are automatically placed under this node.
Note: Object types that are not accepted can be modified in the “Config Workflow
Tasks…” editor in the Workflows menu.
To add an object to the Nominal model
1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.

2. Click on the object to be added to the Nominal model. This can be a solid, a point cloud, a
mesh or a feature.
If the tool is not activated then the object is already a member of the Nominal Model node.
3. If the tool icon is active, click on the tool to add the object to the Nominal model node.
6.1.2 Feature Fitting
Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured models.
The purpose of feature detection is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific
parameters such as a center point, axis direction, radius etc. for use in alignment, comparison
and/or dimensional verification.

Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy
because of the clean input. Solid features are fit to selected face and edges.
Features fitted using these tools can also be used to construct additional features (see page
99).
All the feature-fitting tools support the rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature without
opening the feature's property sheet.
6.1.2.1 Fit Feature
Opens up the Feature Detection panel to select the feature(s) to be fitted.

This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be
generated and set the parameters to define it. Some of the options in this panel will always be
insensitive since it depends on the context in which you are working.
Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.
Fit All check box
Fits all the features in the enclosing box

When this check box is switched on, all of the features in the enclosing box, i.e. circles, round
slots, rectangular slots, key slots and hexagonal slots will be detected simultaneously.
Feature Name
This field is insensitive. The detected features are automatically named according to the
convention Nom_{type of feature} (number). For example Nom_Circle and Nom_Circle
(2).The application of the prefix Nom_ allows you to use the functionality to detect
measured feature dimensions from nominal ones.
Advanced
Tolerance The value defined here applies to all the features detected.
[Detect]
This button will fit the features on the selected solid faces.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing all of the feature detected with this
functionality. This can be repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when
the button becomes insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect multiple feature types
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the All check button .
3. Click on the solid face(s) on which the features will be detected.
4. Define a tolerance if required. This will apply to all features.
5. Click [Detect].
All features of the types listed above will be detected and appear in the respective Features
sections of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
6.1.2.1.1 Create Nominal Feature Point
Creates a point feature at a specified location

The Create Nominal Feature Point tool creates a feature point in the model at the specified
location.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.

Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature point that is to be created. The default name
contains the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions
from nominal ones in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in
the feature name.
Fixed Center X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the feature point to be created. These fields will either show the
coordinates of the point selected in the scene or can be used to define the required
coordinates of the feature point manually.
[Create]
This button will create the feature point at the defined position.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be repeated
until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes insensitive.
[Close]
To create a nominal feature point

2. Click the Create Nominal Feature Point tool.
3. In the Selection dialog choose the Pick Select option.
4. Enter a name if required, otherwise the default name will be used followed by an integer in
brackets.
5. There are two means to define the position of a nominal feature point:
EITHER
Click with the LMB on the solid where you want to create a nominal feature point. The co-
ordinates in the panel will be updated to show co-ordinates of the clicked point.
OR
Enter the required XYZ coordinates in the corresponding fields in the panel.
6. To create the point
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Create] in the definition panel.
7. Click [Close] when all the required features have been defined.
The feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the Inspection tree.
6.1.2.1.2 Fit Nominal Line
Detects or creates a line feature

This tool fits a straight line to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a line with
specified characteristics.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.

the feature name.
Fixed Length
When this option is checked, the line feature will have a defined length. The value for the
length can be specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center point of the line will be set at a defined point.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the line.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the line will be set by a defined vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the axis of the line.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model
and the specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a line feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using the
single Pick option or using the Lasso (see page 46) option.
4. Enter a name for the new feature. If no name is specified a default name is generated.
5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more edges in the solid using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the line feature:
EITHER
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The figure below shows a line detected from a single edge selected in the scene.
The pictures below show the line of a fixed length fitted to a selected edge.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a line feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the line, i.e. its length, center point and direction.
5. Click [Create]
6.1.2.1.3 Fit Nominal Circle
Detects or creates a circle feature

This tool fits a circle to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a circle with specified
characteristics.

Feature Name
the feature name.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked ON, the circle feature will have a defined radius. The required
value can be entered in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked ON, the circle will have its center at a defined point.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the circle.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked ON, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specific vector
I, J, K
The vector components defining the axis of the circle.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model, and/
or specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the circle have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius, the center point and the direction. It will create a circle feature with
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a circle feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.
4. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will be
used.
5. Enter a value for some of the circle characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the circle feature:
EITHER
OR
To create a circle feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and direction.
5. Click [Create]
6.1.2.1.4 Fit Nominal Round Slot
Detects a round slot feature

The Fit Nominal Round Slot tool is used to fit a round slot to the selected points/edge in the
model.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below

Feature Name
the feature name.
Advanced
Slot Type
The Slot Type parameter specifies at what ends the slot will be truly round. The choices
are between :
Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.
First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring one end.
Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the other end.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs (points/edges) are selected on
the model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a round slot feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Round Slot tool.
used.
4. Click on Advanced and choose how the ends of the slots are to be detected.
5. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso (see page 46)
6. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the round slot feature:
EITHER
OR
6.1.2.1.5 Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot
Detects a rectangular slot feature

The Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool is used to fit a Rectangular Slot to the selected points/
edge in the model.
Feature Name
the feature name.

[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a rectangular slot feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool.
used.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso (see page 46) option.
5. Select the area on the model in which the slot will be detected.
6. To detect the rectangular slot feature:
EITHER
OR
6.1.2.1.6 Fit Nominal Key Slot
Detects a key slot feature

This tool is used to fit a key slot to the selected points/edge in the model. A key slot has two
component holes, a small one and a big one, that are used as the base for key slot construction.
Feature Name
the feature name.
Advanced
Slot Type
The Slot parameter defines the key slot shape. Two options are available:
• Straight: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is
extended to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.
• Tangent: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is
progressively enlarged to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.

[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input have been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a key slot feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Key Slot tool.
used.
4. Click on Advanced and choose the slot type.
6. Select area over which the key slot will be detected.
7. To detect the key slot feature:
EITHER
OR
6.1.2.1.7 Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot
Detects and creates a hexagonal slot feature

The Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool is used to fit a hexagonal slot to the selected points/edge
in the model.
Feature Name
the feature name.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs have been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a hexagonal slot feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool.
used.
5. Select the area over which the hexagonal slot will be detected.
6. To detect the hexagonal slot feature:
EITHER

OR
6.1.2.1.8 Fit Nominal Plane
Detects or creates a plane feature

This tool fits a plane to the selected points/face(s) in the model or creates a plane according to
specified features.
Feature Name
the feature name
Fixed Size
When this option is checked, the side of the plane will be of a specified length. The value
of the length is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the plane will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the plane.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the direction of the normal to the plane will be defined by a
specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the normal to the plane.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model
and the specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the plane have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a plane feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.
used.
4. Enter a value for some of the plane characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more faces in the scene using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the plane feature:
EITHER
OR
To create a plane feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the plane, i.e. its size, center point and direction.
5. Click [Create]

6.1.2.1.9 Fit Nominal Cylinder
Detects and creates a cylinder feature

The Fit Nominal Cylinder tool is used to fit a cylinder to the selected points/face(s) in the
model or to create a cylinder based on specified values.
Feature Name
the feature name.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified radius. The
radius is specified in the input field.
Fixed Height
When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. The
height is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked ON, the center of the cylinder will be in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the cylinder.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the cylinder will be defined by a specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the axis of the cylinder.
[Detect]
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the cylinder have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius, the height, the center point and the direction. It will create a cylinder
feature with these characteristics.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a cylinder feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
used.
4. Enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics if required.
using the Lasso option (see page 46) option.
6. Select a plane in the scene using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the cylinder feature:
EITHER
OR
To create a cylinder feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the cylinder, i.e. its radius, height, center point and
direction.
5. Click [Create]

6.1.2.1.10 Fit Nominal Sphere
Detects and creates a sphere feature

This tool fits a sphere to the selected points/faces in the model, or creates a sphere with
Feature Name
the feature name.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the sphere feature will have a specified radius. The radius is
specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the sphere will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the sphere.
[Detect]
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the sphere have been defined in
the panel, i.e. the radius, and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these
characteristics.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a sphere feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
used.
4. Enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics if required.
5. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option (see page 46).
6. Select one or more points in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the sphere feature:
EITHER
OR
To create a sphere feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius and center point.
5. Click [Create]
6.1.2.1.11 Fit Nominal Cone
Detects a cone feature

The Detect Nominal Cone tool is used to fit a cone frustum to the selected points/face(s) in the
model.

Feature Name
the feature name.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a cone feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cone tool.
single Pick option or using the Lasso option (see page 46).
used.
5. Enter the required tolerance value.
6. Select one or more points on the solid using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the cone feature:
EITHER
OR
6.1.2.1.12 Detect Nominal Line Profile
Detects a line profile feature.

This tool creates a feature that characterises the profile of a section. It is used in GD&T feature
analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the line profile.
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_LineProfile an the identification of the associated section.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
This must be a line section or a part of a line section.
[Undo]
[Close]

To detect a line profile feature
1.
Click on the Create section tool to create the sections required.
3. Click on the Detect Nominal Line Profile tool.
5. Select a single section, either in the Inspection Tree or the Scene.
The Lasso option (see page 46) in the Selection dialog allows you to select just a part of a
section if required.
6. EITHER click the MMB in the scene,
OR click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The Line Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree.
A tolerance can be defined for the line profiles using the Create GD&T (see page 118) tool
6.1.2.1.13 Detect Nominal Surface Profile
Detects a surface profile feature

This tool creates a features that characterizes the profile of a surface. It is used in GD&T
feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the surface profile. This feature can
only be detected on a solid or meshed surface.
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_SurfaceProfile and a number.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once a solid surface has been selected in the scene.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a surface profile feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Surface Profile tool.
single Pick option or using the Lasso option (see page 46) option.
5. Select surface areas on the solid or the mesh using the chosen tool.
The Surface Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree.
.
6.1.2.2 Import Features
Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.
This tool enables you to import features. The .mff format is used to import features that have
been exported using Export features (see page 98) tool. Beside this there are other bespoke
client file formats. It schedules the Import Nominal Features dialog in which you can browse
for the file that contains the exported features.
The file types supported are:
- .TXT (client feature files)
- .MFF (Focus feature files)
- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)
- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)
The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.

To import nominal features
1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.

2. In the Import Nominal Features dialog browse for the file in which features have been
exported using the Export features (see page 98) tool.
3. Click [Import].
6.1.2.3 Surface Point from Point
Creates Surface points from Feature points and Nominal Model.

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the
selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one feature
point must be visible to create surface points.
This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.
The Create Surface Points from Feature Points dialog box
[ Reselect Points /Point clouds]

The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features
tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points will
be selected.
[ Reselect Nominal ]
The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that have been selected in the
nominal models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the
nominal models will be selected.
Warning tolerance
Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal
model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then a warning
message will be appeared in the Warning Message panel. However, surface point(s) will be
created.
To tree
When checked, the surface point(s) will added to the Inspection tree.
To file
When checked, the surface point(s) are saved into the file specified. These saved surface
point(s) can be used for Directional Compare (see page 329).
[ Create ]
Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s).
[ Delete ]
This button deletes all the surface points that appear in the nominal features tree
irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after surface points have been
created.
[ Close ]
This closes the Create Surface Points dialog box.
To create surface points
1. Import any nominal model and create feature point(s) on the model.
2. Click the Create Surface Points tool.
By default the current nominal model and all feature points in the tree will be selected.
3. To change the default selection, choose the required objects and then click on [Reselect
Points /Point clouds] and [Reselect Nominal ].
4. Set the warning tolerance as required.
5. Choose where you want the resulting surface points to the located. (To tree and/or To file)
6. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s).
If To tree has been selected, the surface point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
6.1.2.4 Detect Edge
Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections.

This tool is used to detect Edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles using calipers. It
allows you to define, load and save caliper definitions and to choose the type of output feature
required. The features types are selected on sections that have been created on the object.
An Edge (Corner) is defined as:
• The projection of point ‘c’ onto a line ‘ab’ in the direction of caliper angle ‘1’
• Directions: normal of line ‘ab’ and normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Figure 2: Edge detection
A Combi-Hem is defined as:

• First point: connection point ‘b’
• Second point: projection of ‘c’ onto line ‘ab’ in direction of caliper angle ‘1’
Directions:
• First point: normal of line ‘ab’
• Second point: normal of line ‘ab’ AND normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Figure 3: Combi-Hem detection
A Combi-Profile is defined as:

• First and second points: connection point ‘b’
• Third point: connection point ‘c’
Directions:
• First and second point: normal of line ‘ab’.
• Third point: normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Figure 4: Combi-Profile detection
The Detect Edge - Combi Hem - Combi Profile dialog
This dialog has two tabs; the Caliper tab enables you to define and select calipers, and the
Detect tab enables you to select the caliper to be used and detect the required feature.
The Detect tab.
Nominal
The number of nominal sections selected.
Measured
The number of measured sections selected.
Caliper
This allows you to select a caliper from the list of available calipers. Calipers are defined in
the Caliper tab.
Use on Rail
When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.
Output
Select the required feature output - Edge, Combi-hem or Combi-Profile.
Section healing tolerance
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections.
The Caliper tab.

[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the ‘current’
caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
[Detect]
Click this button to detect the required feature type on the selected sections.
To detect an Edge, Combi hem or Combi Profile
1. Create the sections (see page 347) that cut through the edges you want to detect.
2. Select the sections in the tree.
3. Click on the Detect Edge tool.
4. If you have not yet defined a caliper, click on the Caliper tab to do so.
5. Define the caliper parameters or click on [Load...] button to retrieve a previously defined
one.
The screen shot below shows the definition of a typical caliper for detecting edges.
6. Save the caliper definition if required.

7. Click on the Detect tab.
8. Choose the type of edge to be detected. The examples below detect an "Edge".
9. Move the mouse along the section. Wherever the caliper detects an edge it will appear in
the scene.
10.When the caliper is in the required position click with the LMB.
11.Click [Detect].
The edge will appear in the scene and in the Features section in the Nominal tree.
6.1.2.5 Export features
Exports features to a file

This tool enables you to export features to MFF (Focus Feature Files) or TXT (Delimited
ASCII Files) or IGS, IGES (Interop) files. Features that have been exported to an MFF file can
then be imported using the Import Features (see page 92) tool.

It schedules the Export Features As dialog in which you can specify the file in which the
features will be exported.
If you select to export the features to a Delimited ASCII file, you will be presented with the
Export Features dialog in which you can select the specific feature data to be exported and the
Delimiter (Tab or Comma) to be used.
Note: Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features (see page
413) tool in the Export ribbon group in the Report tab.
To export features
1. Select the Features to be exported (in the tree)

3. In the Export Features As dialog enter a name for the file in which the features are to stored.
4. If the output format you have chosen is ASCII delimited, select the feature information to
be exported and the delimiter to be used.
5. Click [Save].
6.1.2.6 Flip Feature
Switches the direction of the normal of selected features

The Flip Feature tool flips the directions of the normals of selected features.
Flip Feature property sheet
[Flip Normals]
Switches the normal direction of the selected features.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has the faces lit on the
positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the face normals.
To Flip a Feature Direction
1. Click the Flip Feature icon. It enables the tool and shows the normals of all features present.
2. Select the feature to be flipped using Left Mouse Button LMB.
3. Click [Flip Normals] on the property sheet or click on the arrow tip to flip the normal
direction for the selected feature.
6.1.3 Construct Feature
The Construct toolbar allows you to construct new features from existing features.
The properties of the constructed feature follow modifications in the properties of the features
used to define it. This is illustrated in the figure below, where points were constructed at the
intersection of two circles.
When the position of the circles is changed, the position of the dependent points follows the
movement.
Clicking on this tool bar opens a docked panel in which various features can be constructed
using various methods.
All constructed features appear in the Inspection Tree and can be identified by their name and
a green icon.
The following types of features can be constructed:
• Construct Circle (see page 100)
• Construct Plane (see page 102)
• Construct Line (see page 104)
• Construct Point (see page 106)
6.1.3.1 Construct Circle
A circle can be constructed in three ways:
• Circle Tangent To Two Lines (see page 100)
• Intersection Cone-Plane (see page 101)
• Intersection Cylinder-Plane (see page 101)
• Intersection Sphere-Plane (see page 102)
Circle Tangent To Two Lines
Circles that are tangent to two lines are constructed with the specified radius.

Up to 4 circles can be constructed. The user picks the one required.

Conditions:
• The two lines must intersect - they can not be parallel.
Intersection Cone-Plane
A circle is constructed where a plane feature intersects a cone feature.
When constructing features, all planes and lines are assumed to be infinite. So the feature can
be constructed even if the two existing features do not appear to intersect in the scene.
Note: that only circle features can be constructed. If the angle between the normal of
the cone and the normal of the plane differ by more than +/-10°, the intersection will be
a conic section and the construction will fail.
Conditions:
• The angle between the normal to the plane and the normal axis of the cone should be less
than 10°.
Intersection Cylinder-Plane
A circle is constructed where a plane intersects a cylinder.
When constructing features, all planes and lines are assumed to be infinite. So the feature can
be constructed even if the two existing features do not appear to intersect in the scene.
Note: that only circle features can be constructed. If the angle between the normal of
the cylinder and the normal of the plane differ by more than +/-10°, the intersection
will be a conic section and the construction will fail.
Conditions:
• The angle between the normal to the plane and the normal axis of the cone should be less
than 10°.
Intersection Sphere-Plane
A circle is constructed where a plane intersects a sphere.
Conditions:
• The plane and the sphere must intersect.
6.1.3.2 Construct Plane
A Plane feature can be constructed :
• At the mid-plane of two existing plane features
Mid Plane of Two Planes
One plane will be constructed when the existing planes are parallel.

If there is an angle between the two planes as shown below...
... two orthogonal planes will be constructed at the angle between the planes.
The user chooses the required plane.

Conditions: - none.
6.1.3.3 Construct Line
Lines can the constructed by the following means:
• Intersection Plane-Plane (see page 104)
• Line between two points (see page 105)
• Mid line of two lines (see page 105)
Intersection Plane-Plane
A line is constructed where two plane features intersect.

The line is not necessarily the same length and the intersection of the planes.
Conditions:
• The two planes must intersect
If not you will see the message "selected planes are parallel or coplanar".
Line between two points
A line feature is constructed between two selected point features.
Conditions:
• The points can not be coincident.
Mid line of two lines
Lines are constructed at the point mid-way between two lines, and at the angle between the
two lines.
Two orthogonal solutions are available at the angle between the lines. The user chooses the
line required.
Conditions:
• The two lines can not be parallel
6.1.3.4 Construct Point
Points can be constructed in the following ways:
• Intersection of two circles (see page 106)
• Intersection Circle-Plane (see page 107)
• Intersection Line-Circle (see page 108)
• Intersection of a line and a cylinder feature (see page 108)
• Intersection of two lines (see page 108)
• Intersection of a line and a plane (see page 109)
• Mid-points of two points (see page 109)
• Projecting a point onto a line (see page 110)
• Projecting a point onto a mesh (see page 110)
• Projecting a point onto a plane (see page 111)
• Projecting a point onto a solid (see page 111)
Intersection Circle-Circle
A point is constructed where two circles intersect.

Two solution are available - pick the one required.

Conditions :
• The circles must intersect
• The circles must lie in the same plane.
Intersection Circle-Plane
A point is constructed where a circle and a plane intersect.
Two solution are available - pick the one required.

Conditions :
• The circle and the plane must intersect
Intersection Line-Circle
A point is constructed where a line feature intersects with a circle.
When two solutions are available the user selects the required solution.
Conditions :
• The line and the circle must intersect.
Intersection Line-Cylinder
A point is constructed where a line feature intersects with a cylinder.
When two solutions are available the user selects the required solution.
Conditions :
• The line and the cylinder must intersect.
Intersection Line-Line
A point is constructed where two lines intersect

Conditions :
• The lines must not be parallel.
Intersection Line-Plane
A point is constructed where a line intersects with a plane.
Conditions :
• The line and the plane can not be parallel, the line must intersect with the plane.
Mid Point of Two Points
A point is constructed at the mid point of two points
Conditions : none.
Projection Point-Line
A point is created where the existing point feature is projected onto a line.
The point is created at the shortest distance between the existing point and the line feature.
Conditions : none.
Projection Point-Mesh
A point is constructed where a point feature is projected onto a mesh in the specified direction.
It is not possible to specify which direction along the selected axis the projection is to be
made. If there are two possibilities, the nearest point is created.
Conditions:

• It must be possible for the point to be projected onto the mesh in the required direction.
Projection Point-Plane
A point is created where the existing point feature is projected onto a plane.
The point is constructed at the shortest distance between the existing point feature and the
plane.
Conditions : none
Projection Point-Solid
A point is constructed where a point feature is projected onto a solid in a specified direction.
It is not possible to specify which direction along the selected axis the projection is to be
made. If there are two possibilities, the nearest point is created.
Conditions :
• It must be possible for the point to be projected onto the solid in the required direction.
6.1.4 Modify Nominal
The Modify Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to modify the nominal solid models.
6.1.4.1 Align Normals
Aligns the Surface Normal orientations of all (selected) solids

The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to
obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points have positive deviations and inside points
have negative deviations). The Align Normals tools unifies and aligns Normals of all the faces
of the selected Solid model to a marked face.
The Align Normals property sheet
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter sets the tolerance distance between two surfaces that is used by
the search algorithm to find the neighboring surfaces.
[Select Reference Surface(s)]
This button is used to mark a reference face in a solid to align other selected faces with.
Only one surface can serve as reference, this is always the last selected one.
[Select Surfaces To Align]
This button is used to mark a limited set of faces for aligning with the reference surface.
Two-sided lighting
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on the
positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals.
Note: When using Align Normals on a selected number of faces only, the faces
are marked in red upon selection. If Two-sided lighting is turned off, the dark faces
show the red color in a deep red close to black.

[Align]
This button activates the aligning process of the normals, based on the parameters set in the
property sheet.
To align normals
1. Click on the Align Normals tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. This allows you to choose whether you wish to select individual
faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only one surface
can be selected as the reference, select the Pick option in this dialog.
3. Click the small black triangle next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. This is
necessary if you wish to adapt the parameters, or if you wish to align just a few surface.
4. Click with the LMB on the model to select the reference surface. This will be colored red.
5. If you just want to align all normals to this surface, simply click the MMB.
6. If you have the property sheet open click [Select Reference]. It will change to [Selected] to
indicate that the selection is made.
7. If you wish to align the normals of specific surfaces select them. This can be done using the
Pick option in the Select dialog with the key to add to the selection and the key to subtract
from selection. Alternatively you can to switch to the Lasso mode (see page 46) in the
Select dialog and create a lasso to enclose the required surfaces. The selected faces are
colored in red. The faces turn deep red on selection if the faces are black due to single side
lighting.
8. Click [Select to Align] to mark the selected faces as the faces to be aligned. The button
changes to [Selected] to indicate that the selection is made.
9. Set the Tolerance parameter if needed.
10.Click [Align] button to align all the marked faces with the Reference face.
6.1.4.2 Flip Normal
Changes the direction of the Normal of selected surfaces

The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to
obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points get positive deviations and inside points
get negative deviations). The Flip Normal tool flips one or more faces of the selected model to
achieve the correct orientation.
The Flip Normal property sheet
[Flip Normals]
This button switches the direction of the normals of the selected faces.
Two-sided lighting
This checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON, the model has both
sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on the positive side only.
This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals.
All Faces
This checkbox allows you to switch the normal direction of all faces on the model.
To change the direction of normals of surfaces
1. Click the Flip Normal tool.

faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within in the Lasso mode (see page 46).
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to open
the property sheet if you wish to adjust the lighting or to switch the direction of all the
faces.
4. Select the faces to switch using the selected tool. The faces will be colored red.
5. To select all the faces check the All Faces button in the property sheet.
6. To switch the normals of the selected faces either click with the MMB on the model or
click [Flip Normals] in the property sheet.
Note: If no results appear after the flip normal command, check if the Two-sided
lighting option is enabled. In that case, both sides are lit and there is no visual
difference.
6.1.4.3 Remove Duplicate Faces
Removes duplicated faces from the imported model

This tool removes duplicate faces in the imported Solid models. Duplicate faces can give
undesirable results during comparison.
The Remove Duplicate Face(s) property sheet
[Highlight Duplicate Face(s)]

This button highlights the duplicate face(s) in selected solid(s).
Duplicate Face(s)
This field shows the total number of duplicate faces highlighted after the Highlight
Duplicate Face(s) button is clicked. It shows the total number of duplicate faces removed
after Remove Duplicate Face(s) command is executed.
[Remove Duplicate Face(s)]
This button removes the highlighted face(s).

To remove Duplicate Face(s)
1. Click on the Remove Duplicate Face(s) tool.

2. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to use the single Pick option
or the Lasso mode (see page 46).
3. If you wish to work with the property sheet, click on the small arrow next to the Remove
Duplicate Face(s) tool.
4. Highlight the duplicated surfaces. This can be done either:
- by clicking [Highlight Duplicate Face(s) button] or
- by clicking with the MMB on the model.
5. The number of duplicated faces is shown in the Duplicate Face(s) field or in the status bar.
6. (Optional) Using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys, you can select more faces or deselect
unwanted face(s) highlighted in the previous step.
7. Remove the duplicated faces either by clicking [Remove Duplicate Face(s)] in the property
sheet, or by clicking with the MMB on the model.
8. The number of removed faces is indicated in the Duplicate Face(s) field and in the status
bar.
6.1.4.4 Remove Faces
Removes selected faces from the model

This tool removes selected faces from an imported solid model.
The Remove Faces property sheet
[Remove Selected Face(s)]

This button removes the selected face(s) from one or more solids.
To remove a face
1. Click on the Remove Faces tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the Pick
option, or select faces within a Lasso (see page 46).
3. Click on the small arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet.
4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids, using the selected tool.
5. Click MMB on the model or click [Remove Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to
remove the selected faces.
The faces will be removed from the model. This operation can be undone if necessary using
the Undo tool from the Quick Access Toolbar or the from the File - > Edit menu.
6.1.4.5 Hide Faces
Hides or shows the solid faces

This tool hides selected faces or shows all faces in solid.
The Hide Faces property sheet
[Hide Selected Face(s) ]

This button hides the selected faces from one or more solids.
[Show All Faces]
This button shows all the faces, hidden by Hide Selected Face(s) command from one or
more solids.
To hide faces
1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the Pick
option, or select multiple faces within a Lasso (see page 46).
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet.
4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids using the selected tool.
5. Click MMB on the model or [Hide Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to hide the
selected face(s).
To show all faces
1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.

2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.
3. Select one or more solids for which you want to show all the faces hidden by Hide Face(s)
command.
4. Click [Show All Faces] in the property sheet to show all the faces for selected solids.
6.1.4.6 Select Single Side
Creates a new solid from selected surfaces

This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given tolerance and
extracts them into a new separate solid. The separated solid can be used as a stand-alone solid
to compare to the measured models.
The Select Single Side property sheet

New Name
Enter a name for the extracted solid.
Angle (degrees)
This parameter specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any
surface whose slope is equal or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the
Reference surface can be marked and isolated.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter specifies the tolerance distance between adjacent or neighboring
surfaces while the function is searching for surfaces.
[Run]
The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle and Tolerance values set
in the property sheet.
[Separate Solid(s)]
The Separate Solid(s) button isolates the surfaces detected by the Run process into a new
independent solid. The newly extracted Solid will have the name as defined in the “New
Name” edit box of the property sheet. The original solid's name remains unchanged.
To isolate a single side solid
1. Click the “Select Single Side” tool.

faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only one surface
can be taken as the reference, then the Pick option is the easiest to use.
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to open
the property sheet if you wish to adjust the command parameters.
4. Select the reference face in the Solid using the selected tool. The selected surfaces are
highlighted in red.
5. Adjust the Angle and Tolerance values if necessary.
6. Search for the surfaces that match the parameters either by clicking the MMB or [Run] in
the property sheet.
The number of surfaces that match the criteria is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
7. Enter the name of the new solid.
8. Create the new solid either by clicking MMB or [Separate solids] in the property sheet.
A new solid will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.
6.1.4.7 Merge Solids
Merges selected solids into one

This tool merges selected solids into one solid. This tool is only available if more than one
solid is selected.
To merge selected solids
1. Select more than one solid. Use the <Ctrl> key to make multiple selection in the inspection
tree.
2. Click the Merge Selected Solids tool.
The selected solids will be merged into one solid with -Merged as suffix.
6.1.4.8 Mirror Objects
Mirrors objects around a plane

For details refer to Mirror Objects (see page 293)
6.1.5 GD&T Dimensions
The GD&T Dimensions Ribbon Group enables you to create dimensions that can be used for
GD&T evaluations.
Note: the dimensions that are detected using these tools can only be based on features.
This toolbar contains the following tools:

Create GD&T (see page 118)
Linear Perpendicular (see page 127)
Aligned Parallel (see page 130)
Radius (see page 133)
Angle (see page 136)
Gap Flush Caliper (see page 136)
6.1.5.1 Create GD&T
Creates a GD&T tolerance

This tool enables you to define GD & T tolerances that are based on the ASME 914.5M
Standard on defined features and dimensions. These tolerances are displayed as flyouts on the
features or updates on the dimensions and can be used as a basis for evaluation.

Note: that this manual does not describe in detail all the GD&T parameters, it is
assumed that the user is familiar with these.
Specific features are provided to improve the evaluation of a surface profile from laser
scan data. The use of these parameters is described below (see page 122).
The Create GD&T Annotation dialog
There are a number of tabs in this dialog and the appearance of the dialog depends very much
on the tab you are using.
Selection
This field shows the currently selected feature for which a GD&T tolerance will be defined.
If no feature is pre-selected you will be prompted to select one. This can be done either in the
scene or in the Inspection tree, or from the Selection drop down list.
The tabs
The Datum tab allows you to define the datums that will be used tolerance definition. For
specific details on this tab see The Datum tab (see page 121).
The Tolerance tabs (Size, Form, Orientation, Location, Dimension and Runout) allows you
define the tolerance values (see page 119) for the selected feature(s).
Note: When defining a tolerance for a Surface Profile (see page 122) some specific
parameters are defined.
Tolerance values
Tolerance Values
These fields allow you to enter the require upper and lower tolerance values.
The resulting flyout is illustrated in the Drawing display area.
Composite Tolerance
For some of the characteristics (Orientation and Location) you can define either a local
or composite tolerance. A composite tolerance will assess the location or the orientation
of the feature based not only on the characteristics of the individual feature, but on its
relationship to other features. Thus you can define a tolerance that dictates the position of a
row of three holes for example.
When using a Composite tolerance, you can set an overall tolerance on the location/
orientation of the group as well as the same tolerance on each member of the group.
The group tolerance is defined in the upper row. The individual tolerance is defined in the
lower row.
• The first field contains a drop down list that only applies to certain feature types and
does not need to be set otherwise.
• The second field contains the tolerance value.
• The third field contains a drop down list that defines a material condition and which
does not need to be set.
Projected Tolerance Zone
You can use this field to extend the tolerance zone around a feature by the specified
amount.
Planar Tolerance Direction
The three fields contain the components of the vector normal to the tolerance plane. The
[Update] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK value of the scene
camera.
Datum Compartment
The Datum compartment allows you to specify a combination of datums that will be used
in the evaluation of the tolerance, such as a set of orthogonal planes for example. The
required datums must have been defined in the Datum tab (see page 121) and can be
selected from the drop down list.
If the Repeat button is checked the single feature tolerance will also take into account the
selected datums.
Drawing Display
This provides an indication of the information that will be presented in the flyout. The
upper row represents the composite tolerance value and the lower value the individual
tolerance value.
Additional Features
This is list of the additional features that match the selected feature type. The items
selected will be included in the composite tolerance.

The Datum tab
You can define either:

• A single datum
This is the only option available if there is only one instance of the selected feature type. No
"Additional features" will be presented in the Datum tab.
• A composite datum.
This option is available if you have more than one instance of a particular feature type
created and visible in the Inspection tree. A composite datum allows you to define a datum
relative to the a collection of features of the same type.
Name
Enter the name used to define the datum in this field. It will be shown in the Drawing
display area.
Secondary Direction
This field is used only in the case of a nominal line feature being selected as a datum. It
displays the values of the normal to this line (relative to the scene) which will be used to
create the datum plane.
The [Update from View] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK
value of the scene camera.
Additional Features
Additional features appear if more than one instance of the selected feature type exists.
A list of all the visible features of the same type as that selected in the Selection field is
presented. Check the box next to those that you wish to include in the composite datum
Use middle plane / separate planes
This choice is only available when two features are included in the composite datum.
It allows you define the datum as the plane located in the middle of two features or on
separate planes related to the separate features.
Parameters for a Surface Profile
Tolerance
(Overall) Tolerance
The tolerance for a surface profile can be defined in up to three "segments". This allows
you to define an overall tolerance in which the measured data is expected to fit, as well
as a Surface Profile per Unit Area tolerance.
An overall tolerance is illustrated by the green dashed lines in the figure below.
Figure 5: Surface profile tolerance
The definition of such a tolerance is shown in the first tolerance row in the screenshot
above.
Surface Profile Per Unit Area Tolerance

The figure below illustrates the case where although the measured data is within the
defined overall tolerance, there is a distinct discontinuity, which needs to be evaluated.
See also Illustration of the evaluation of a Surface Profile per Unit Area evaluation (see
page 345).
Figure 6: Variation in surface profile data
In order to evaluate this, you can specify a surface profile per unit area tolerance.
This involves specifying a disc with a certain diameter (D) and depth (d). The volume
represented by this disc is moved over the points on the surface profile.

Figure 7: Surface Profile Per Unit Area definition
At each point, the amount of data that can be contained with disc is assessed and a
single scalar value is computed. This scalar value represents the depth of the disc
required to contain all the data when disk is centered on the point that is being
evaluated.
In the figure above, when the disc is point (1) all of the measured data can fit within the
disc, and so the data is regarded as being within tolerance. At point (2), the disc would
have to be extended to contain all the data, so the scalar value would be higher.
Such a tolerance is defined in the second row (segment) in the screenshot above. In this
case the diameter of the disc (D ) is 0.1 and the depth (d) is 0.1.
In this case, the disc needs to remain parallel to the nominal surface as it moves over the
surface profile. This is indicated by the orientation constraint >< setting. This type of
evaluation takes less cpu time, so can be used to fine-tune the parameters.
For the third tolerance defined, the disc is allows to rotate to include more points in
the neighbourhood of the point being evaluated as shown in the figure below. This
represents a less restrictive constraint.
You can specify whether the disc can rotate or not. In this case when the disc is at the
position shown below all the data can be contained within the disc volume.
Figure 8: Surface Profile Per Unit Area with rotation
The flyout resulting from the evaluation of an overall tolerance would be as shown
below.
Search range
Each measured point is projected perpendicularly onto the nominal surface. If the
projection distance is greater than half the defined search range, the measured point will
not be included in the evaluation of the surface profile tolerance or the surface profile per
unit area.
Figure 9: Search range
Normal angle
Each measured point is projected perpendicularly onto the nominal surface. If the angle
between the nominal normal and the measured normal is greater than the defined normal
angle, then the measured point is not included in the evaluation of the surface profile
tolerance or the surface profile per unit area. The nominal normal is the normal of the
nominal surface at the location of the projection.
Figure 10: Normal angle
Inset distance
Each measured point is projected perpendicularly onto the nominal surface. If the projected
point is closer to the boundary of the nominal surface profile than the defined inset
distance, then the measured point is not included in the evaluation of the surface profile
tolerance or the surface profile per unit area.
Figure 11: Inset distance
See also Illustration of the evaluation of a Surface Profile per Unit Area evaluation (see
page 345).
[Apply]
When all the required tolerances have been defined for a feature, this button applies the
tolerances. The tolerance will appear in a flyout in the scene and be listed in the Inspect
section of the Inspection Tree. Once this button has been used, the [Close] button is
changed to [OK].

[Close]
This closes the Create GD&T dialog. If unsaved tolerances have been defined you will first
be prompted to Apply them.
Using the Create GD&T annotation functions
The following procedures are described

• General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances (see page 125)
• To define and evaluate line and surface profiles (see page 126)
• To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions (see page 126)
• To define a composite datum (see page 127)
• To define a composite tolerance (see page 127)
General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances
The steps below give a general outline on how to use the GD&T functionality in Focus
Inspection.
1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features by clicking on the Feature fitting
tool (see page 69).

2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.
4. Select the features to which the required tolerance will be assigned.
The same tolerance can be assigned to multiple features of the same type. These features
can be selected in tree or in the scene.
If you wish to assign the tolerance to just a single feature you can select the required feature
from the Selection drop down list (if not already pre-selected).
5. Click on the tabs to define all the various tolerances that are required for this feature.
6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.
7. Select another feature (or feature types) and repeat the procedure.
8. When all the feature tolerances are defined click [OK].
9. The flyouts indicating the tolerances will appear in the screen. Their position can be
changed by dragging it to an appropriate place.
10.Go to the Measured task and create the measured features to which the tolerances will apply
by clicking on the Measured feature fitting (see page 222) tool.
11.Make sure the statistics option is ON. These are required in the GD&T evaluation process.
12.When the corresponding measured features have been created go the Compare task and
click on the Evaluate GD&T (see page 343) tool.
To define and evaluate line and surface profiles
1. Create the required Line profile (see page 90) and surface profile (see page 91)
using the Feature fitting tools in the Nominal task.
- Line profiles must be created on Sections
- Surface profiles must be created on solid or meshed surface.
3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.
4. Select the feature for which the tolerance is to be defined from the Selection drop down list.
5. Define the required tolerances (and datums if necessary).
6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.
7. Click [OK] when all the tolerances have been defined.
8. You do not need to create corresponding profiles in the Measured tab, but if you have
defined datum features then you will need to create the corresponding measured ones.
9. Go to the Compare task, select the nominal line/surface profile feature and click on the
Evaluate GD&T (see page 343) tool.
To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions
1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features.

2. Define the required dimensions of the features by clicking on the appropriate tool from the
GD&T dimensions toolbar (see page 118).
3. Click on the required feature points to define the dimensions of either a single feature or the
dimensions between features.
The dimensions flyout will appear in the scene and in the Inspection tree.
5. Click on the Dimensions tab.
6. Select the required dimension from the Selection drop down list.
7. Click on the appropriate sub tab and enter the upper and lower tolerance to be applied to
this dimension.
8. Click [Apply].
The dimension flyout will be adapted to show the defined tolerance.
9. In the Measured task detect the required measured features.
10.In the Compare task click on the Evaluate GD&T (see page 343) tool.
11.The Dimension flyouts will be adapted to show the results of the evaluation.

To define a composite datum
1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to use for the datums. These would
typically be planes.
3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.
4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.
5. In the additional features field select those features that are to be included in the composite
datum.
6. If the group contains just two items choose whether you wish to use the separate or the
middle plane.
7. Click [Apply]
To define a composite tolerance
1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to group together for the composite
tolerance. These must be of the same type, e.g. circles or round slots.
3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.
4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.
5. Click on the Location or Orientation tab, then click on the Composite tab.
6. From the Additional features list at the bottom of the tab, select the features to be included
in the group.
7. In the upper row in the tolerance field define the tolerance for the group of features.
8. In the lower field define the individual tolerance that will be applied to each of the features
in the group.
9. Click [Apply].
6.1.5.2 Linear Perpendicular
Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and
defined direction
This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or between
a point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be determined
between any two points on the measured model or nominal features. When measuring
distances on a section, option are provided to choose values that lie on a search radius around
the points.
The Linear Perpendicular property sheet
Towards
When you click on this option a list appears from which you select how the distance from
the selected point is to be determined. The options provided are:
• Second click in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points
defined by mouse clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"Dim2pt".
• X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point
and the selected axis will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection
tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
• Origin in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the
coordinate system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree
labelled "Dim2pt".
• List of features in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point
and the perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear
in the Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
Search Radius First Point
This option operates when you are determining distances on a measured section.
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected first point used to
define the dimension.
This value can be adjusted interactively using the <Ctrl> key and the mouse wheel.
Search Radius Second Point
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected second point used to
Extreme Distance
Click on Extreme Distance to select whether the Closest or Furthest distance points on
the search circles will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the
figure below.

Figure 12: Closest and Furthest distance linear perpendicular dimensions
To determine the true 3D distance between two points
This procedure can be used on a measured model.

1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the option Second Click from the Towards menu.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select the first point.
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second point.
5. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.
6. Click again with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
To determine the closest/furthest distance between 2 points on a section

2. Select the required option from the Towards menu.
3. Choose whether you want to determine the closest or the furthest distance between the two
points from the Extreme Distance menu.
4. Enter the required Search Radius First Point value in the input field, or use the <Ctrl> key
and the mouse wheel to adjust the value interactively.
5. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB to select the first point.
A circle of the defined search distance appears around the point.
6. Move the pointer to the second point on the section.
7. Adjust the Search Radius Second Point value by pressing the <Ctrl> key and rotating the
mouse wheel.
A circle with the search radius appears around the point and the value of the radius is
adjusted in the field in the property sheet.
8. Click with LMB to select the second point.
10.Click with LMB to fix the measurement label.
Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement will relocate and stick to
their axes when the scene view is tumbled.
6.1.5.3 Aligned Parallel
Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature.

This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points can
be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the nominal
model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and includes the
model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.
When measuring distances on a section, options are provided to choose values that lie on a
search radius around the points.
The Aligned Parallel property sheet
Parallel To
The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension will
be measured. The following options are provided:
• Automatic XYZ
this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match
the screen axes.
• X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be
indicated on the flyout.
• List of defined features
in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the
selected feature.
Signed Distance
When this option is selected a sign will be assigned to the dimension.
In the example shown below, the signed distance would be positive, because moving from
point 1 to point 2 is along the direction of the positive X axis.

In the example shown below, the signed distance would be negative, because moving from
point 1 to point 2 is along the direction of the negative X axis.

This option operates when you are determining distances on a section.
Extreme Distance
figure below.
Figure 13: Closest and Furthest distance aligned perpendicular dimensions
To measure the aligned parallel distance between two points
1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.

2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the
Parallel To drop down list.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement label along the required axis.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The example below shows the distance along the X axis between two nominal feature
points.
To measure the closest/furthest distance along a section
1. Select the section in the tree.

2. Click on the down arrow to open the Aligned Parallel property sheet.

3. Select the direction in which the parallel dimension is to be measured.

and the mouse wheel to adjust the value interactively. .
mouse wheel.
In the example below the furthest distance between the two points has been selected.
In the example below the closest distance between the two points has been selected.

10.Click with the LMB to define the distance parallel.
6.1.5.4 Radius
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs

This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the Nominal or
Measured task.
It will also measure the radius of a circle defined by a Least Squares Fit over a selected
number of points. These points must be selected using a lasso.
This tool measures the radius of a circle defined by three points, two on the cicumference and
one at the centre.
To determine the radius of a circular feature
1. Click on the Radius tool.

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle
with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit

2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.
3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.
4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso. The area will be shown as selected.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the best fit circle that passes through the points.
A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the
circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
To measure the radius between three points

2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.
3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.
4. Use the LMB to select the second point.
An circle will appear that passes through the two points with the current cursor position as
centre.
5. Adjust the centre point as required and click again with the LMB to define it.

6.1.5.5 Diameter
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs

The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created on the
Nominal or Measured models.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares Fit
is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be created
through the picked points.
To determine the diameter of a circular feature
1. Click on the Diameter tool.

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and
connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of
the diameter.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on the
label to fix it.
To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit

4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the
circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.
label to fix it.
To measure the diameter between two points

A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
label to fix it.
6.1.5.6 Angle
Creates an angular dimension

This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the measured
object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if necessary. Use
this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points of the angle will
not necessarily be on the line.
The Angle property sheet
Use LSQ Fit

This option works on sections. Instead of using the line connecting the first 2 points, a least
square fit line over all points in between these 2 points is used.
To create an Angular Dimension
1. Click on the Angular tool.

If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and
use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.
2. Pick a point on the measured object.
A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at the
selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the cursor
will immediately update the line preview.
3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.
4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the
angle between the two lines.
5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.
6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).
7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.
6.1.5.7 Gap Flush Caliper
Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable

manner along a rail
Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and
Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.
In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic ‘calipers’ to
check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is made on multiple
sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the statistics of these

Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers to determine Gap
and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.
It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.
Gap-Flush Dimension dialog
Dimension tab
Nominal
Measured
Manual
This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.
Least Square Fit
When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line
Caliper
This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers.
Use on Rail
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the
caliper.
Gap Caliper Definition tab
[Save]
[Load]
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the From File drop down list.
Distances
Angles
Flush Caliper Definition

[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the ‘current’
[Load]
Distances
Angles
Reverse dimension sign
When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the
detection of the dimension.
To create a gap / flush using a caliper
1. Use the Create Section (see page 347) tool to create sections and add them to a rail.
2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.
3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap
Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.
4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.
6. Click Calipers.
7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be placed.
8. Click [Dimension].
The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances
defined by the caliper.
When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the
Information dialog.
6.1.6 Sections
The Sections Ribbon Group enables you to create sections and add them to or remove them
from rails.
It contains the following tools:
Create Section (see page 347)
Add to Rail (see page 362)
Remove from Rail (see page 363)
6.2 Handheld Measurement Task (solid)

The Handheld Measurement task provides all the tools required for making a Handheld scan
measurement.
Details about the scanners and localizers supported and their configuration are contained in the
Handheld API manual.
When first selected, Focus attempts to connect to the Localizer (Arm) and the Scanner to be
used. If no Localizer or Scanner have yet been configured, the Connection dialog will appear
in which you can select the correct hardware.

If a Localizer and a Scanner have been specified, Focus attempts to connect to them. This will
be indicated by the message "Connecting" appearing in the Status bar. If all is well then the
message will switch to "Ready" and you can proceed with the Handheld Measurement.
If there is a problem, this will be indicated in the Message area
Click on [Details] to find out more about the cause of the problem.
Click on [Retry] when the problem has been corrected.
The Handheld Measurement task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
Previews (see page 141)
Measure (see page 143)
Settings (see page 201)
6.2.1 Previews
The Previews Ribbon Group tools present panels in which the current characteristics of the
scan are presented.
Scanner Image (see page 141)
Digital Readout (see page 142)
6.2.1.1 Scanner Image
Displays the Scanner Image panel

This tool toggles the presence of the Scanner Image panel in which a 2D view of the scan line
and the intensity level is presented.
This provides you with a view of the scan line and the intensity level thus enabling you to
judge their quality.
When performing a hand held scan, you should try to ensure that the laser line and the laser
spot stay close together as possible. This ensures that the optimum number of points are
captured.
The Intensity level should always be as high as possible while remaining green.
6.2.1.2 Digital Readout
Displays the Digital Readout panel

This tool toggles the presence of the Digital Readout panel in which messages and the
coordinates of the centre of the Field of View of the scanner are displayed.
The X,Y and Z coordinates are shown according to the active alignment listed in the Measured
tree. (See working with alignments (see page 299).) If no alignment has been defined, or the

active alignment is "None", the coordinates are shown in the reference system of the localizer
arm.
The message area displays the current measurement status, indicating whether some
adjustment needs to be made or whether the system is "OK" to make the measurement.
6.2.2 Measure
The Measure Ribbon Group contains all the tools required to make a Handheld scan
measurement.
Prescan (see page 143)
Handheld Scan (see page 143)
Tactile Measurement (see page 144)
6.2.2.1 Prescan
Sets the scene display area to match the scanning region

This tool enables you to make some preliminary scan movements that will define the
extremities of the scanning region and then to set the view shown in the scene to match the
scanning region.
When the Handheld Measurement task is first scheduled, the view shown by the scene camera,
is usually centered on the origin of the Localizer arm. This is invariably some distance from
the space containing the part to be scanned. This tool ensures that the space shown in the
display coincides with that occupied by the scanned part.
To set the scene display
1. Click on the Prescan tool.

2. Holding the scanner at the required angle, move the scanner over the part making sure to
include all extremities and so encompass the complete bounding box around the object.
3. Press the main trigger button.
The displayed view will be adapted to set the complete part in the centre of the screen.
6.2.2.2 Handheld Scan
Enables handheld measurements

This tool starts the scanning process of the part. When the scanning process is completed it
initializes the generation of a mesh.
To make a handheld scan measurement
1. Click on the Handheld Scan tool.
2. You may receive warning bleeps and messages if the Localizer is not in a suitable position.
3. Position the scanner so that it is at the correct height and angle to scan the object.
Try to ensure that the dot and the laser line are as close together as possible.
4. Press the trigger button to start the scan and press it again to stop the first scan pass.
5. Repeat this for as many passes over the object as are required.
6. To adjust the view of the scanned object, press and hold the trigger button. Rotate and zoom
the image as required, then press the trigger button again to set the new view.
7. Press the Stop / End button to halt the scanning processing.
The processing of each of the point clouds created will be initiated. The result will be a single
mesh object representing a fused combination of all the point clouds.
(This automatic processing of the point clouds is set using the Processing Settings tool (see
page 202).)
6.2.2.3 Tactile Measurement
Schedules the Tactile Measurement module

This tool schedules the Tactile Measurement module in which you can make tactile
measurements to combine with the current handheld scanned measurements. The Tactile
Measurement module includes all the tools required to make measurements and define
features.
The different parts of the interface are shown and described below.
Features (see page 145)

View Tools bar (see page 197)
Status Bar (see page 199)
Feature Database (see page 199)
Digital Read Out (see page 201)

6.2.2.3.1 Features
The Features Ribbon Band contains all the tools for measuring, constructing and managing
features.
Focus Return (see page 145)
Teach (see page 145)
Auto Feature (see page 166)
Advanced (see page 170)
Construct Feature (see page 172)
6.2.2.3.1.1 Focus Return
The Return button returns you to the Focus Handheld Measurement task. All the
measurements and constructions defined in the Tactile Measurement module will be saved and
incorporated into the current Inspection document.
6.2.2.3.1.2 Teach
The Teach Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to measure features.

The following features can be measured:
Point (see page 145)
Line (see page 148)
Circle (see page 151)
Plane (see page 155)
Cylinder (see page 156)
Cylinder (see page 156)
Sphere (see page 162)
Slot (see page 164)
Point
Creates a measured point feature

This tool enables you to create a measured point feature that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure POINT dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.

Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known center of
the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and the part. An
approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors must be considered when
high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the shape of a
part, rather than dimensions.
Compensation Direction
This determines the direction of the vector used for the probe compensation.
The following options are available:
• Auto Axis Direction
the direction is determined from the nearest part reference frame axis and one of the six
standard axes (±X,±Y,± Z).
• Touch Vector Dir (direction)
the direction is calculated from the approach vector taken by the probe during the
measurement of the part surface. This type of probe compensation can have larger
measurement cosine errors since the approach vector is not guaranteed to be normal to
the part surface.
• Micro Plane
the direction is normal to a micro plane measured on the part. When this option is
selected, the software automatically switches to the measurement of three points that
will determine the micro plane close to the feature. Once the micro plane has been
determined, the measurement of the required feature can be made. -
• Polar XY, Polar YZ, or Polar ZX
the direction is defined by projecting a line from the part reference frame origin into the
specified plane
• Polar 3D
the direction corresponds to a temporary line from the part reference frame origin to the
measured point.
• X, Y or Z axis of the part reference frame.
Projection
A measured point feature may be placed at the exact X, Y, Z position where it was
measured, or it may be mathematically moved to a standard working plane or axis termed
the "projection".
• None
no projection is performed; the measured point is placed at the X, Y, Z position where it
was measured.
• An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
• XY, YZ, ZX Plane
the planes formed by the X, Y and Z axes of the current part reference frame.
• X, Y Z axis one of the axes of the current part reference frame.
To create a measured Point feature
It is recommended that you use the default settings for measuring a point feature.
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use an average to determine the
point feature.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation and if so choose the Compensation
Direction.
4. Select a Projection plane if you wish to project the measured point onto a plane. If you
select "None" the point will be located at the exact coordinates where it was measured.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured point appears in the Feature Database.
Line
Creates a measured line feature

This tool enables you to create measured line features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The measurement of a line feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the
measured points can be projected in order to determine the line.

The Measure LINE dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane
in which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
• An existing plane this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the
list.
• Auto one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
• XY, YZ, ZX one of the current part reference planes.
• Bestfit Plane the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the
measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
• Projection projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected
orientation plane.
• Average Height calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the
individual measured points.
Measurement Mode
• Trigger the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is
detected.
• Scan this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
Relative Measurement
When this option is checked then the orientation plane used to determine the feature
geometry will be determined by sampling a plane around the feature to be measured. The

software automatically switches to the Measure Plane tool (see page 155). When the
required number of points to determine the plane have been measured you are returned to
the measure the required feature.
To create a measured Line feature
presented.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the minimum
suggested.
3. It is recommended that you use the Relative Measurement function.
Check the option ON.
You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.
Measure at least three point to determine the local relative plane.
4. Set any other parameters required.
measurements.
The newly measured line will appear in the Feature Database.
Circle
Creates a measured circle feature

This tool enables you to create measured circle features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The measurement of a circle feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the
measured points can be projected in order to determine the circle.
The Measure CIRCLE dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.

specified together.
list.
measurement points.
Range
When the Full Circle option is checked ON, a complete circle will be measured. When this
option is checked OFF, an arc will be measured.
2D Feature Location
orientation plane.
Measurement Mode
detected.
Guided Plane
A guided plane allows you to restrict the measurement of points to a specific zone that will
aid in determining the feature being measured.
The guided plane is defined relative to the selected Orientation Plane / Axis. This may
NOT be Auto or Bestfit Plane.
• Offset the distance between the guiding plane and the Orientation Plane/Axis.
• Trigger zone the zone around the guiding plane in which points will be automatically
collected. The trigger zone is centered around the plane. The current point will be
collected if it lies within the trigger zone and when the previous point was on the
opposite side of the guiding plane.
Advanced Options
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
• Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
• Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
• Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
• Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have
a minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes
the maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using
Max Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
To create a measured Circle feature
presented.
suggested.


measurements.
The newly measured circle will appear in the Feature Database.
Plane
Creates a measured plane feature

This tool enables you to create measured plane features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure PLANE dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.
Measurement Mode
detected.
To create a measured Plane feature
presented.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed
minimum.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.
measurements.
The newly measured plane appears in the Feature Database.
Cylinder

Creates a measured cylinder feature

This tool enables you to create measured cylinder features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure CYLNDR dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.
Measurement Mode
detected.
Advanced Options
are available:
points.

To create a measured Cylinder feature
presented.
minimum.
4. Click on Advanced options if you need to modify the fitting algorithm.
measurements.
The newly measured cylinder appears in the Feature Database.
Cone
Creates a measured cone feature

This tool enables you to create measured cone features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure CONE dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected


Name
button.
Probe Comp.
Measurement Mode
detected.
Advanced Options
are available:
points.
To create a measured Cone feature
presented.
minimum.
measurements.
The newly measured Cone appears in the Feature database
Sphere
Creates a measured sphere feature

This tool enables you to create measured sphere features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure SPHERE dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]

[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.
Measurement Mode
detected.
Advanced Options
are available:
points.
To create a measured Sphere feature
presented.
minimum.
measurements.
The newly measured Sphere appears in the Feature database
Slot
Creates a measured square or round slot feature

This tool enables you to create measured square or round slot features that will be added to the
Feature database.
The type of slot is selected by clicking on the arrow below the tool button.
The Measure SQSLT and RNDSLT dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.

Pts Collected
Name
button.
Probe Comp.
specified together.
list.
measurement points.
2D Feature Location
orientation plane.
Measurement Mode
detected.
To create a measured slot feature
presented.
suggested.
measurements.
The newly measured slot will appear in the Feature Database.
6.2.2.3.1.3 Auto Feature
The Auto Feature tools allow you to measure features without having to specify the type of
feature beforehand : the Tactile Measurement module automatically determines the feature
type.
2D Auto Feature (see page 166)
3D Auto Feature (see page 168)
2D Auto Feature
Automatically determines the type of 2D feature that fits measured points

This tool automatically determines the type of 2D feature (line, circle) that fits your measured
points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 2D features only, the Tactile
Measurement module provides an Auto End capability to Auto Feature 2D - when a new point
cannot fit the currently-determined 2D feature, the Tactile Measurement module creates that
feature and begins new 2D feature detection starting with the new point.
The Measure Unknown dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement
module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.
If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.
Type
Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.
Probe Comp.
specified together.
list.
measurement points.
2D Feature Location
orientation plane.
Collection Points
The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.
[Delete point]
Deletes the last point that was measured.
[End Collection]
Ends the current collection of measured points.
To measure an automatically determined feature type
1. Click on the 3D Auto Feature tool.

2. Set the Auto Type option ON.
3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location
parameters as required.
4. Start measuring points.
3D Auto Feature
Automatically determines the type of 3D feature that fits measured points

This tool automatically determines the type of 3D feature (cylinder, cone) that fits your
measured points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 3D features only, the

Tactile Measurement module provides an Auto End capability. When a new point cannot fit
the currently-determined feature, the Tactile Measurement module creates that feature and
begins new feature detection starting with the new point.
The Measure Unknown dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement
module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.
If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.
Type
Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.
Probe Comp.
specified together.
list.
measurement points.
2D Feature Location
orientation plane.
Collection Points
The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.
[Delete point]
Deletes the last point that was measured.
[End Collection]
Ends the current collection of measured points.
To measure an automatically determined feature type
1. Click on the 3D Auto Feature tool.

2. Set the Auto Type option ON.
3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location
parameters as required.
4. Start measuring points.
6.2.2.3.1.4 Advanced
The Advanced toolbar provides tool that allows you to make specific measurement types.
Single Point Circle (see page 171)

Single Point Circle
Creates a circle feature from a single point measurement

This tool enables you to detect a circle feature by measuring a single point that is at the centre
of the circle. The circle is created at the intersection of a reference plane and the probe tip.
The circle measured has a smaller diameter than the probe tip. The probe tip must have a non-
zero diameter and a reference plane is necessary for the calculation.
The Single Point Circle dialog
Measurement counter
By 5
By 1
[Default]
[Key in]
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Name
button.
Reference Plane
This is the plane in which the circle lies and which is used to calculate the circle. The
following options are available:
• An existing measured plane which can be selected in the display or dragged from the
Feature Database into the drop down list.
• One of the reference planes (XY, YZ, XZ)
• A Sampling plane that will be determined by the measurement of three points.
• When this option is selected the software automatically switches to the Measurement
Plane function.
To create a circle from a single point measurement
1. Click on the Single Point Circle tool.

presented.
3. It is recommended that you use the Sampling Plane option to determine the reference plane.
Measure at least three point to determine the local sampling plane.
4. Place the probe in the required position and measure the point.
6.2.2.3.1.5 Construct Feature
The Construct Feature Ribbon Group provides the following commands to construct new
features from existing measured or previously constructed features:

Point (see page 173)

Line (see page 176)
Circle (see page 179)
Plane (see page 183)
Best Fit-Feature (see page 188)
Best Fit - Offset Line (see page 191)
Best Fit - Offset Plane (see page 192)
Define Cylinder (see page 193)
Define Cone (see page 194)
Define Sphere (see page 196)
Point
Constructs a new Point feature based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new point features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features, or in defined positions.
The Construct POINT dialog
Name
button.
Construct Methods
A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described
below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction
method.
There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the
construction method:
• Clicking on the required feature in the display.
• Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.
•
By clicking on the ellipsis button .
This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.
Midpoint of two points

This method creates a new Point at the midpoint between two selected Point features. The
Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
Intersection of Two Lines

This method constructs a point at the intersection of two selected Line features. The Line
feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of
the reference frame axes.
If the selected lines are coplanar, the intersection point is constructed at the intersection of
the two lines (which may require that they be extended). If the lines are not coplanar, the
point is constructed at the midpoint of the single line that joins the selected line features
and which is perpendicular to both.
Intersection of Line and Plane

This method constructs a point at the intersection of selected Line and Plane features. The
Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or
one of the reference frame axes.
The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident
with the current origin. The point feature is constructed where the extended line intersects
the plane.

Projection Point onto Line

This method constructs a new Point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Line.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature
or one of the reference frame axes.
Projection Point onto Plane

This method constructs a new point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Plane.
The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident
with the current origin.
Intersection of a Line and a Circle

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Circle. If
necessary the line will be extended to intersect with the circle. If two intersections occur,
the user chooses which point to use. If the line and circle do not intersect, the point will be
constructed at the location where the line is closest to the circle.
Intersection of Two Circles

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a two circles. These
circles must be co-planar and intersect. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which
point to use.
Offset Point
This method constructs a new Point feature that is offset by a specified distance from an
existing Point feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of
a Circle or Sphere feature.
Move Point along Vector

This method constructs a new Point feature located at a specified distance along the
direction of a Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of
a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Intersection of Line and Sphere

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Sphere. The
one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point to
use.
Centroid of a Feature
This method constructs a new Point feature at the centroid (centre of mass) of a 2D or 3D
feature.
Intersection of Line and Cylinder

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cylinder.
or one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which
point to use.
Intersection of Line and Cylinder

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cone. The
one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point to
use.
Define
This method constructs a new Point feature at a defined location.
To define a Point:
1. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the point in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to view the feature in the display.
2. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.
3. Click [Flip] to change the normal direction by 180 degrees.
High / Low Point

This method constructs a new Point feature that corresponds to the maximum or minimum
distance of a point cloud from a reference feature. The reference feature can be either an
existing Point, Line or Plane feature.
A Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
A Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, or the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature.
When a Plane feature is selected as a reference, the constructed high or low point can be
calculated either through an absolute distance, or with respect to the plane's normal to
allow for negative distances.
Points from Cloud

This method constructs a new Point features at the same location as selected points within
a cloud.
Line
Constructs new Line features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Line features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features or in defined positions.
The Construct LINE dialog

Name
button.
Construct Methods
method.
•
Line through two points

This method constructs a new Line feature that joins two selected Point features. The Point
feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
Line through a point normal to a line

This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature and
is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing
Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an
existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Line through a point parallel to a line

is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point,
or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing
Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Line through a point normal to a plane

is perpendicular to a selected Plane feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing
Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Plane feature can be selected from
an existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident with the current
origin. The plane is extended to intersect with the constructed Line.
Intersection of two planes

This method constructs a new Line feature that forms the intersection of two selected
Plane features. The Planes will be extended if necessary so that they intersect. The Plane
feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes
coincident with the current origin.
Projection of a line on a plane

This method constructs a new Line feature that is formed by the projecting a selected Line
feature onto a selected Plane feature in a direction normal to the Plane. The Plane will be
extended if necessary to enable the projection to be made.
or one of the reference frame axes. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing
measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident with the current origin.
Line through a point tangent to a circle

This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is tangent to a selected Circle feature. The selected Point and Circle must be coplanar.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.

Line tangent to two circles

This method constructs a new Line feature that is tangent to two Circle features. The two
Circles must be coplanar. The user chooses which tangent to use.
From slot axis

This method constructs a new Line feature that corresponds to the axis of a selected Slot
feature. The selected Slot can be open, round or square.
Mid-line of two lines

This method constructs a new Line feature that lies midway between two selected Line
features. The selected Lines do not have to intersect. The Line feature can be defined by an
Through a point at an angle to a line

is at a specified angle to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an
existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined
by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame
axes.
Define
This method constructs a new Line feature with a defined length at a defined location.
To define a Line:
1. Enter the required length.
2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the start point of the line in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
3. Select the direction of the line from the options in the drop-down list.
Click [Flip] to change the direction by 180 degrees.
4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.
(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation
vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).
5. Click [OK] to create the new Line feature.
Circle
Constructs new Circle features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Circle features that are located at intersections and
The Construct CIRCLE dialog
Name
button.
Construct Methods
method.
•

Circle through three points

This method constructs a new Circle feature that passes through three selected Point
features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or
Sphere feature.
Arc through three points

This method constructs a new circular arc feature that passes through three selected Point
features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or
Sphere feature.
Projection of a circle onto a plane

This method constructs a new Circle feature by projecting an existing circle feature onto a
selected Plane feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane
or one of the three working planes coincident with the current origin.
Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of selected
Cylinder feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at the true
intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane feature can be
extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three
working planes coincident with the current origin.
Intersection of a cone and a plane

Cone feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at the true
intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane feature can be
extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
Intersection of a sphere and a plane

Sphere feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed on the selected
Plane. The Plane feature can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
Intersection of two spheres

This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of two
selected Sphere features. The two Spheres must intersect.
Tangent to two lines

This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference is tangent to two
selected Line features. The selected Line features must be coplanar and they must intersect.
Circle on cone with diameter

This method constructs a new Circle feature at a specified diameter of an existing Cone
feature. The center of the constructed Circle lies on the axis of the cone and its normal
corresponds to the cone axis.
Intersection of a cone and a cylinder

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cone feature
and a selected Cylinder feature. The selected Cone and Cylinder must be coaxial.
Circle through two circles

This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference passes through the
center of two selected existing Circle features. The selected Circles must be coplanar.
Intersection of a two cones

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of two selected Cone
feature. The selected Cones must intersect.
Intersection of a cylinder and a sphere

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cylinder and
Sphere feature. The selected Cylinder and Cone must intersect.
Define
This method constructs a new Circle feature with a defined diameter at a defined location.
To define a Circle:

1. Enter the required Diameter.

2. Select the required Type.
Inner - creates an internal feature (hole).
Outer - creates an external feature (boss)
3. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z
fields.
4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.
(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation
vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).
Click [Flip] to change the orientation by 180 degrees
5. Click [OK] to create the new Circle feature.
Plane
Constructs new Plane features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Plane features that are located at intersections and
The Construct PLANE dialog
Name
button.
Construct Methods
method.
•
Plane through a point and a line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a
Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a
Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Plane parallel to a line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature and
is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point
or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing
Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Plane normal to a line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature and
is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing
Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an

Plane parallel to a plane

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is parallel to a selected Plane feature. The plane will be mathematically extended to
allow coincidence with the point, but the constructed plane has the same dimensions as the
selected plane.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the
three working planes coincident with the current origin.
Plane through a line and parallel to another line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through one Line feature and is
parallel to a second Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the
axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Mid-plane of two points

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is perpendicular (normal) to the line
joining two selected Point features. The plane is positioned on the mid-point of the line.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
Mid-plane of two lines

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.
or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the relative
orientation of the selected Line features:
• Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in the same plane and are parallel to each other.
The constructed plane is perpendicular to the plane connecting the two lines.
• Intersecting and coplanar - the lines are in the same plane and intersect.
It bisects the angle of intersection between the two lines, so two planes are possible.
The user chooses which plane is required.
• Skewed - the lines lie in two different planes.

The constructed plane is perpendicular to the planes containing the line features.
Mid-plane of two planes

This method constructs a new Plane feature that lies on the plane between two selected
Plane Features. It bisects the angle of intersection between the two planes so two new
planes are possible. The user chooses which plane is required.
Offset plane
This method constructs a new Plane feature that is parallel to an existing Plane feature. It
is located a specified distance along the normal to the selected Plane. If a negative offset is
specified the constructed Plane is located on the opposite side of the selected Plane.
Center plane of two lines

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.
or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the relative
orientation of the selected Line features:
• Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in the same plane and are parallel to each other.

• Intersecting and coplanar - the lines are in the same plane and intersect.
It bisects the angle of intersection between the two lines, so two planes are possible.
The user chooses which plane is required.
• Skewed - the lines lie in two different planes.

The constructed plane is parallel to the planes containing the line features.
Define
This method constructs a new Plane feature with a defined size at a defined location.
To define a Plane:
1. Enter the required Length and Width.
The length is defined relative to a specified length vector.
2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z
fields.
3. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.
4. Select the direction of the length from the options in the drop-down list.
5. Click [OK] to create the new Plane feature.
Best Fit-Feature
Creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features.
This tool creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features. The point
features are based on existing features.
A number of feature types can be constructed. The number of points and the specific
parameter values required depend on the feature to be constructed.
The Construct (FEATURE) dialog
According to the type of feature to be constructed, this dialog can contain the following fields.
Name

button.
Probe Comp.
specified together.
list.
measurement points.
2D Feature Location
orientation plane.
Fitting Algorithm
are available:
points.
Type
The Type parameter determines the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed
geometric feature:
• Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).
• Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external
feature (boss, web, rib).
List of selected points
Points to be used to best fit the feature can be selected by :
• Clicking on them directly in the display.
• Dragging from the Feature Database and dropping them into the list.
Point can be deleted from the list by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.
Features that can be constructed from best fitting points
Line
This tool constructs a new Line feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of two Points must be selected.
Circle
This tool constructs a new Circle feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
A minimum of three Points must be selected.
Plane
This tool constructs a new Plane feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
Sphere
This tool constructs a new Sphere feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
A minimum of four Points must be selected.
Cylinder
This tool constructs a new Cylinder feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
A minimum of five Points must be selected.

Cone
This tool constructs a new Cone feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
Point
This tool constructs a new Point feature mid way between selected Point features. The
Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of two Points must be selected.
Ellipse
This tool constructs a new Ellipse feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
A minimum of five Points must be selected.
Best Fit - Offset Line
Constructs a new Line feature that is a specified distance from selected point features
The Construct Bestfit Offset Line command creates a new Line that is a specified distance
from selected point features. A Bestfit Offset Line is useful if you have a datum line that
cannot be measured, or a theoretical center-line / axis that is not directly measurable. It allows
you to use nominal dimensions of a part to define where a line is to be constructed relative to
existing points.
The Bestfit Offset LINE dialog
Name
button.
Offset Direction
Choose the direction in which offset values will be defined.
List of points
This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new line. At least two points
must be specified.
• Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in
the display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
• Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Enter values in the Offset
Direction. Values can be positive or negative.
• Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-
compensated measured point(s).
Working Plane
Choose the plane in which the new Line feature lies.
[Preview]
Click [Preview] to see a preview of the line.
[OK]
Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.
Best Fit - Offset Plane
Constructs a new plane that is a specified distance from selected point features
The Construct Bestfit Offset Plane command creates a new plane that is a specified distance
from selected point features through which the best fit is made. A Bestfit Offset Plane is
useful if you have a datum plane that cannot be measured, or is too small to get an accurate
measurement due to the extremely tight point spacing that would result.
The Bestfit Offset PLANE dialog
Name

button.
Plane Normal
Choose the direction in which the normal to the plane will lie.
List of points
This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new line. At least two points
must be specified.
• Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in
the display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
• Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Enter values in the Offset
Direction. Values can be positive or negative.
• Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-
compensated measured point(s).
[Preview]
Click [Preview] to see a preview of the line.
[OK]
Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.
Define Cylinder
Defines a Cylinder feature
The Define to Construct Cylinder tool allows you to construct a cylinder feature by defining
its nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
The Construct Cylinder dialog
Label
The Label field enables you to define a unique identification for the constructed feature. A
default one is presented by default. You can enter a user-defined label in the input field.
Type
These options set the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed geometric feature:
Size
These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the Cylinder.
The Height is defined along the axis (see below).
Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.
Base Center
Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the base of the cylinder relative to the defined
coordinate system.
Axis
The Axis of the cylinder defines the direction in which the height is defined.
You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.
The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.
Define Cone
Defines a Cone feature

The Define to Construct Cone tool allows you to construct a cone feature by defining its
nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
The Construct Cone dialog
Label
Type
Size
These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the cone as shown in the figure below.
The Height is defined along the cone axis (see below) and can allow a truncated cone to be
defined.
Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.
Base Center
Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the base of the cylinder relative to the defined
coordinate system.
Axis
The Axis of the cone defines the direction in which the height is defined.
You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.
The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.
Define Sphere
Defines a Sphere feature
The Define to Construct Sphere tool allows you to construct a sphere feature by defining its
nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
The Construct Sphere dialog

Label
Type
Size
This field enables you to define the diameter of the sphere. The dimension must be defined
in the measuring system units.
Center
Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the sphere relative to the defined coordinate
system.
6.2.2.3.2 View Tools bar

The View tools allow you to modify the displayed part.
Zooms in
Each click zooms in by 25%.
Zooms out
Each click zooms out by 25%.
Zoom all
Adjusts the zoom so that all features fit within the graphical scene.
Zoom slide
Use the scroll bars to zoom.
Zoom box
Zooms in on a user defined area.
1. Click on the zoom box tool.
2. Place the mouse cursor on one corner of the box.
3. Press the LMB and drag the cursor to the opposite corner.
4. Release the mouse button.
The area within the box will fill the scene.
Translate
Moves the part over the scene.
2. Drag with the left mouse button.
3. Press Esc to stop the translate function
Rotate
Rotates the part around the current center of rotation.
2. Drag with the left mouse button to rotate the object
3. press Esc to end the rotation.
Set rotation center

Sets the center of rotation which can either be a point on in the display, or the center of a
selected feature.
1. Click on the tool
2. Either click anywhere in the scene to set the centre of rotation there
3. Or select a feature.
Set View port

Allows you to set the angle from which you view the part in the graphical display.
1. Click on the tool
2. A menu appears

3. Select your view.
View Feature Label

Displays a label with the name of a selected feature.
2. Click on the feature (in the display) whose label is required.
6.2.2.3.3 Status Bar

The Status Bar runs along the bottom of the window.
It shows the current status of the measurement, and displays instructional messages to guide
you through operations.
The Status bar can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
6.2.2.3.4 Feature Database

The Feature Database lists features that have been measured or constructed.
The Features Database can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
Right-clicking on the Feature Database produces a pop-up menu that provides a number of
operations that can be performed on the items in the database.
Show
Shows a feature which has been previously hidden.
Hide
Hides the selected feature.
Find...
Schedules a dialog in which you can search for a particular item in the Feature database.
1. Enter the name of the item required.

2. Select the direction in which the search is to be made.
3. Check the Match Case box if the search is to be case sensitive.
4. Click [Find next].
Feature Data
This opens a dialog in which the properties of the selected item are displayed.
Show Label
This displays the name of the feature in the display.
Hide Label
Hides the label that has been displayed using the Show Label function.
Delete
Deletes the selected feature.
Rename
Allows you to rename the selected feature.
Change ID/OD Property
This allows you to change the properties of a selected feature that has an inner/outer
property. This can be especially useful for an arm measurement of a circle or other feature
in which the property was set incorrectly based on the first vector. This operation can be
performed on a circle, cylinder, cone and sphere.
The Change ID/OD Feature Property dialog appears. The current property setting is
selected.

Check the "Update nominal to reflect property change" option to update the nominal values
(such as diameter, center, etc.) along with changing the inner/outer property.
Click [OK] to change the feature property.
6.2.2.3.5 Digital Read Out

The DRO (Digital Read Out) window shows the current position of the stylus center. In the
current selected coordinate system.
The DRO (Digital Read Out) can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
6.2.3 Settings
The Settings Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to configure your hardware settings.
Connection (see page 201)
Hardware Configuration (see page 202)
Processing Settings (see page 202)
6.2.3.1 Connection
Sets the scanner and the localizer to be used for the scan
This tool enables you to choose the localiser and the scanner to be used in the measurements.
If no localiser and scanner have been previously specified then this operation will be
scheduled as soon as the Handheld Measurement task is selected.
Scanners and Localizers must have been configured using Hardware Configuration (see page
202).
The Connection dialog
Localizer
A list of currently configured localizers.
Scanner
A list of currently configured Scanners.
[OK]
Selects the Localizer and Scanner and starts the connection process.
6.2.3.2 Hardware Configuration
Configures the Scanner, the Localizer and performs a Qualification procedure

This tool schedules the Hardware Configuration dialog.
All aspects of configuring hardware for handheld scanning operations are described in the
HandHeld API manual.
6.2.3.3 Processing Settings
Sets the mesh processing parameters

Measured point clouds are automatically converted to a mesh at the end of the scanning
process. The default processing parameters are designed to obtain an optimum mesh. This tool
enables you to set the filtering level to be used in the mesh generation process and to disable it
if necessary.

The automatically generated mesh replaces the point clouds and appears in the Measured panel
in the Inspection tree.
The Processing Settings dialog
Fuse scan when finished

When this option is checked, all point clouds will be automatically and optimally
processed to obtain a single mesh at the end of the scanning process. The point clouds are
removed.
If you wish to perform all the processing yourself using the tools in the Filter/Mesh Ribbon
Group in the Measured task then you should uncheck this option.
Keep original patches
When this option is checked the original point cloud patches will be retained when the
single mesh is created.
Filter
When the Automatic option is checked then the level of filtering will be determined
automatically. If you wish to apply more or less filtering, uncheck this option then set the
required level using the slider below.
6.3 Measured Task (solid)

The Measured task is primarily used for preparing the measured data for alignment and
comparison.
The Preparation of Measured data include:

• Importing the Measured datasets and managing their membership in the scene.
• Manipulating the Measured dataset by merging, splitting and cleaning up point clouds or
meshes as well as removing unwanted areas (such as clamping handles or the scanning bed
for example).
• Creating, filtering and managing meshes.
• Using Feature Fitting tools to detector fit a variety of shaped features (such as circles,
planes slots) as well as other objects such as edge, borders and intersections. These can be
used for feature-based comparison with measured models.
• These fitted features can also be used as a basis for constructing additional dependent
features.
• Detected measured features can also be renamed to match corresponding ones in the
nominal model and have their dimensions determined.
• Modifying the Measured model objects by scaling, smoothing and reversing the normals as
well as selecting, duplicating and offsetting the model.
• Some advanced tools enable you to refine, remove, add quick shading and determine
the volume of a mesh. In addition model objects can be mirrored and a golden template
determined.
The Measured task contains the following tool groups:
• Import Measured (see page 205)
• Cut/Merge (see page 208)
• Filter / Mesh (see page 217)
• Feature fitting (see page 221)
• Modified Measured (see page 280)
• Sections (see page 140)
• Advanced (see page 293)

6.3.1 Import Measured
The Import Measured Ribbon Group contains commands to import the Measured data and to
add measured objects to the data set.
6.3.1.1 Import
Imports a point cloud / mesh

This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the object
in the measured section of the Inspection data tree.
The Import dialog
Files of type
You can import files of the following types:
• Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a
delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)
• STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file
• IGES: points in an IGES file
• RIS: a Range Image Standard file.
• Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.
• Kube files (sab2 format)
• Focus Workspace files (*.mfi)
• PSL files (*.psl)
The options available depend on the type of file being imported.
Localizer type / Scanner type

For certain operations, (fusing point clouds for example) Focus needs to information
relating to the Localizer and the Scanner used in the generation of the point cloud. If the
point cloud was measured using recent versions of Focus software, this information is
stored with the point cloud.
If you are importing a point cloud where this information is not stored with the point cloud,
you need to specify the Localizer and Scanner type associated with the point cloud.
Import as a single point cloud
You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same
type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will
be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be
imported as a separate point cloud.
Import as Feature points
This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.
Use prefilter 1 out of
During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of
checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of {Prefilter step
points} of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.
Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.
When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan and Kube files are directly
imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This dialog
has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.
The General tab
The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between
brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning
and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to show
the whole file.
Note: that it may take some time to view a large file.
You can also set the following options in the General tab:
Skip first lines
Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)
Skip last lines
Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file footer)
The Delimiters tab

The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or more
delimiting characters.
Delimiters
Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.
Treat consecutive delimiters as one
This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.
Data preview
View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.
The Columns tab
The Columns tab allows you to set which columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z
coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to keep
it fixed at a certain value.
To import a point cloud / mesh
1. Click the Import Point cloud tool to open the Import dialog box.
2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.
4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,
Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.
The point cloud(s)/ meshes are imported and automatically placed under the "Data" node of
the Measured section of the Inspection tree.
6.3.1.2 Add to Measured
Adds a selected object to the measured data

This tool adds an object (point cloud, mesh or feature ) to the Measured section of the
Inspection Tree. This tool is only active when an object (Point cloud / mesh / feature) is ready
to be added to the Measured section and has been selected. Since Focus automatically adds the
object to the Data node of in the Measured section of the tree, the tool is typically grayed out
after import.
Note: This operation can only be applied to "'Operable objects". These can be modified
by selecting the Configure Workflow option from the The Workflow menu (see page 38)
To add objects to the Measured section of the Inspection tree
1.
Click the Mixed Object Select tool.
2. Click on the point cloud(s)/mesh(s) or features to be added to the Measured section of the
Inspection tree.
3. Click on the Add to Measured tool.
The object will be added to the "Data" node in the Measured section of the Inspection tree.
6.3.2 Cut/Merge
The Cut / Merge Ribbon Group contains commands to cut and merge point cloud data.
6.3.2.1 Merge
Merge point clouds/meshes into a single object

The Merge tool merges a number of point clouds or meshes into a single object.
To merge point clouds or meshes
1. Select multiple point clouds or meshes either in the scene or the Inspection tree.
2. Click the Merge tool.
The point clouds/meshes are merged into one.
6.3.2.2 Subtract
Subtracts a selected cloud or mesh from a reference to remove overlap errors

This tool corrects small overlap errors that can occur when objects have been scanned from
multiple angles. These overlap errors become visible when point clouds are merged and

meshed. It allows you to subtract a pointcloud / mesh from a reference pointcloud, or it allows
you to subtract meshes from a solid.
The Subtract property sheet
Pointcloud/Mesh
When this button is checked, the tool will subtract a pointcloud or mesh from a reference
pointcloud/mesh.
Select Reference
Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the reference.
If a point cloud / mesh was selected before the tool is activated, this is taken to be the
reference.
Select to Subtract
Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the point
cloud/ mesh to subtract from the reference.
Subtract distance
Enter a value to be used as the distance to determine the overlap area.
Blend
If this option is selected, the points that lie within the user defined overlap area are moved
together gradually, thus masking any possible step between the point clouds/meshes.
Solid
This option allows you to keep parts of a mesh that are close to Solid faces, and have a
local normal direction that is within a user defined angle tolerance. All parts of the mesh
that satisfy both conditions will be retained. All parts of the mesh that are outside these
parameters will be subtracted.
Subtract distance
Enter the value used to define the overlap or proximity distance between the solid face and
the mesh.
Subtract distance
Enter the value used to define the angular deviation between the local normal directions.
Remove small areas
When this option is checked, isolated areas that match the above criteria but which are
smaller than the value defined below will be removed.
Minimum area size
This value determines the area size that will be removed when the Remove small areas
option is used.
Subtract
Click this button to start the subtraction process. After the subtraction, the subtracted item
is indicated as such in the Inspection tree.
To subtract a cloud from a reference pointcloud
1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.

2. Check the button next to Pointcloud/Mesh.
3. Select the point cloud/mesh to be used as the reference either in the scene or the tree.
4. Click on the [Select Reference] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been
selected.
5. Select the point cloud/mesh to be subtracted, either the scene or the Inspection tree.
6. Click on the [Select to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been
selected.
7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the overlap.
8. Check the Blend option if you want to blend the points in the overlap area, to remove a
distinct step between the two clouds.
9. Click [Subtract].
The subtracted pointcloud/mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree
with the suffix _Subtracted added to its name.
To subtract a mesh from a reference solid
This procedure requires that you have a solid and a mesh available. The solid must be visible
in the scene (in the Nominal task).
1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.
2. Check the button next to Solid.
3. Select the solid to be used as the reference in the tree.
4. Click on the [Select Reference Solid from Tree] button. This will adapt to indicate that one
has been selected.
5. Select the mesh to be subtracted in either the scene or the Inspection tree.
6. Click on the [Select Meshes to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has
been selected.
If no mesh is selected, the subtraction will be performed on all the meshes in the Inspection
tree.
7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the proximity distance between the solid
and the mesh.
8. Enter a value for the Subtract angle to define the angular tolerance between the normals of
the solid and the mesh.
9. If you wish to remove small areas that match the above criteria check the Remove small
areas button and then enter a value for the minimum area to be defined as "small".
10.Click [Subtract].
The subtracted mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the suffix
_Subtracted added to its name.

To use the Subtract tool without opening the property sheet
1. Select the object to be used as the reference in the tree.

3. If you wish to subtract a specific object in the tree, select it.
4. Click the MMB.
The (selected) object will be subtracted from the reference according to the settings in the
property sheet. If no pre-selected object is available, all pointclouds or meshes in the tree will
be subtracted.
6.3.2.3 Separate
Separates selected areas of point clouds, meshes, compare objects and borders into
distinct objects
The Separate tool is used to create separate point cloud (s) or mesh Representation of a
physical object as a collection of connected triangular faces. It can be created from a point
cloud.(s) from a single original object. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D
compare objects and borders.
The Separate property sheet
Visible Parts
When checked ON, only those points that are visible in the scene will be selected. Points or
mesh parts that are behind the plane of the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into the
scene will be selected.
Keep copy of original
When checked ON, the parent object is retained. The Separate operation creates a new
object.
Extra Points
When checked ON, extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line
defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order to
create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 14: Cut effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected the separation will be made along a specified plane.
Method
You can select the required plane from the drop down menu.
Value
This displays the value of the currently selected position of the plane. The value can be
entered manually or by clicking an object in the scene.
Direction
This determines whether the part that extends in the positive or negative direction will be
highlighted and termed the inner part.
To separate a pointcloud or mesh with a lasso
This method allows you to manually select the part of the point cloud or mesh.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required.(The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is OFF.
6. In the scene create a lasso (see page 46) to define the area to be kept, clicking with the
MMB Middle mouse button to end the definition.
The selected part will be highlighted in red.
To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.
7. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation.
Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the Inspection tree. The highlighted
section will be termed the "_Inner" part.
To separate a part of pointcloud or mesh relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property sheet.

3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required. (The original can always be deleted
5. Make sure that the Plane option is ON.
6. Choose the plane to be used as the cutting plane.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.
8. Click the MMB.
One part that will be separated will be highlighted in red.
9. To change the position click with the LMB again and then with the MMB.
10.When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation.
Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the inspection. The part that extended
in the positive direction will be termed the "_Inner" part.
Note: To view the lasso selection for a recorded script, click on the Cut command in
the Automation window.
6.3.2.4 Keep Selected
Retains a selected part of a point cloud or mesh

The Keep Selected tool is used to isolate a selected region of point cloud(s) or mesh(s) by
deleting the rest of the point cloud(s) or mesh(s). This tool is the complement of the Delete
Selected tool. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and borders.
Keep Selected property sheet
Visible parts
mesh parts that are behind the planeof the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into the
When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is retained and the kept part of the
point cloud or mesh will appear as a new object in the Inspection tree.
Extra points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line
Figure 15: Keep cut effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.
Method
Value
Direction
kept.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept with a lasso
This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.
6. In the scene create a lasso (see page 46) to define the area to be kept, clicking with the
MMB to end the definition.
7. The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.
To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.
operation.
The kept selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection tree.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.

8. Click the MMB.The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.

10.To change the side that is to be kept, switch the Direction parameter.
operation.
Note: To view the lasso selection for a recorded script, click on the Cut command in
6.3.2.5 Delete Selected
Deletes selected regions of a point cloud or mesh

The Delete Selected tool is used to delete the selected region, maintaining the non-selected
regions. This tool is the complement of the Keep Selected tool. This tool can operate on point
clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and borders.
Delete Selected property sheet
Visible Parts
mesh parts that are behind the plane in of the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into the
When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is kept unchanged; the result of the
command appears as a new object.
Extra points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line
Figure 16: Delete effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.
Method
Value
Direction
deleted.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted with a lasso
This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.
6. In the scene create a lasso (see page 46) to define the area to be deleted, clicking with the
MMB to end the definition.
7. The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.To change the selection make a new lasso
and click once again with the MMB.
operation.
The deleted selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection
tree.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position on the axis or of the
plane.
8. Click the MMB. The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.
10.To change the side that is to be deleted, switch the Direction parameter.
operation.

Note: To view the lasso selection for the recorded script, click on the Cut command in
6.3.3 Filter / Mesh
The Filter / Mesh Ribbon Group contains commands to filter and triangulate the measured
cloud/mesh data.
6.3.3.1 Fuse
Fuses multiple clouds or meshes

This tool fuses multiple point clouds and produces a single mesh.
This tool provides a convenient means of performing a number of Filter /Mesh operations into
a single efficient method of creating an optimal mesh from a number of point clouds.
The Fuse Clouds and Meshes property sheet
Selection
The number of point clouds / meshes selected to be fused together.
Keep original
Check this option to keep a copy of the original point clouds or meshes after the Fuse
operation.
Automatic
When this option is checked ON, Focus determines the optimum filtering level to be
applied when creating the mesh.
Tip: It is recommended that you use the Automatic settings.
Level of detail
The level of detail represents the smallest remaining point distance in the resulting fused
cloud. When the Automatic option is set, the value shown here is the optimum value
computed by Focus.
Max triangle size

This represents the maximum allowed length of the sides of the triangles forming the mesh.
When the Automatic option is OFF you can set the level of filtering and fusion parameters.
If small holes are being lost for example, you can reduce the level of noise reduction.
If you wish to set your own parameters it is recommended that you keep the original point
clouds.
Level of noise reduction
This represents the amount of smoothing that will be applied to the fusion process. The
higher the level of noise reduction, the higher the smoothing.
To fuse multiple point clouds or meshes
1. Select the point clouds to be fused.

2. Click on the Fuse tool.
3. Check the Keep original button on.
4. Make sure the Automatic option is ON and click [OK].
5. If the result is not exactly as required, check the Automatic option OFF and adjust the
parameters.
6. Re-select the point clouds and repeat the process.
To apply specific conditions to the mesh generation process, use the separate tools in the
Filter / Mesh ribbon group.
6.3.3.2 Filter
Filters a point cloud using the scatter, grid and/or curvature filter
The Filter Point Cloud tool decimates the points in a point cloud using scatter, grid or
curvature filters.
The Filter point cloud dialog

Scatter
The scatter filter is the first filter that can be used when working on a point cloud that
contains scatter points. The scatter filter uses the Radius and # of Points parameters.
Note: This filter is good for removing scattered, island points.
Radius
The value entered here, defines the volume of a sphere.
# of Points
This defines a number of points. When the number of points within a sphere is less than
this number, those points will be filtered out.
Grid
The grid filter constructs a set of cubes in space and retains one point in each cube. This
filter results in a point cloud with a homogeneous point density.
Note: The grid filter is a good tool to use to obtain a uniformly distributed point
cloud.
Distance
This parameters defines the size of the cubes. The value entered here represents the
length of the side of the cube. The larger the distance, the larger the cubes and the more
points that are filtered out.
Curvature
The Curvature filter removes filters out points in flat areas and retains points in areas
of high curvature. When this tool is first activated, Focus calculates an optimal filtering
process and the resulting minimum and maximum distance between points in the filtered
point cloud.
Min Point Distance

The minimum distance between points in the resulting filtered point cloud.
Max Point Distance
The maximum distance between points in the resulting filtered point cloud.
Automatic
When this option is checked ON, Focus calculates and displays the optimum values for
the minimum and maximum point distances and display the values in the corresponding
fields. It is recommended that you use the Automatic setting.
If the results are not as required, check the Automatic option OFF and enter values for
the minimum and maximum distances.
Hide Shading
Check this option ON to hide the shading.
Anti-aliasing
Check this option ON to avoid filter artifacts.
[Filter]
Filter the point cloud according to the defined parameters.
[Restore]
Restores the number of points before the filter operation.
Points
Provides a summary of the filter operation.
[Apply]
Applies the filter and closes the dialog.
[Close]
Closes the dialog without applying the filter.
To filter a point cloud
1. Select the point cloud to be filtered.

2. Click the Filter Point Cloud tool.
3. Choose the preferred method of filtering.
4. Set the appropriate parameters.
5. Click [Filter].
6. Apply other filters if necessary.
7. Click [Apply] to accept the filtered point cloud.
6.3.3.3 Optimise
Optimizes a point cloud

The Optimize tool optimizes the quality of a point cloud or mesh by removing noise from the
measurement data.
To Optimize a Mesh
1. Select a point cloud or mesh.

2. Click the Optimize tool.

6.3.3.4 Mesh
Triangulates a point cloud to a mesh

The Mesh Point cloud tool triangulates point cloud(s), to create a new mesh object.
The Mesh property sheet
Max Edge Length

Triangles with an edge larger than this value will be removed. This avoids the risk that the
mesh will close holes.
When the value is 0, no triangles will be removed.
Optimize
When this is set to Yes, the quality of the mesh will be improved by removing noise from
the measurement data.
To mesh a point cloud
1. Select one or more point clouds.

2. Click on the arrow next to the Mesh tool to open the property sheet.
3. Enter the Max Edge Length value.
4. Click the Mesh Point cloud icon to create the mesh
The mesh will appear in the Inspection tree.
6.3.3.5 Remove Mesh
Converts a mesh to point cloud

This tool removes the faces of a mesh, resulting in a new point cloud objec.
To Remove a mesh
1. Select a mesh.
2. Click the Remove mesh tool.
6.3.4 Feature Fitting
Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured data. The
purpose of detecting features is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific
parameters such as a center point, axis direction, radius etc. for use in alignment, comparison
and/or dimension verification.
Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy
because of the clean input.
Features in the measured data are approximated geometries. Their position and parameters
are extracted using a specific algorithm on a point cloud or mesh. In this calculation, the user
can fix some parameters, such as the radius of a circle to get a different approximation of its
center.
Because of the above fundamental differences between nominal and measured feature
detections, different methods are used:
• Mesh : features are detected from vertices within a given tolerance, starting from user-
specified vertices.
• Point cloud : features are detected from points within a given tolerance, starting from user-
specified points.
Feature fitting is supported for:
• Point clouds
• Meshes
• Borders
Focus Inspection offers several feature fitting tools. All these feature-fitting tools support the
rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature.
6.3.4.1 Detect/Fit Feature
Opens up the Feature Detection panel in which you can select the feature(s) to be
fitted.
This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be
detected and set the parameters to detect it. Certain features (circles, slots, points, cylinders,
spheres and cones) can be detected either from existing nominal features or by manual
selection of the start points. Some of the options in this panel may be insensitive due to the
context in which you are working.

Method
The fields in this panel determine whether features will be detected manually from start
points, or from existing nominal features.
Detect from Nominal
When this option is selected, measured features that correspond to existing nominal
features will be searched for. The features that can be detected using this method, are
indicated in the dialog box.
Detection offset
The value entered in this field determines the 'offset' that will be used to detect points
that can be included in the feature.
Verify start points
The Nominal Circle/Slot features automatically generate start points used to detect
features using the Detection offset value. Checking this option verifies the generated
start points: only those that are in a plane will be used.
All Nominal
When this button is checked, measured features based on all the nominal features of the
applicable type will be searched for.
Manually selected from tree
When this button is checked, measured features based on the supported nominal
features will be searched for. Those that are supported are illustrated in the screen shot
above.
Detect from manually clicked start points
When this option is selected, all types of measured features can be detected.
To detect measured features from nominal features
Before starting this procedure, the nominal features of supported types must have been defined
on the nominal model and be available in the Inspection tree. Those that are supported are
indicated by them being sensitive in the dialog box as illustrated in the screen shot above.
1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.
2. Click the option Detect from Nominal.
3. Enter a Detection offset value.
4. Check the Verify start points option if required.
5. To search for measured features that correspond to all nominal features check the "All
Nominal" option.
6. To search for measured features based on particular nominal features check the "Manually
detected from tree" option, then select the required nominal features in the tree.
7. Click [Detect] at the bottom of the Feature Detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. The message line will indicate the total number of
nominal features involved, the number of corresponding measured features that were detected
and the number that were not (failed). Those features that were detected will appear in the
Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
To detect measured features by manual selection of start points.
1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.

2. Click the option Detect from manually clicked start points.
3. Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.
4. Follow the instructions given on the corresponding page.
6.3.4.1.1 Create Measured Feature Point
Creates a feature point at a specified location.

Feature Name
contains the prefix Meas_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the
Auto Rename (see page 276) tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.

Fit
X, Y, Z
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]
To create a measured feature point
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.

2. Click the Create Measured Feature Point tool.
brackets.
EITHER
Click with the LMB on the measured object. The X, Y Z co-ordinates in the panel will be
updated.
OR
EITHER
OR
The feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
Note: Measured feature points can be created even when there is no model available.
6.3.4.1.2 Detect/Fit Measured Line
Detects or creates a Line feature.

Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name contains
the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates information about the detected feature and its fit on the
data. This information is displayed in the Statistics Information (see page 501) dialog
box and the statistics object is added below the feature in the Measured section of the
Inspection tree.
The computation of the statistics depends on whether you use the Fit or the Detect function:
• Fit: All selected points are used to fit the requested feature and all selected points are
taken into account when computing the statistical information.
• Detect: The statistical information is computed for a representative set of points that
are close to the detected feature. This provides feedback about the detection result but
it does not have the same accuracy as for the Fit option. If the statistical information
(sigma, range, etc) must be mathematically correct, you should use the Fit option.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation.
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Fit
When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined
in the fields below.

Fixed Length
When this option is checked, the line feature will have a specified length. This length is
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the line will be set in a specified location.
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the direction of the line will be defined by a specified
vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the line.
[Detect]
Detects the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If any
characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined, i.e.
the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with these
characteristics.
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.
4. Enter a name for the new feature if required
5. Check the Detect option ON.
6. Select one or more points in the model using the chosen tool.
EITHER
OR
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection
tree.

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.
4. Check the Fit button ON.
6. Click [Create].
tree.
6.3.4.1.3 Detect/Fit Measured Circle
Detects a Circle feature.

This tool fits a circle to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a circle based on
Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal
feature (see page 223).
Feature Name

Statistics
Inspection tree.
Plane
This option is part of the Statistics option. When checked, the statistical information
relating to the plane in which the circle lies is calculated.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
The Advanced panel provides a number of additional parameters that can be used in the
detection of the measured feature.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The lower the tolerance the
higher the accuracy.
The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most cases. If the circular shape is well-
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the circular shape
is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due to a
difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may be more suitable.
Automatic
When this option is checked ON, the Depth and Depth Range parameters described below
will be determined automatically by the feature fitting algorithm. Optimum values are
found by searching for a zone with stable diameter values. It is recommended that the
automatic method is used initially. If the results are not satisfactory you can un-check this
option and set the values manually. These advanced parameters are illustrated in the Figure
below.
Figure 17: Advanced parameters defining the points used to detect the feature
Depth
Features are detected in a reference plane. The Depth parameter determines the distance
from this plane at which the circular feature will detected, and thus the diameter of the
circular feature. The Depth defines the position of middle of the point cloud range that
will be used to detect the feature relative to the reference plane (see the Figure above).
Depth Range
The Depth Range defines the range of points used to detect the feature. It is positioned
symmetrically about the plane defined by the Depth parameter. Points that lie in the
range (D-DR/2) to (D+DR/2) will be used.
Note that no default values are provided for these parameters. Any values displayed in
the fields are the last user-defined values. When the Automatic option is selected, these
values are determined by the algorithm.
Near Margin, Far Margin
These two parameters define the circumferential range of the points used to determine the
reference plane. The Near Margin represents the inner circumference of the point cloud
used. The Far Margin represents the outer circumference of the point cloud used. Both
values are added to the nominal radius of the circle feature.
Note that these points must lie in the reference plane, so that in the example shown above,
the Near Margin must be greater than the radius of the larger hole.
Fit
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the circle feature will have the radius specified here.

Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the circle will be defined by the specified X,
Y and Z coordinates.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the circle will be defined by the specified I, J
and K coordinates.
[Detect]
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.
4. Click the Detect option ON.
5. Enter a value for the tolerance and any other advanced parameters if required.
7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.
EITHER
OR
tree.
To create a circle feature

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.
4. Check the Fit option ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and direction.
6. Click [Create]
tree.
6.3.4.1.4 Detect/Fit Measured Round Slot
Detects a Round Slot feature.

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.


Plane
relating to the plane in which the slot lies is calculated.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
higher the accuracy of the fit.
The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most cases. If the shape of the round
slot iswell-defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the
shape is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due
to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may be more suitable.
Automatic
option and set the values manually. These advanced parameters are illustrated in the Figure
below.
Depth
Depth Range
The Depth Range defines the range of points used to detect the feature. It is positioned
symmetrically about the plane defined by the Depth parameter. Points that lie in the
range (D-DR/2) to (D+DR/2) will be used.
values are added to the nominal radius of the round slot feature.
Slot Type
The Slot Type parameter specifies at which ends the slot will be truly round. The choices
are between :
• Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.
• First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.
• Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.

[Detect]
Detects the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Measured Round Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
6. Select the points in the model using the chosen tool.
EITHER
OR
8. The detection process will be started and a message appear. If the detection process was
successful, then the feature will be created and the Statistics Information dialog appear.
Otherwise a message will appear to say that feature detection was attempted.
The feature will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection Tree.
6.3.4.1.5 Detect Measured Rectangular Slot
Detects a Rectangular Slot feature.

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Plane
relating to the plane in which the rectangular slot lies is calculated.
Detect
Theoretical mesh

Advanced
Tolerance
The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most cases. If the shape is very well-
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the shape of the
slot is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due to a
Automatic
option and set the values manually.
These advanced parameters are illustrated in the Figure below.
Depth
from this plane at which the feature will detected, The Depth defines the position of
middle of the point cloud range that will be used to detect the feature relative to the
reference plane (see the Figure above).
Depth Range
The Depth Range parameter defines the range of points used to detect the feature. It is
positioned symmetrically about the plane defined by the Depth parameter. Points that lie
in the range (D-DR/2) to (D+DR/2) will be used.
values are added to the nominal radius of the circle feature.
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Measured Rectangular Slot tool.
EITHER
OR
successful, then the feature will be created and the Statistics Information dialog will appear.
Otherwise a message will appear to say that feature detection was attempted
tree.

6.3.4.1.6 Detect Measured Key Slot
Detects a Key Slot feature.

A key slot has two component holes, a small one and a bigger one.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Plane
relating to the plane in which the key slot lies is calculated.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
key slot is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers
due to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may be more suitable.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of
the projection of each point to this plane.
The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter
indicated in red.

Slot
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Measured Key Slot tool.
4. Define the tolerance, depth and the type of slot.
EITHER
OR
tree.
6.3.4.1.7 Detect Measured Hexagonal Slot
Detects a hexagonal slot feature.

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.

Plane
relating to the plane in which the hexagonal slot lies is calculated.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
Depth
indicated in red.
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a hexagon slot feature

2. Click on the Detect Measured Hexagon tool.
6. To detect the hexagon slot feature:
EITHER
OR
7. The detection process will be started and a message appear.
tree.
6.3.4.1.8 Detect/Fit Measured Plane
Detects or creates a plane feature.

Feature Name

Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
The Advanced panel provides additional parameters that can be used in the detection of the
measured feature.
Tolerance
The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most cases. If the plane is very well-
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the plane is
not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due to a
Fit
Fixed Size
When this option is checked, each side of the plane feature will have a specified length.
This length is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the normal of the plane will be defined by a specified
vector.
I, J, K
[Detect]
[Create]
panel, i.e. the size, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.
4. Click the Detect option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance.
EITHER
OR
tree.


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its size, center point and direction.
6. Click [Create].
tree.
6.3.4.1.9 Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder
Detects or creates a Cylinder feature

Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal
feature (see page 223).
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The lower the tolerance
the higher the accuracy of the fit. The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable
in most cases. If the cylinder shape is very well-defined in the point cloud, then a
smaller tolerance value can be used. If the shape of the cylinder is not well-defined (for
example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due to a difficult surface) then a
tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may be more suitable
Fit
When this option is checked, the feature will be fitted according to the dimensions defined
below.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. This
radius is specified in the input field
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the cylinder will be set in a specified
position.

X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specified vector.
I, J, K
[Detect]
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.
Then enter a value for the tolerance if required.
EITHER
OR
tree.

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.
direction.
6. Click [Create]
tree.
6.3.4.1.10 Detect/Fit Measured Sphere
Detects or creates a sphere feature.

Note: that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding
nominal feature (see page 223).
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.

Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
higher the accuracy of the fit. The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most
cases. If the shape is very well-defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value
can be used. If the shape is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive
noise or spoilers due to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may
be more suitable
Fit
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the radius of the sphere feature will have a specified
length. This length is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
X, Y, Z
[Detect]
[Create]
the panel, i.e. the radius and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these
characteristics.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect sphere feature

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.
4. If you want to detect the sphere entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a plane on the model that has some defined characteristics, then click
the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics.
EITHER
OR
tree.

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.
6. Click [Create].
tree.

6.3.4.1.11 Detect/Fit Measured Cone
Detects a Cone feature on an existing object

Note: that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding
nominal feature (see page 223).
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
Fit
When this option is checked, the feature will be fitted through the selected points / faces.
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
Closes the feature detection panel.

2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.
4. Check the Detect option ON
EITHER


OR
tree.
To fit a cone feature

2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.
The Pick select option selects complete objects. The Lasso option can be used to select
specific regions. Click with the MMB to confirm the lasso selection.
6. Click on the [Detect] button.
A cone will be fitted to the defined area.
6.3.4.1.12 Create Measured Point Cloud/Mesh Area
Creates a Point cloud /Mesh-area feature

This tool duplicates and converts a set of polygon lasso selected points into a feature object.
Feature Name
Detect
[Detect]
Detects the feature.
[Undo]
[Close]
To create a point cloud feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.

2. Click the Create Nominal Point cloud/Mesh-Area tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature if required.
4. Click with the Lasso tool to define the required area on the model.
5. To create the area
EITHER
OR
Click [Detect] in the definition panel.
The area will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
6.3.4.1.13 Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin
Detects a measured cylindrical pin

A cylindrical pin is defined by a cylinder of specific height and radius on a base.

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a Measured Cylindrical Pin

2. Click the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin tool..
3. Enter a name if required.
5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of the
pin.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
OR
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.

6.3.4.1.14 Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding
Detects a measured cylindrical pin with conical guiding

A cylindrical pin is defined by a cylinder of specific height, and radius on a base, with a
chamfered edge.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured cylindrical pin with conical guide

2. Click the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of the
pin.
EITHER
OR

6.3.4.1.15 Detect Measured Diamond Pin
Detects a measured diamond pin

A diamond pin is defined by a pin of specific height, with a cross shaped section.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured diamond pin

2. Click the Detect Measured Diamond Pin tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the diamond pin, then three points on the contour of the
pin.
EITHER
OR

6.3.4.1.16 Detect Measured T-stud
Detects a measured T stud

A T-stud is defined by a cylindrical pin with a larger radius head on a base.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured T-Stud

2. Click the Detect Measured T-Stud tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the upper surface of the T-
stud.
EITHER
OR

6.3.4.1.17 Detect Measured Welded Bolt
Detects a measured welded bolt

A welded bolt is defined by a threaded pin on a base.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured welded bolt

2. Click the Detect Measured Welded Bolt tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the threaded contour of the
bolt.
EITHER
OR

6.3.4.1.18 Detect Measured Welded Stud
Detects a measured welded stud

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured welded stud

2. Click the Detect Measured Welded Stud tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the object then three points on the contour.
EITHER
OR

6.3.4.1.19 Detect Measured Welded Nut
Detects a measured welded nut

A welded nut is defined by a threaded nut on a base.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
be more suitable
Depth
The depth of the nut.
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a measured welded nut

2. Click the Detect Measured Welded Nut tool.
5. Select three points on the base of the welded nut.
EITHER
OR


6.3.4.2 Detect Edge
Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections


Directions:

Directions:

The Detect tab.
Nominal
Measured
Caliper
the Caliper tab.
Use on Rail
Output


The Caliper tab.
[Save]
[Load]
Dimension
Angles
[Detect]
one.

the scene.
11.Click [Detect].
6.3.4.3 Auto Dimension
Detects measured dimensions from nominal dimensions

This tool can be used to detect measured feature dimensions on and between dimensions
defined on nominal features.

In order for this function to work, the pairs of nominal / measured features must have names
with the required prefix. The dimension of the measured feature named Meas_{feature} can
only be determined if the corresponding nominal feature is called Nom_{feature}.
Auto Dimension property sheet
All Dimensions
When this option is checked, then dimensions of, or between, measured features that
correspond to all the existing nominal feature dimensions will be searched for. If not
checked, then dimensions need to be selected in the Inspection tree.
To detect measured feature dimensions from nominal feature dimensions
Before starting this procedure the following pre-requisites are necessary :
• Nominal features (circles, surface points, round slots

and square slots) must have been defined on the nominal
model using the Feature Fitting tool in the Nominal Task.
• Dimensions must have been determined for these features

using the tools in the "GD&T Dimensions" ribbon group
in the Nominal Task.
• Corresponding features must be defined on the Measured

Model.
• These corresponding Measurement features must have
the same name as the Nominal feature with the prefixes
Meas_ instead of Nom_.
By default measured dimensions will be determined for All existing nominal dimensions.
1. To detect measured feature dimensions that correspond to particular nominal feature
dimensions, select the required nominal feature dimensions in the tree.
2. Click on the tool directly.
The detection process will start. Corresponding measured feature dimensions will appear in
the Inspect section of the tree.
The message area will show the number of dimensions found and the number not matched
(failed).
Failed dimensions can be exported using the Failed Features (see page 413) tool in the
Export ribbon group in the Reporting task.
6.3.4.4 Auto Rename
Re-names measured features to match the corresponding nominal features.

This tool enables you to re-name measured features so that their identification matches that
of the nominal features to which they are closest. The tool initiates a search of the measured
features within a specified distance and renames all of them that it finds within this distance of
the corresponding nominal feature.

The Auto Rename property sheet
Search Distance
This specifies the distance (in mm) over which the tool will search for a corresponding
Nominal feature. Measured features that have no corresponding Nominal feature within
this specified distance will not be renamed.
To automatically rename measured features
This procedure assumes that you have a set of Nominal and Measured features available in the
Inspection tree. An example of two such sets are shown below.
1. Select the features to be renamed in the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the Auto Rename Features tool.
3. In the Property sheet set the required search distance.
(This assumes that the nominal and the measured objects are aligned).
4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet.
The search will be initiated and the status bar indicate the progress.
The features for which a corresponding nominal feature was found within the search distance
will be renamed as shown in the example below.
6.3.4.5 Mesh Border
Generates the borders of a mesh

This tool generates the Outside and/or Inside border of a mesh. The resulting object can be
exported in IGES format.
The Mesh Border dialog
Outer border
When this button is checked an outer border for the mesh will be generated.
Inner border
When this button is checked an inner border for the mesh will be generated.

[OK]
Generates the specified borders.
[Close]
Closes the Generate Border dialog without creating the borders.
To generate borders on a mesh
1. Select the mesh.

3. Select the borders to be generated.
4. Click [OK].

[Flip Normals]
Two-sided lighting
6.3.4.7 Compare Info
Provides information on comparison information

This option s opens the Comparison Information dialog (see page 501) for the comparison
object that has been selected in the tree. .
movement.
a green icon.
6.3.6 Modified Measured
The Modify Measured Ribbon Group contains a number of tools to modify selected point
clouds and meshes.

6.3.6.1 Assembly Match
Joins multiple point cloud /meshes together

The Assembly Match tool aligns multiple point clouds or meshes. This tool is used to remove
overlap error that may have arisen after scanning with an inaccurate system, or if the object
was moved between scans.
Two methods are provided :
• Assembly Match (see page 281) : This method can be used to eliminate large errors that
may arise due to the movement of an object between scans.
• Compensate for localizer errors (see page 285): This method can be used for
compensate small overlap errors arising from scans made with localizer arms in different
positions.
The method is selected by clicking on the down arrow next to the tool icon to open the
Assembly Match property sheet.
Once the method has been selected click on the Assembly Match tool to schedule the
corresponding Assembly Match dialog.
The Assembly Match method
This method is used to align point clouds which are displaced by a significant amount, caused
possibly by the displacement of the object between scans. The software searches for points
that correspond on the different clouds then aligns them. You can choose whether one cloud is
to remain fixed or whether all the clouds are to be moved to align them.
The following dialog appears.
Selection
The Selection fields enable you to choose which clouds are to be moved and which (if any)
are to remain fixed.
If no clouds are selected before the dialog is scheduled, all available clouds are selected as
"Moveable".
If particular clouds are selected before the dialog is scheduled, they are selected as
"Moveable". It is then necessary to select a Reference (fixed) cloud or to specifically set no
reference.
No reference
When this option is checked, no specific reference clouds/meshes will be used as reference.
All the clouds/meshes selected in the tree will be treated as moveable.
It is necessary to either select a reference cloud/mesh OR to check this option.

[Reselect Reference]
Use this button to specify the reference clouds/meshes, i.e. those that will remain fixed
during the matching process.
Click the reference point cloud/mesh in the tree, then click on the button.
[Reselect Moveable]
If no clouds/meshes are selected before this tool is schedules all available clouds/meshes
are selected as moveable. Moveable clouds/meshes are listed in the panel in the dialog. Use
this button to specify particular clouds/meshes that are to be moved.
Click on the required point cloud/meshes in the tree then click the button.
Settings
Points of different point clouds/meshes that are closer than this distance can be selected as
corresponding (overlapping) points.
If the search distance is set to be less than the actual distance between points in the
different clouds, no corresponding points will be found. The message "Point clouds do not
overlap" will be seen.
Min. Improvement
This parameter defines the stopping criteria. When the improvement between successive
iterations is smaller that this value, the assembly match stops.
Points in overlap
This parameter defines the number of corresponding points (in overlap) that will be
matched during the process.
Improvement
These fields are updated during the assembly matching process to provide information.
Number of iterations
The number of the last iteration.
Average distance
The average distance moved by all overlap points of the last iteration.
Improvement
The average improvement of the last iteration.
Number of points
The total of overlap points after the previous iteration.
Cloud
The name of each moveable point cloud/mesh
Improvement
The improvement of this point cloud/mesh after the previous iteration.
Distance
The average distance of all overlap points of this point cloud/mesh to the others, after the
previous iteration.
# of points
The number of points of this point cloud/mesh still in the overlap, after the previous
iteration.
[Start]
This starts the assembly matching process between the defined moveable and reference
cloud/ meshes according to the defined settings.
This button is only sensitive if you have either selected specific references or checked the
option No reference.
The Information fields are filled in to monitor progress. Once the process is started, this
button is renamed [Stop]. If the process continues until the required improvement is made,
this button is named [Restore].
[Stop]
Once the assembly matching process has been started, this button stops the process at the
end of the current iteration.
[Restore]
This button appears at the end of the assembly matching process. It will restore the
moveable clouds/meshes to their original location. The button is renamed [Start] and a new
matching process can be started.
[Close]
This button closes the Assembly Match dialog.
To match multiple point cloud/meshes using the Assembly Match method
You need at least 2 point clouds / meshes available.

1. Click on the down arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet and check that the
Assembly Match method has been selected.
2. If you would like all the objects to be moved during the alignment, de-select all point
clouds/meshes in the tree or just click in the scene.
If you want one object to remain fixed, then you can select all the other objects in the tree.
3. Click on the tool. The dialog opens.
All point cloud / meshes selected as moveable are listed in the lower panel.
4. If you wish all the point clouds/meshes to be moved, check the button No reference ON.
5. If you wish to define a point cloud/mesh to remain fixed, select the object in the tree and
then click [Reselect Reference].
The [Start] button will not be available unless you have either defined a reference or
checked the button No referenece.
6. Set the required Search Distance.
This must be greater than the actual distance between the corresponding points on the
clouds/meshes.
If the Search Distance is too small the software will not be able to find corresponding points
and the error message "Point clouds do not overlap" will be seen.
7. Adjust the Points in Overlap if necessary.
The higher the number of points to be matched, the more iterations required.
8. Click [Start]
The alignment process will commence if overlap points can be found.
9. A summary of the average results is displayed in the Improvement fields.
Results for each of the moveable objects is listed in the panel.
10.If you are happy with the results, click [Close].
If you wish to re-set any of the parameters, click [Restore] change the values then click
[Start] again.

The Compensate for localizer errors method
This method is used to correct for small misalignments in multiple scans made on the same
object due to errors in the localizer positioning. The process is used to sharpen the image of
the combined scans
The following dialog appears.
Selection
The Selection fields enable you to choose which clouds are to be moved and which (if any)
are to remain fixed.
If no clouds are selected before the dialog is scheduled, all available clouds are selected as
"Moveable".
If particular clouds are selected before the dialog is scheduled, they are selected as
"Moveable". It is then necessary to select a Reference (fixed) cloud or to specifically set no
reference.
No reference
When this option is checked, no specific reference clouds/meshes will be used as reference.
All the clouds/meshes selected in the tree will be treated as moveable.
It is necessary to either select a reference cloud/mesh OR to check this option.
[Reselect Reference]
Use this button to specify the reference clouds/meshes, i.e. those that will remain fixed
during the matching process.
Click the reference point cloud/mesh in the tree, then click on the button.
[Reselect Moveable]
If no clouds/meshes are selected before this tool is schedules all available clouds/meshes
are selected as moveable. Moveable clouds/meshes are listed in the panel in the dialog. Use
this button to specify particular clouds/meshes that are to be moved.
Click on the required point cloud/meshes in the tree then click the button.
Search Distance
The Search Distance defines the region in which corresponding (overlapping) points will
be searched for.
It is recommended that you use the Auto setting which is determined from the specified
scanner type.
If the errors being matched are small, you can move the slider towards Min.
If the errors are bigger then normal, you can move the slider towards Max.
Results
At the end of the matching process the following overall results are displayed.
Condition Number
This is a qualitative value displayed to indicate how well conditioned the result is. A high
value represents a poor result. This result is useful when requesting support.
Distance Improvement
The improvement in the distance perpendicular to the object surface at the end of the
process. The Improvement distance is the difference between the initial and the actual
movement.
Remaining distance
The remaining distance between overlapping points at the end of the process.
Point cloud / mesh list
This panel lists all the point cloud / meshes selected as moveable and lists the results of the
assembly match process for each.
Cloud
The name of the moveable point cloud / mesh
Improvement
The Distance Improvement (see above) for each mesh.
Distance
The Remaining Distance (see above) for each mesh.
Max Displacement
The maximum displacement of a point in this object at the end of the process
Warning
If the Maximum Displacement is more than the localizer error you will see a warning here
"Limit reached". If this is the case, the displacement errors are significant and it will be
preferable to use the Assembly Match method (see page 281).
[Start]
This starts the assembly matching process between the defined moveable and reference
cloud/ meshes according to the defined settings.
option No reference.
At the end of the process it is renamed [Restore].
[Restore]
This button appears at the end of the assembly matching process. It will restore the
moveable clouds/meshes to their original location. The button is renamed [Start] and a new
matching process can be started.
[Close]
This button closes the Assembly Match dialog.
To match multiple point cloud/meshes using the 'Compensate for localizer errors'
method.
You need at least 2 point clouds / meshes available.

1. Click on the down arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet and check that the
"Compensate for localizer errors" method has been selected.

2. If you would like all the objects to be moved during the alignment, de-select all point
clouds/meshes in the tree or just click in the scene.
If you want one object to remain fixed, then you can select all the other objects in the tree.
3. Click on the tool. The dialog opens.
All point cloud / meshes selected as moveable are listed in the lower panel.
4. If you wish all the point clouds/meshes to be moved, check the button No reference ON.
5. If you wish to define a point cloud/mesh to remain fixed, select the object in the tree and
then click [Reselect Reference].
The [Start] button will not be available unless you have either defined a reference or
checked the button No reference.
6. You do not need to adjust the Search Distance normally.
The software selects the optimum distance automatically based on the errors associated
with the scanner.
7. Click [Start].
option No referenc.e
The alignment process will commence if overlap points can be found.
8. A summary of the average results is displayed in the Improvement fields.
Results for each of the moveable objects is listed in the panel.
9. If a warning appears in the list, it means that the objects need to be displaced by more than
the localizer / scanner errors.
In this case it is best to click [Restore] and repeat the matching process using the Assembly
match method (see page 281).
10.If you are happy with the results, click [Close].
If you wish to re-set any of the parameters, click [Restore] change the values then click
[Start] again.
Creates a new mesh based on a selected surface

This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given angle deviation
tolerance and isolates them into a new separate mesh. The separated mesh can be used as a
stand-alone mesh to compare to the measured models.
This tool is only available when a mesh has been created or imported.
The Select Single Side property sheet
New Name
This field can be used to enter a name for the extracted mesh.
Angle (degrees)
This field specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any
surface whose slope is equal to or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the
reference surface can be marked and isolated.
Tolerance
This defines a tolerance on the detection of the surface.
[Run]
The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle value set in the property
sheet.
[Separate Meshes]
This button isolates the surfaces detected and marked by the Run operation into a new
independent mesh.
To isolate a single side mesh
1. Click the Select Single Side tool.

The selection mode is activated.
2. Click the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.
3. Select the face in the mesh that you want to be the reference surface. The selected surface
turns red.
Note: If multiple faces from one mesh are selected as reference faces, then only last
selected face is taken as the reference face.
4. Set the required Angle.
5. Click the MMB or [Run] in the property sheet to identify the surfaces.
6. Edit the name in the New name field if necessary.
7. Once the surfaces are identified and marked in red, use the MMB in the scene or click the
[Separate Meshes] button to separate the selected faces into an individual mesh.
This new mesh will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.
6.3.6.3 Offset Mesh
Applies an offset to a selected mesh

This tool is available for meshes. It applies an specified offset to the selected mesh.
The Offset Mesh property sheet


When checked ON a copy of the original mesh will be retained.
Offset Distance
Defines the offset to be applied to the object in the normal direction. Enter a negative value
to apply the offset in the opposite direction
To apply an offset to a mesh
1. Select the mesh object.

3. Enter the required offset. A positive value offsets the mesh in the normal direction.
4. Click the tool to apply the offset.
A new mesh appears in the Inspection tree with a name and the suffix _Offset.
6.3.6.4 Scale
Scales a selected Point cloud / Mesh / Feature

The tool scales the selected point cloud, mesh or feature according to a defined scale factor in
the X, Y and Z directions. It also enables you change the dimensions of the pointcloud / mesh /
feature from mm to inches and vice versa.
The Scale dialog
Free
When this option is checked then a user defined scaling factor can be entered in the X
field. By default the same scale factor will be applied to in the Y and Z directions unless
the Isotropic scale option is checked off.
Inch-> mm
When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 25.4 will be applied in all directions. A
length of 1 inch will become 25.4mm. This factor can not be edited.
mm-> Inch
When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 1/25.4 (0.03937) will be applied in all
directions. A length of 1 mm will become 0.03937inches..This factor can not be edited.
Isotropic scale
This option is available when a Free scaling factor is selected. When checked 'off' it
enables you to define different scaling factors for the X, Y and Z directions.
To scale the dimensions of a point cloud, mesh or feature
1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.

2. Click on the Scale tool.
3. Check the Free option.
4. Enter the required scaling factor in the X field.
5. To apply different factors in the Y and Z directions, check the Isotropic scale option off.
6. Enter the required scaling factors.
7. Click [Apply] to apply the scaling factor.
The point cloud/mesh/feature will be a scaled. In the Measured data tree it will appear with the
indication _Scaled.
To convert the dimension units of a point cloud, mesh or feature
1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.

2. Click on the Scale tool.
3. Select the required conversion option, (inch-mm or mm-inch).
4. Click [Apply] to change the units.
The dimensions of the point cloud/mesh/feature will be adapted. In the Measured data tree it
will appear with the indication _Scaled.
6.3.6.5 Smooth
Smooths selected clouds or meshes

This tool smooths selected point cloud/mesh. It schedules the Smooth dialog.
The Smooth dialog

Selection
The Selection field displays the current selection. This selection can be modified using the
[Reselect] button.
[Reselect]
Clicking this button, defines the current selection as the target of the operation.
Settings
The parameters set in these fields define the smoothing process.
Maximum displacement.
This field defines the maximum displacement that can be applied to a point during the
smoothing process.
Number of iterations
This field defines the maximum number of iterations that should be used during the
smoothing process.
Statistics
This area displays information relating to the smoothing process:
- Number of points that have been moved.
- Mean distance moved by the points.
- Standard deviation for the movement.
-The minimum distance moved.
- The maximum distance moved.
[Start]
Clicking on this button starts the smoothing process. During the process the button is
renamed to [Stop]. If the [Stop] button is clicked, the smoothing process is terminated at
the end of the current iteration. When the smoothing process has been stopped this button
is renamed [Undo] and allows you to undo the smoothing process and return the points to
their original positions.
[Close]
This closes the Smooth dialog.
To smooth a point cloud/mesh
1. Select the point clouds/meshes to be smoothed.

3. Check the selection, [Reselect] if necessary.
4. Enter the smoothing settings.
5. Click [Start].
6. Click [Stop].
7. When the process is complete, click [Restore], to remove the effect of the smoothing or
[Close].
6.3.6.6 Reverse Mesh Normals
Switches the direction of selected normals

This tool changes the normals of a mesh. It can be created from a point cloud.
The Reverse Mesh Normals property sheet
[Flip normals]
This changes the direction of the selected normals.
Area
When this options is selected, you can select a number of normals.
Two-sided lighting
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on
the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the Property tree.
To change the direction of normals

2. Open the property sheet.
3. Click on mesh surface.
4. Click with the MMB or click on [Flip normals] in the property sheet.
6.3.6.7 Duplicate
Duplicates selected point cloud (s) / mesh(s)

The tool copies the selected point clouds or meshes or extracts a point cloud from comparison
information generated in the Compare task.
Note: This operation does not duplicate comparison information.
The Duplicate property sheet
Keep copy of Compare object

This option is only available when comparison information is selected. If the option is
checked ON, the comparison information is maintained and a point cloud is extracted from
this object. If the option is checked OFF, the comparison information is replaced by a point
cloud extracted from this object.
To duplicate a point cloud or mesh
1. Select one or more point cloud or mesh.

3. Set the Keep copy of Compare object to the required setting.

4. Click the Duplicate tool.

The point cloud(s)/mesh(s) are duplicated.
6.3.7 Sections
from rails.
6.3.8 Advanced
The Advanced Ribbon Group contains a number of advanced functionalities.

Mirror objects around a plane

The Mirror Objects command mirrors selected objects across a specified plane.
Mirror Objects Property Sheet
Plane
This field defines the mirroring plane of the current coordinate system. This has three
predefined planes: XY, YZ and XZ.
Position
The Position field specifies the position of the plane (rendered as translucent gray circular
disc) on the normal axis, e.g. when the XY plane is selected, the Position defines the
plane’s position on the Z-axis.
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
Keep Original
If this option is checked ON, a copy is made when the original object is mirrored. If it is
not checked the object is simply moved to new position on the other side of the mirror
plane.
[Mirror]
This starts the mirror process.
To mirror an object
1. Select a the object to be mirrored in the scene or the Inspection tree.

2. Click the Mirror Objects tool.
The current default plane will appear in the scene with a rectangular handle to manipulate
it.
Click on the View all tool if necessary if the plane is not visible.
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet to adjust the
parameters.
4. Drag the rectangular handle to adjust the position of the plane, or enter the required value in
the Position field.
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
5. Either click the Middle mouse button in the scene or click [Mirror] in the property sheet to
mirror the object.
A mirrored version of the solid will appear in the scene and in the Nominal inspection Tree.
6.3.8.2 Refine Mesh
Refines a mesh to make smaller triangles

This command subdivides an existing mesh. It divides triangles until their edge length is
smaller than the specified maximum edge length. This allows the smoothing operation to be
less intrusive on highly curved areas, such as leading/trailing edge of airfoils or turbine blades.
The Refine Mesh property sheet
Maximum Edge Length

The maximum length of any edge in the mesh triangles.

Maximum Number of Iterations

This represents the maximum number of iterations that will be performed in order to
achieve the required triangle edge length. If this maximum number of iterations is reached
the mesh is refined to the length that is achieved at the last iteration.
To refine a mesh
1. Select the mesh that is to be refined.

2. Click on the Refine Mesh tool.
3. Enter the maximum length of the triangle required in the new mesh.
4. Enter the Maximum Number of Iterations
5. Click the icon in the top left corner of the property sheet.
6.3.8.3 Mesh Volume
Calculates the volume of a mesh

This command calculates the volume of a mesh.
The operation of this function depends on whether the volume is required of a closed or an
open mesh.
Closed mesh
In this case the enclosed volume of the mesh is computed. This is irrespective of the position
and orientation of the mesh.
Figure 23: Volume of a closed mesh
In the examples shown above the volume computed, in both cases, corresponds to that
enclosed by the cone.
Open mesh
In this case, the a closed mesh is created by projecting the boundary of the mesh onto the
XY plane. The volume is then computed as the volume between the mesh surface and the XY
plane.
This can be illustrated using the same cone shape as shown above, but without a base, making
the mesh open.
Figure 24: Open mesh
When the base of this mesh is aligned with the XY plane, the volume computed is exactly the
same as that enclosed by the cone. This corresponds to the situation of the closed mesh.
Figure 25: Volume of mesh aligned with XY plane
When the mesh lies above the XY plane (Z+), the volume computed is (the volume enclosed
within the cone) PLUS (the volume represented by the projection of the base of the cone onto
the XY plane).
Figure 26: Volume of mesh above XY plane
When the mesh (or part of it) lies below the XY plane (Z-), the volume computed is (the
volume enclosed within the cone) MINUS (the volume represented by the projection of the
base of the cone onto the XY plane).

Figure 27: Volume of mesh above and below the XY plane
To compute the volume of a mesh
1. Select the mesh.

2. Click the Mesh Volume command to calculate the volume. The volume will be displayed in
a dialog box as shown below.
6.3.8.4 Golden Template
Provides an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects

A Golden Template is an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects. Typical objects
are those that can not accurately be produced, e.g. car seats that are composed of foam on the
inside and covered with cloth or leather. This tool enables an average model to be constructed
from acceptable objects thus enabling a suitable mold to be constructed. It also provides some
statistical information.
The Golden Template dialog
[Reselect]
This field displays the number of point clouds/meshes that are currently selected. When the
point clouds/meshes are selected in the tree then you can use the [Reselect] button to select
them for the golden template computation.
Search Distance
The value entered in this field defines a range over which points will be included in the
averaging process.
Statistics
When this option is checked 'on', then a set of statistics are computed as well as the average
point cloud. These statistics are illustrated in the figure below.
The statistics provided are :
• Max Deviation
max. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is -5
• Min Deviation
representing min. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is +2
• Range
representing the range of each point = 8 (3+5)
• 6Sigma
representing the 6Sigma variation of all distances of each point.
[Compute]
This calculates the average point cloud and statistics if requested. The average point cloud
appears in the Measured section of the data tree. The statistics appear in the Comparison
folder of the Inspect section of the data tree. The statistics can also be displayed in a flyout.
To compute a golden template point cloud
1. Select the point clouds/meshes to be included in the averaging process.

(If no clouds/meshes are specifically selected, then all available will be included.)
2. Click on the Golden Template tool.
3. To change the original selection, select point clouds in the tree or the display and then click
[Reselect].
4. Enter a distance over which the points will be included in the average.
5. Check the Statistics button if you want to see a set of statistics relating to the collection of
point clouds.
6. Click [Compute].
7. The Average point cloud will appear in the Measured section of the tree.
8. The statistics will appear in the Comparison folder of the Inspect section of the data tree.
They will also appear in the Golden Template Statistics (see page 501) dialog. This
dialog can be re-opened by selecting the statistics in the tree and clicking on the Colors tool
in the Info toolbar.
9. The statistics can be visualized for any point as a flyout.

6.4 Align Task (solid)

The Align task is used to align the measured data set to the nominal dataset.
It includes tools to:

• Align measured data using a variety of methods.
• Move models by translating or rotating them.
The Align task consists of the following tool groups:
Align (see page 299)
Transform (see page 320)
6.4.1 Align
The Align Ribbon Group contains commands to align the measured data to the nominal model.
Each of the tools are described in this section but the following point apply to all alignments.
• Alignments are applied to all measured objects. For the Best fit method you can choose
which objects are used for the analysis but the alignment is applied to all objects.
• When creating a new document, the original alignment of the nominal and measured
objects is labelled "None" and is shown in red in the Measured tree.
• If opening a document created in a software version earlier than Focus 2019, the original
alignment of the nominal and measured objects is labelled "Original" and shown in red in
the Measured tree.
• Alignments are applied sequentially in the order in which they are defined.
• Each one appears in the Measured tree.
• The contextual menu allows you to perform a number of operations on the alignments.
• An alignment coloured red is protected and can not be deleted or renamed.

• The Alignment shown in bold text is the active alignment - which is the one you can see in
the scene.
• Activating another alignment applies it to the measured objects and displays it in the scene.
• Deleting an alignment removes it from the list.
6.4.1.1 Align N Points
Moves and rotates the measured data to align them with the nominal data using
multiple points
The Align N Points tool is used to align all measured data to the nominal data or to specific
locations using (N) source and (N) target points. Constraints can be defined for each individual
couple. An alignment will minimize the sum of square distances for each set of corresponding
points.
Note: The performance of the alignment varies with the size of the models and the
number and complexity of the pairs.
This method can be used as first alignment that can be refined with a more accurate on e.g.
Best fit.
Note: The Align N Points tool only is active when there is at least one measured object
available in the scene.
The Align "N" Points dialog box
This dialog contains two tabs; one that list the selected pairs of points as well as the constraints
applied to their movement and the other the results of their alignment.
Alignment Name
This field displays the name that will be assigned to the N points alignment. You can adapt
the name as required.
The Points tab

On/Off light switch

The green light button indicates that the corresponding couple is available for the
alignment process. Clicking the green light toggles to it to a red light. The red light button
indicates that the couple is deactivated: it will not take part in the alignment calculation and
its display is also temporarily removed from the scene.
Measured point (Actuals)
Measured point (Actuals) displays the coordinates of the picked source points. Points can
be selected on either the point cloud or on a section.
Model point (Nominals)
This displays the coordinates of the corresponding points that are selected on the Nominal
model.
Constraints
These check boxes indicate whether movement is constrained relative to the X, Y and Z
axes of the coordinate system. When a constraint is checked, it will be applied.
[Pick Points]
Clicking [Pick Points] will hide the dialog box from the scene. Couples of points can be
selected for the alignment process (by clicking first on a measured point and then on a
corresponding nominal point). When sufficient have been defined, click with the MMB to
restore the dialog box.
[Align]
This initiates the alignment process using the active (green light) couples. The Points tab
switches to the Results tab as soon as the alignment process is finished.
A new alignment is added to the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the assigned
name.
To remove this alignment click on the Undo button in the top left corner of the screen.
See working with alignments (see page 299).
[Close]
The [Close] button closes the Align N Points tool. The couples are removed from the
scene.
The Results tab
The results tab becomes active and available when an alignment has been made. It displays the
deviations between each set of corresponding points and the constraints set.
dX, dY, dZ
These columns display the remaining distance in the various directions between the source
and target point.
d 3D
The d 3D column displays the remaining distance in 3 dimensions between the source and
target point.
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied for information.
They can not be modified.
Note: You can switch back to the Points tab from the Results tab manually. The
couples with green lights and the constraints can then be edited. The [Align] button
becomes sensitive again and can be used to re-calculate the alignment, starting from the
current location.
To align measured data to a nominal model using N points
In order to perform this operation, you need to have at least one nominal and one measured
object in the Inspection tree. The two objects need to be available in the scene so that you can
select the pairs of points. There are two means to do this:
•
Click on the View all icon in the tool bar to zoom the view to include the two models.
• Click on The Views menu and select Views layout - 2x horizontal or 2x Vertical. In each
window select an object in the tree and then click on the View Select icon.
1. Click on the Align N Points tool.

2. If you wish to change the name of the alignment from the default one offered, enter the
name in the "Alignment Name" field.
3. Click [Pick Points] if you wish to remove the dialog from the scene. When the points have
been picked, click with MMB to restore the dialog box.
4. Place the mouse over the measured data object and observe the pointer changing to a plus
sign (+, crosshair). LMB click to create a source point. You can select a point on either the
point cloud or on a section that has been created on the measured model.
5. With a band line attached to the pointer, LMB click on a corresponding point on the
nominal model to define the target point of the couple. The target point can be on the model
or on a section.
Once the target point is picked, a numbered line segment (couple) will appear from the
selected source point on the measured data to the current mouse position located at the
target point on the nominal model. The attributes of the couple are displayed in the Align N
points dialog box.
6. Set any Constraints as required.
7. Create more couples by picking corresponding points on the measured and nominal model.
Only one couple is required to create an alignment but the alignment will be improved by
using more.
8. To remove a couple: Click with the LMB on the line joining the points. (2 blue lines
appear.)
Press <Ctrl> and click again with the LMB to remove the couple.
9. To de-active a couple (remove it from the alignment process): click on the green light next
to it in the dialog box.
10.Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.
The Results tab will appear and all the measured data will be aligned with the nominal data.
11.To modify the alignment parameters, click , then click on the Points tab and change either
the points selected or the constraints applied. Then click [Align] again.
12.When the alignment is as required, click [Close].
To Align Measured data to defined locations
In order to perform this operation, there needs to be at least one measured object available.
1. Click the Align N Points tool.
3. Place the mouse over the measured data object and click on the required source point. This
can be either a point on the point cloud or on a section.
The coordinates of this point will appear in the dialog under the Measured point (Actuals)
list.
4. In the corresponding fields for the Model point (Nominals) enter the coordinates of the
point to which the measured data must be aligned.
5. Press the <Enter> key and the couple will appear in the screen
6. Create as many alignment couples as are required in the same way.

7. Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.
To change the position of points
1. Mouse over the source or target point until the cross hair changes to a small box.
2. With the small box displayed click and drag on the model to relocate the point.
To delete all the points
1. Click the [Close] button to quit the Align N Points tool and restart.
6.4.1.2 Iterative N Points
Aligns all measured data to a number of defined nominal points by searching for the
corresponding measured points in a nominal direction
This tool allows you to align a measured model to a number of defined points and directions.
The nominal alignment points are given and the corresponding measured points are
automatically searched for in a nominal direction.
This tool can be used when you have Surface points for directional compare, and an initial
alignment has been made.
The Iterative N Points Alignment dialog
This dialog has two tabs. In the Points tab the points to be aligned are selected. Once the
alignment has been made, the Results tab is available to show the results of the alignment.
The Points tab

Alignment Name
This field displays the default name used for an Iterative N point alignment. You can adapt
the name as required.
Minimal Improvement
In aligning the measured model to fit to the defined nominal points, an iterative process
is used to find the optimum position of the measured object. This field enables you to set
limit on the improvement that will be searched for in successive iterations.
Points
Any number of nominal points can be selected for the alignment. These each have a
number. From the drop down list you can select from all the 2D features and feature points
that are present in the nominal model that will be used for the alignment. Each time a
feature point is selected, a new field appears.
Items included in the list are feature points and surface points.
Points for which a direction has been defined are indicated with a green light. Those which
are selected but which do not have a direction defined are shown with an orange light.
To exclude a point from the alignment, click on the green button to turn it red.
X, Y Z
For each point, these fields display the coordinates of the selected feature.
Search direction
For each point, these fields display the direction associated with the point or feature. This
is the direction in which the corresponding measured points will be searched for. These
values can be edited manually to define a specific direction.
If the direction is unknown you can use the [Detect IJK] button to determine it.
[Detect IJK]
Computes the (normal) search direction. It is available when XYZ points are entered and a
nominal solid/mesh is selected.
Constraints
These check boxes indicate whether movement is will be constrained relative to the X, Y
and Z axes of the coordinate system.
[Align]
This starts the alignment process. This button will only be available once points, directions
and the constraints have been defined. If successful then the Results tab will be available in
which the deviations (movements) will be listed.
The Results tab
The results tab shows the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair, together with
the defined Search direction and constraints. The remaining deviations, Search direction and
constraints are not editable, only displayed as information to evaluate the resulting deviations.
dX, dY, dZ
These fields display the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair.
Search direction
These fields display the search direction used for the alignment. These fields are for
information only and can not be edited.
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied during the
alignment.
[Restore]
This button removes the effect of the alignment, and returns you to the Points tab
[Close]
This closes the Iterative N Points Alignment tool. A new alignment appears in the
Inspection tree with the assigned name.

To make an iterative N points alignment
Before starting the alignment process you need to:

• Have a nominal solid/mesh as well as and a measured point cloud/mesh,
• Create nominal points or features,
The nominal points should be selected within the body of the nominal model. Points that
are on the edge will be unlikely to find point cloud points in their normal direction.
To convert nominal point to surface points you can use the Surface Points from Points tool
(see page 93) in the Feature Fitting ribbon group.
• Have made an initial alignment using N points or the Best Fit tool for example, which uses
all the points. The Iterative N Points alignment tool allows you to make a more accurate
alignments based on the selected points.
1. Click on the Iterative N Points Alignment tool.
2. Enter a name for the alignment "Alignment Name" field if this is to be different to the
default one.
3. Define the minimum improvement if different from the default.
4. For each of the points, select the required nominal point/surface point from the drop down
list.
5. Define the direction to be used for the search. This can be either:
- filled in automatically when a direction is associated with the surface point/feature,
- computed using [Detect IJK] in the case of nominal points and a nominal solid/mesh
- entered manually.
6. Edit the Constraints if necessary.
7. When the [Align] button is available, click it to start the alignment.
8. If successful, the alignment appears in the tree, and the measured objects are moved.
9. If the following message appears, you need to move the two objects closer together using
another alignment method.
10.When the alignment is complete, click [Close] to close the dialog.

6.4.1.3 Best Fit
Matches all measured data to nominal objects using 6DOF best fit
The Best Fit tool aligns selected measured data to all visible or selected nominal models.
The result of the alignment operation appears as an entry in the Inspection tree. A Best
Fit alignment is an iterative process using the condition of minimizing the square of the
distance between the nominal and measured data to converge on a solution. It also provides
a mechanism to adapt the fit to attain positive deviations only between the measured and
the nominal objects. The measured data, that is used for calculating the alignment, can be
a combination of meshes and point clouds. The nominal models can be any combination of
solids, meshes, and point clouds.
This alignment is best applied after an initial alignment process, using N points for example.
The Best Fit dialog box
The Best Fit dialog box has following parameters:

Alignment Name
This field displays the default name used for Best Fit alignment. You can adapt the name
as required.
[Reselect Measured]
This field displays the those objects selected in the Measured section of the data tree
when the dialog was opened. These represent the objects that will be used for the Best Fit
calculation. All measured objects will be subjected to the alignment. To change the objects
to be used in the calculation click [Reselect Measured], and select the required objects
from the tree.
[Reselect Nominal]
This field displays the objects selected in the Nominal section of the data tree when
the dialog was opened. These represent the objects that will be used for the Best Fit
calculation. To change the objects to be used in the calculation, click [Reselect Nominal],
and select the required objects from the tree.
Minimal Improvement
This defines the criteria used to determine when the best fit is achieved. If the movement
required during any one iteration is greater than the value specified here, then further
iterations will continue until the movement is less than the specified value. The minimal
improvement value is saved during and in between sessions.
Auto Start Orientation
When this option is checked ON, the orientation (as well as the position) of the measured
objects will adapted so that it matches that of the nominal objects at the start of the
alignment process. This makes the alignment more robust as it eliminates the importance
of the orientation of the measured object prior to starting the Best Fit.

Positive Deviations Only

When this option is checked ON, the best fit will be optimised to maximize the number of
positive deviations. This means that every effort will be made to ensure that the nominal
object fits within the measure (point cloud) object. It is also possible to apply constraints
on the degrees of freedom used in the alignment as explained below.
Degrees of Freedom
By default the best fit alignment process allows movement in 6 degrees of freedom (3
translational and 3 rotational). You can restrict the degrees of freedom used in the process
by clicking on the [Edit] button, and selecting the degrees of freedom required.
Click [OK] to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the dialog box. Click
[Cancel] to close the dialog box without modifying the degrees of freedom. The Options
section in the Best Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees of freedom.
Alignment Info
This field shows the translation and rotation applied to all the measured data following the
best fit alignment.
[Align]
This button initiates the Best Fit alignment. During alignment, the status bar displays the
number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and nominal
models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration. The scene
is dynamically updated.
A Stop button allows you to terminate the process.
A new alignment is added to the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the assigned
name.

[Close]
This closes the Best Fit tool.
To make a best fit alignment between measured and nominal objects
This process requires that measured and nominal models exist in the Inspection tree.
This process is best applied after an initial alignment using N point or 6 points for example.
1. Click on the Best fit tool.
2. To change the selection of objects that will be used in the Best Fit calculation, click
[Reselect Measured] and [Reselect Nominal] and select the required objects from the tree.
3. Define the alignment parameters.
4. Click [Align] to start the best fit alignment process.
5. If you are happy with the alignment, click [Close]. If not use the Undo button in the top
left corner of the screen.
6.4.1.4 Align 3-2-1
Aligns measured data using plane, line and point features as input
This tool enables you to use features as the input for aligning the measured data to the nominal
data. Four methods are available based on the selection of defined Plane, Point and Line
features.
Align 3-2-1 dialog
Alignment Name
This field displays the default name used for 6 points alignment. You can adapt the name
as required.
Method
A list containing the available alignment methods. Each of these methods is described in
more detail below.
Measured
The selection of measured features to be used in calculating the alignment. The features
selected depend on the chosen method.
Nominal
The selection of nominal features to be used in calculating the alignment. The features
selected depend on the chosen method.
Offset
When an offset is defined, an offset version of the nominal feature will be used for the
alignment.

[Align]
Applies the alignment as defined by the selection of measured and nominal features
defined by the method. A new alignment is added to the Measured section of the
Inspection tree with the specified name.

[Close]
The [Close] button closes the Align 3-2-1 tool.
Plane-Line-Point
When this method is selected, the Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The
remaining degrees of freedom are translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal
of the plane. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset by this value.
The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target
line. The line indicates the main direction. The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in
the direction of the line.
The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and then to the projected
Measured line and will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Line-Point method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes, lines and point features have been
detected.
1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.

2. Select the Plane-Line-Point method from the drop down menu.
4. Click in the Measured column and select the measured plane to be aligned from those
available.
5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those available.
6. Define an offset if required.

7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those
available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.
9. Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.
10.Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.
11.Click [Align] to align the features. All the measured data will be moved and aligned to the
nominal data.
Plane-Line-Line
The Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are
translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane. When an offset is
entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target
line. The projected line indicates the main direction. The remaining degree of freedom is a
translation in the direction of the line.
The second Measured line will also be projected in the Measured plane and intersected with
the first projected line. The intersection point will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Line-Line method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes and lines features have been detected.

2. Select the Plane-Line-Line method from the drop down menu.
available.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those
available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.
9. Click in the third Measured column and select the measured line from those available.

10.Click in the third Nominal column and select the target line from those available.
nominal data.
Plane-Plane-Point
The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first Measured plane and the
intersection line aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction. The remaining
degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.
The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and than to the intersection line
and will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Plane-Point method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes and point features have been detected.

2. Select the Plane-Plane-Point method from the drop down menu.
available.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from
those available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available
10.Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.
11.Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.
nominal data.
Plane-Plane-Plane
The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line
aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction. When an offset is entered,
the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value. The remaining degree of freedom is a
translation in the direction of the line.
The third Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line
intersected with line created by the first two surfaces. The intersection point will fix the last
constraint. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
To align features using the Plane-Plane-Plane method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes features have been detected.

2. Select the Plane-Plane-Plane method from the drop down menu.
name in the "Alignment Name" field. (If no change is made, subsequent 3-2-1 alignments
will be assigned the name "3-2-1(N)".)
4. Click in the Measured column and select the first measured plane to be aligned from those
available.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from
those available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available
10.Click in the Measured column and select the third measured plane from those available.
11.Click in the Nominal column and select the third target plane from those available.
nominal data.

6.4.1.5 RPS Alignment
Invokes an RPS alignment

The RPS tool aligns all the measured data by selecting corresponding pairs of measured
and nominal features or entities and specifying constraints between them. The complete
alignment is made by defining a series of steps. Each step in the process fixes specific degrees
of freedom and the alignment is made by matching the remaining degrees of freedom.
The RPS alignment dialog box
This dialog allows you to define a series of constraints. Each constraint applies to a particular
feature or object. A constraint can be applied in a series of steps each of which can have a
different weighting.
Alignment Name
This field displays the default name used for an RPS points alignment. You can adapt the
name as required.
Constraint Type
A constraint is applied to a pair of features or objects. The constraint can be defined in two
ways:
• UCS: When this button is checked, the constraint will be defined in terms of
coordinates.
• Feature: When this option is checked, the constraint will be defined in terms of feature
characteristics.
Measured
This enables you to choose the measured object that will be used for the alignment. The
options include:
• Measured features: which can be selected from the drop-down list. When selecting an
"area" this can be aligned to picked reference plane.
• Picked entities: When this option is selected, you can click on a point on the measured
model.
Nominal
This enables you to select the nominal object that corresponds to the selected measured
feature.
• Measured features: Only those of the same type as the selected measured feature are
available.
• Picked entities:
Picked Point: This option is available when the measured item is a picked point.
You can either pick a corresponding point on the nominal model or select a defined
nominal point.
Picked Reference: This option is available when the measured item is a Measured
point cloud area. See To define an alignment using measured cloud area and a
picked reference (see page 318)
Offset: Input fields will appear in which you can specify an offset that will be applied to
the position of the measured object after the alignment.
Constraint
The Constraint drop down list, shows all the possible constraints that can be applied to the
selected measures/nominal features. The options available depend on the items selected for
the alignment and the constraint type.
It is recommended to constrain all 6 degrees of freedom, i.e. three translational and three
rotational.
If the measured feature is a point cloud area to match to the selected reference faces,
the matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps. Since matching will
determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to be used as the last step of the
alignment. SeeTo define an alignment using measured cloud area and a picked reference
(see page 318)
Step
The alignment is made in a series of steps. Step 1 is the first priority in the alignment.
All the constraints you make here are fixed in this step. Step 2 will fix the other available
constraints, even if it overlaps the constraints of the previous step it will not influence the
constraints of the first step. This gives you the opportunity to over constrain the model.
Weight
The Weight parameter represents the relative importance of the constraints in a single step.
The higher the number, the higher the importance.
[Align]
This starts the alignment. The measured objects are aligned according to the constraints. A
new alignment is added to the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the specified
name.


[Close]
This closes the RPS alignment dialog box.
Example: To define an alignment using feature constraints
In this example the following feature constraints are applied:

A pair of circle and slot features are aligned in a single step
In a second step, two line features are aligned.
Before starting this procedure, corresponding pairs of circle, slot and line features have been
defined for the nominal and the measured model.
1. Click on the RPS tool.
2. Check the button next to Feature.
3. From the Measured drop down list, select the first measured feature to be aligned (in this
example Meas_Circle).
4. From the Nominal drop down list, select the corresponding nominal feature.
5. From the Constraint drop down box, select the constraint to be applied to these features (in
this case that the two circles coincide completely).
For this type of constraint you could define an offset if you require the measured item to be
displaced from the exact position of the nominal item.
We will now add another constraint to step 1, which is to match two slots in the same way.
6. Check the button next to Feature in the second row and select the two slots.
Since there are two constraints in the same step, a weights must be assigned to them.
7. Enter values for the weights in the input field. In this example the slot feature constraint has
a higher weight of 3. This means that the constraint is more strict and the allowable distance
between the features is 3 times less than for the other constraint in this step.
8. Check the button next to Feature in the third row and select the two lines.
9. Increase the step number to 2. The constraints defined in step 1 have the highest priority, so
the constraint defined in this step can not override any conditions set in Step 1.
10.Enter a name for the alignment, if you want something other than the default one.
11.Click [Align] to start the alignment process.
Example: To make an alignment using UCS constraints

2. Check the button next to UCS.
3. From the Measured drop down list, select the first measured feature to be aligned (in this
case the round slot).
The coordinates of the centre of the measured round slot are displayed.
4. From the Nominal drop down list, select the corresponding nominal feature.
The coordinates of the centre of the nominal round slot are displayed.
5. From the Constraint drop down box, select the constraint to be applied to these features (in
this case X is selected to align them in the X direction).
For the situation shown above the alignment process will set the X coordinate of the centre
of the measured slot to be exactly the same as the X coordinate value of the centre of the
nominal slot (1384.846). In this example 0 offset is being applied. An offset can be defined
by entering a value in the first input field relating to the X coordinate. (An offset of 10,
would move the measured X coordinate value to 1394.846)
6. Enter a name for the alignment, if you want something other than the default one.
7. Click [Align] to start the alignment process.
To define an alignment using measured cloud area and a picked reference
This enables you to make a small scale best fit alignment of a measured point cloud area
feature on reference planes that can be matched.
It requires that you have defined a measured point cloud area feature and a reference solid.


2. Choose the constraint method. This procedure can be applied using Feature or UCS.
3. From the Measured drop down list, select a point cloud area.
Three fields will appear with the coordinates of the center of the area.
4. In the Nominal drop down list, select Picked reference.
5. Click [Add] then pick (click on) the reference models to align the feature area to. The
names of the picked reference faces are listed in the text box.
6. Optionally enter the offset to take into account during alignment in the edit boxes.
In the right-hand edit box, you can enter the offset to take into account for an individual
reference entity.
You can also set the same offset value for all. In this case, enter the common offset value in
the left hand edit box and click [Set].
7. The only constraint is Match to match the point cloud / mesh area to the picked reference
objects. The matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps.
Note: Since matching will determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to
be used as the last step of alignment.
6.4.1.6 Interactive Alignment
This tool aligns all measured data by interactively moving them in particular directions
This schedules the Interactive Align dialog.
The Interactive Align dialog
Alignment Name
This field displays the default name used for an Interactive alignment. You can adapt the
name as required.
Align
Direction arrows
These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard move the selected objects in the selected
direction in the screen plane by the defined distance.
+ and – buttons
These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard, rotate the selected objects around the
normal of the screen plane. Each click rotates the selected objects with the given specified
angle. The ‘+’ button rotates in a counter clockwise direction, the ‘– ‘button in a clockwise
direction.
Rotation point
When this option is checked, a point can be selected in the display to act as the centre of
rotation. Its coordinates will appear in the Rotation Point fields below.
[Restore]
The [Restore] button becomes available one a translation or rotation has taken place. It
returns the selected objects to their original location – orientation (before the dialog was
opened).
[Close]
This button accepts the newly defined position and rotation of the objects and closes the
dialog.
The new alignment appears in the tree with the assigned name.
To interactively align objects
1. Enter a name for the interactive alignment if required.

2. Enter distance in the align translation field.
3. Click on any of the direction arrows to move the object by that amount in the corresponding
direction.
4. Enter a rotation angle in the input field.
5. Click on + to rotate the object by the defined angle in a counter clockwise direction.
6. To define the centre of rotation make sure that the Rotation Point check button is checked
"on", then click in the display to define the centre of rotation.
7. Click [Restore] to remove the effects of the movement.
8. Click [Close] to apply the interactive alignment.
6.4.2 Transform
This Ribbon Group contains tools to apply a 2D fit to sections and move an object
6.4.2.1 2D Best Fit
Matches a measured section to a nominal section using 6 DOF best fit

The 2D Best Fit matches measured section objects and section compare objects to the
respective nominal sections, minimizing the average square distance. The measured objects
are measured 2D sections. The nominal objects are nominal 2D sections. For compared
sections, the measured and nominal sections are within the compare section object. The
result is an transformation that is added to a list of transformations and all selected measured
sections are re-positioned. 2D Best Fit alignment is an iterative process where each fitting is
attempted repeatedly over the previous state, with the condition of minimizing the square of
the distance between the nominal and measured sections.
Note: The 2D Best Fit tool is only active when there is at least one nominal and one
measured section or one compare section object available in the scene.
Note: The sections to be used must be parallel.
The 2D Best Fit dialog box
Create new
This field displays the name that will be assigned to the 2D Best Fit transformation. You
can adapt the name as required.
Update existing
This option is available if transformations are already in the Inspection Tree. You can
select which of the existing transformations to update.
[Reselect All]
The Movable data field in the Selection group displays the measured sections that will
be aligned to the nominal sections. The Nominal data box in the Selection group lists
the sections to which the movable sections are aligned. To modify the current selection,
manually select the movable sections, nominal sections and compare section objects and
press the [Reselect All] button. In the Movable text field, the “X + Y” represents the
“number of measured sections in the Measured tree + number of measured sections in the
compare section objects”. The content of the Nominal text field is composed in the same
way.
Independent Measured Objects

When this option is checked, all the entities are best fitted separately. When each best fit is
done, a new transformation is made with the name of the measured object.
When this option is unchecked, all measured sections are best fitted as one to all nominal.
Minimal Improvement
The Minimal Improvement data box displays the user defined stop criterion. At the end
of each best fit iteration, the improvement of the average distance is checked. If the
average distance has improved more than the Minimal Improvement value, then the best fit
transformation will continue with the next iteration to find a better fit. If the improvement
of the matching distance between two iterations is smaller than the indicated Minimal
Improvement value, the matching stops.
Note: The Minimal Improvement value is saved both during and in between
sessions.
Degrees of Freedom
On clicking the [Edit] button, the Transformation Constraints dialog box is displayed. This
dialog box contains check boxes for the rotation and for the three translation components
X, Y, and Z. The degrees of freedom that are checked, will be used in the best fit. The
degrees of freedom that are unchecked will not be used in the best fit.
Click [OK] to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the Transformation
Constraints dialog box. Click the Cancel button to close the Transformation Constraints
dialog box without modifying the degrees of freedom. The Options section in the 2D Best
Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees of freedom.
Transformation Info
After completion of the Best Fit transformation, the Transformation Info section is updated
with the alignment result, i.e. the rotation and translation components of measured data
around XYZ.
[Apply]
This initiates the Best Fit transformation. During the process, the status bar displays the
number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and nominal
models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration. The scene
is dynamically updated.
During matching, the status bar also contains a [Stop] button which allows you to terminate
the matching at any time.
When the matching has finished, the status bar shows the matching result.

Note: If the matching is terminated before attaining the requested minimal

improvement, the user can restore the objects to the initial location while the dialog
is still open.
On successful completion of the best fit process, the transformation is added under the
Transformations node in the Inspection tree.
[Close]
This quits the 2D Best Fit tool.
A new transformation is added to the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree.
To remove the effect of the transformation, click with RMB and select Delete.
To make a 2D- best fit between measured and nominal objects
Best fit matching requires that measured and nominal sections exist in the Nominal and
Measured panels of the Inspection tree. These sections must be parallel.
You can select the sections to be aligned before the operation if needed. If no models are pre-
selected all models will be selected by default.
1. Click on the 2D Best fit tool.
2. If no objects were pre-selected, all the objects will be selected by default.
To change the selection, re-select the objects to be moved and click [Reselect All].
3. Define the transformation parameters.
4. Click [Apply] button to start the best fit process.
6.4.2.2 Move
Performs a defined translation and rotation of selected objects

This tool translates and/or rotates selected objects about specified axes.
Move dialog
Transformation Name
Enter a name to be assigned to the move.
[Reselect]
The field displays the number of currently selected items that will be moved. The
[Reselect] button enables you to change the selected.
1. Check the Objects option ON.
2. Click on the objects you want to select in either the tree or the screen.
3. Click [Reselect].
Objects
When this option is checked, objects can be (re)selected for movement. See above.
Coordinates
When this option is checked, the coordinates of the start and end position for the move can
be defined directly in the display. The coordinates defining the movements will appear in
the Translate or Rotate fields below.
Reference
This field only applies when the Coordinates option is selected. The options available
define how the movement will be applied.
• Features: If features have been defined, you can select one from those available. The
movement will be relative to the feature and the means of defining the movement of the
object will depend on the selected feature.
• WCS: (World Coordinate System) In this case the movement is defined by entering the
translation and/or rotation in World coordinates.
Translate (WCS)
The direction of the translation is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z axes of the coordinate
system.
The Distance is the corresponding three dimensional distance, computed from the three
components.

Translate (Feature)
The direction is defined by the feature. The Distance is the distance it is to be translated in
the feature direction.
Rotation (WCS)
Axis point: the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.
Axis direction: a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation.
Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined
axis.
Rotation (Features)
Axis point: the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.
Axis direction: a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation, specified by the
feature.
Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined
axis.
When this option is checked then a copy of the original object is retained in its position
before the translation / rotation. After the [Apply] button is used, a new (moved) object
appears in the Inspection tree. This checkbox is only available when solids, meshes, and/or
point clouds are selected.
[Apply]
Clicking this button, applies the defined movement to the selected objects and the
transformation appears in the tree.
[Close]
Closes the dialog.
To move an object using a feature as reference
Before starting this procedure you need to have features defined.

1. Select the object to be modified.
2. Click on the Move tool.
3. If you wish to select a different object, select it in the Inspection tree, then click [Reselect]
4. Select the reference feature to be used to define the translation and/or rotation.
5. Check the Translation radio button.
6. Enter the required movement in the "Distance" field. (The vector is defined by the feature.)
7. Check the Rotation button.
8. Define the Axis point either by entering the values of the coordinates or by clicking on a
point on the model.
9. If you wish to retain a copy of the object in its original position, check the "Keep copy of
original" button.
10.Click [Apply] to apply the defined translation / rotation.
11.If the object movement is as required click [Close].
To move an object in the World Coordinate System
1. Select the object to be modified.

2. Click on the Move tool.
3. If you wish to select a different object, select it in the Inspection tree, then click [Reselect]
4. Select WCS as the Reference
5. Check the Translation radio button.
6. You can then either enter the movement vector required as the three coordinate directions
or you can define the movement graphically.
To do this
- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.
- Click on a point on the object that you want to move.
- Drag the mouse to the final position to define the vector and click again.
(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)
7. Check the Rotation button.
8. You can then either enter the rotation parameters required in the input fields or you can
define the rotation graphically.
To do this
- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.
- Click on a point on the object that you want to rotate.
- Drag the mouse to the a second point to define the direction and click again.
- Drag the mouse to a third point to define the angle of rotation and click again.
(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)
9. If you wish to retain a copy of the object in its original position, check the "Keep copy of
original" button.
10.Click [Apply] to apply the defined translation / rotation.
11.If the object movement is as required click [Close].
6.5 Compare Task (solid)

The Compare task is used to compare the measured data set with the nominal data set.


• Compare all features, point clouds and meshes in the measured model to those in the
nominal model, either globally or in a specified direction, and present the results of the
comparison.
• Create surface points from features or flyouts.
• Compare the accuracy of an edge.
• Represent the curvature of a point cloud or mesh as a colored compare object.
• Compute the distance to the opposite wall and report deviations.
• Evaluate defined GD&T tolerances for features.
• Modify the flyout display style.
• Create and compare sections and add them to a rail.
The Compare Task consists of the following tool groups:
Compare (see page 327)
6.5.1 Compare
The Compare Ribbon Group contains functions to compare the measured data to the nominal
model, either globally or along sections, directions or edges.
6.5.1.1 Global Compare
Compares all points of Measured Point clouds/Meshes/Feature areas to (selected)

Nominal objects/3D features
The Global Compare tool is used to reveal the deviation of measured model(s) with respect to
its associated nominal model(s) as a color plot on each point (if the measured model is a point
cloud) or on vertices (if the measured model is a mesh). The tool can also be used to reveal the
deviation of feature areas with respect to the nominal objects/nominal 3D features.
Global Compare properties sheet
Prevent Fall Through

If this option is checked, the comparison is made to a "corresponding" point in the
measured surface. A nominal point is said to correspond to the measured point when it has
a similar normal orientation. It is not made to the closest point.
This option can be used on:
• nominal solids
• measured meshes
• point clouds with meta data. (This means point clouds that were scanned in a recent
version of Focus and which therefore contain vector information.)
If the set of objects being compared contains point clouds that do not contain vector
information, this option is not applied to them and a warning message is received when the
global comparison is made.
Shape Recognition
If this option is set, adjustments are made to measured points before projecting them onto
Nominal objects to improve shape recognition.
Exclude Border
If this option is set, those points that happen to be projected onto the border of the Nominal
Surfaces are neglected.
Presently only Nominal Meshes and Solid faces support this option (have border points
defined), while the point clouds and features do not have border points defined. Also note
that every solid face has border points surrounding its geometry. When a projected point
lies on a surface border, it is considered as “border projection” even if it is an internal point
for the whole solid composed of multiple faces.
Keep Measured
After a Global comparison, the measured model/feature area is immediately removed from
the data node of the measured tree and placed under the Comparison node of the Inspection
tree. To keep a copy of the measured model, check this option ON.
Hide Nominal
After a Global comparison, the nominal model is immediately hidden in the Inspection
tree.

To make a global comparison
Note that some comparison parameters are set globally as an attribute of the object. So for
solids for example, the Material thickness and the tolerance range applicable are specified
using the object's attributes (see page 508).
1. Select the Mixed selection tool.
2. Select both the measured and nominal objects.
The measured objects could be point clouds/meshes/feature areas. The nominal objects
could be nominal models/3D features. More than one object can be selected, meaning that
several solids can be compared to a single point cloud.
3. Open the Global Compare properties sheet and adjust the parameters if needed.
4. Click the Global Compare tool.
The measured objects are compared to the nominal objects. The Comparison is added to the
Comparisons node of the Inspect tree. There will be one comparison object for each solid
selected. The Comparison Information dialog (see page 501) displays the comparison
results.
6.5.1.2 Directional Compare
Compares nominal data points to mesh(es ) in a specified direction

The Direction Compare tool compares nominal surface points to a points on a mesh and
provides a directional compare object as a result.
This tool works in two ways.
• When an anchor point is associated with a nominal point
The Anchor point (A) is located in 3D space at (x, y, z). The surface point to be compared
(B) will be located in space at (x+ x, y+ y, z+ z) as shown in the figure below.
Knowing the fixed reference distance in the nominal directional points pair (An, Bn),
automatically detect a measured anchor point Am based on An through a directional
comparison. Am will be deviated from An by a distance .
Using the known reference distance ( ) between the nominal anchor point (An) and
the surface (edge) point (Bn), the Directional Compare tool will automatically detect a
measured anchor point (Am) based on (An). The distance between Am and An is A.
Using the anchor point deviation A an intermediate nominal point Bn’ = Bn + A (or
Bn’ = Am + ) will be defined. A measured point (Bm ) will be automatically detected and
compared to it using the directional compare algorithm.
Note that, for clarity, the offset between the nominal model and the measured mesh is
exaggerated in the figure above
• When no anchor point is associated with a nominal point
the surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the direction of the nominal
point.
The directional compare requires either a pre-existing file that defines the positions and
directions to be used in the comparison or new surface points in the nominal tree. It is
accessible when a mesh is available in the data tree.
The Directional Compare dialog box

[ Reselect ]
This allows you to update the selection of the measured meshes. If the pre-selection is
empty, then all the mesh(es) are selected by default.
Surface points
From file
Check this option to import the nominal points from a file. This file can be created using
the Surface Point from Point tool in the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Nominal tab.
From tree
Check this option to use defined Surface points in the tree. By default all available surface
points are selected.
[ Reselect ]
Click this button to modify the selection of Surface Points from the tree.
Nominal Points
The list of surface points selected in the tree or in the external file.
Anchor Points
Anchor points can be selected from the points defined in the tree. Click in the right hand
field to select an anchor point from the drop-down list.
Flip nominal surface points orientation

Changes the orientation of the nominal points by 180deg.
Create measured surface points
When this option is checked, individual measured surface points will also be created
instead of just one directional compare object.
Maximum search distance
When this option is checked then a comparison will be made between points that are less
then this distance in the normal direction.
[ Compare ]
The Compare button starts the comparison of the selected surface points to the mesh in the
specified direction. The comparison is added under the Comparisons node in the Inspection
tree.
The Directional Compare Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the
comparison results.
[ Close ]
This closes the Directional Compare tool.
To make a Directional comparison
1. Nominal surface points must have been defined on the nominal model. Use the Surface
Point from Point (see page 93) tool in the Feature fitting ribbon group in the Nominal
tab). These nominal points can be saved to the tree or a file.
2. In the Measured tab a mesh must be available. Use the Mesh (see page 221) tool in the
Filter/ Mesh ribbon group.
3. Select the mesh for comparison if required.
4. Select the nominal surface points in the tree if these are available.
5. Click on the Directional Compare tool.
6. The Directional Compare dialog opens
If the mesh was pre-selected it will appear in the Selection field. You can change the
selection by clicking on a mesh in the inspection tree and clicking [Reselect].
If no pre-selection was made, all meshes and all surface points selected by default.
7. If nominal points were selected in a tree, the number will be listed and can be adjusted
using the [Refesh] button.
8. If the comparison is to be made using Anchor points, click in the field next to a nominal
point and select the required anchor point from those presented in the drop-down list.
9. To choose nominal points in a file, check the button next to "From file" and browse for the
file.
10.Check any additional options required as described above.
11.Click on the Compare button.
The surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the specified direction.
12.The Directional Compare Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the
comparison results.
If the "Create measured surface points"option was selected, the corresponding points will
appear in the tree.


This tool requires at least one nominal model and one feature point to be visible to create
surface points.
[ Reselect Points / Point clouds]

The Reselect Points button enables you to re-select the feature points from those available
in the tree. By default, all feature points are selected.
This enables you to re-select a nominal model. By default, all nominal models are selected.
Warning tolerance
This value specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal model. If the
feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, warning message will appear, but
the surface point(s) will, however, be created.
To tree
When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.
To file
point(s) can be used for Directional Compare.
[ Create ]
Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s). The surface point(s) get added
under the nominal features tree as shown below.
[ Delete ]
irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after creating the surface point(s)
(i.e. after clicking on the Create button).
[ Close ]
3. Select the feature point(s) and the nominal model to create surface point(s).
4. Click on the buttons Reselect Points and Reselect Nominal.
6. Check the to tree and to file check boxes if want to add the surface point(s) in the nominal
features tree and save the surface point(s) to the file specified respectively.
7. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked then surface
point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
6.5.1.4 Surface Point from Flyout
Creates Surface points from flyouts

The Create Surface points from flyouts tool creates the surface points from selected flyouts. At
least one flyout must be available.
The Create Surface points from flyouts dialog box
[ Reselect Flyouts ]
The Reselect Flyouts button selects the Flyouts that are selected in scene to create surface
points. If no flyout is selected, then all the flyouts will be selected on pressing the Reselect
Flyouts button.
to tree
When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.
to file
When checked, the surface points are saved into the file specified. These points can be
used in the Directional Compare tool.
[ Create ]
This button creates the surface points.

[ Delete ]
Click on the Delete button to delete all the surface points that appear in the nominal
features tree irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after points have been
created.
[ Close]
This button closes the Create Surface points dialog box.
1. Import a nominal model and a measured model.

2. From the Compare task select Global Compare (see page 327) and create a "Global
compare"object. It will appear in the Inspect Tree.
3. In the Report task, click on Compare Flyouts (see page 365) in the Flyouts toolbar.
4. Create the required flyouts. They will appear in the Inspect tree.
5. Select the flyouts for which you want surface points from the tree.
6. In the Compare task click on Surface Point from Flyout.
7. If you wish to change the selected flyouts, choose the required ones from the tree and
[Reselect Flyouts].
8. Choose where you wish to save the surface points; in the tree and/or in a file.
9. Click [Create] to create surface point(s).
6.5.1.5 Compare Edges
Compares the position of a measured edge with the position of a nominal edge and as
provides an evaluation of the accuracy of the actual edge
This tool compares the edges of a point cloud/mesh with the those on a solid model. The edge
accuracy is expressed as 2 deviations:
• A deviation perpendicular to the surface (_Normal).A deviation perpendicular to the
(=_Normal)" and "A deviation perpendicular to the edge (=_Tangent).
• A deviation perpendicular to the edge (_Tangent).
Figure 28: Normal and tangential deviations
Two methods of comparing edges are provided:

• A comparison along a specific user-defined line.
When using this method, the mesh must end where the surface of the part ends.
• A comparison along the boundaries of the models. You can choose whether to compare
internal boundaries, external boundaries or both.
Note: when using this method, the nominal surface must be from a CAD file that
has NO thickness.
This tool requires that you have a nominal and a measured model (point cloud or mesh)
available. When selected the Compare Edges panel appears.
Name
The name of the comparison.
[ Reselect Measured ]
This enables you to re-select the measured model to be used in the comparison.
This enables you to re-select the nominal model to be used in the comparison.
The Extent tab

Along specified boundary
When this button is checked, the edges along a user-defined line will be compared.
[ Draw Line ]
Click on this button to start defining the line along which the edges are to be compared.
When the cursor changes to look like a pencil, click with the LMB to define a section of
the line. Click the MMB to finish the definition. See To compare edges along a specified
boundary (see page 339).
Along whole boundary
When this option is checked, edges will be compared along the boundaries of the nominal
and measured models. The boundaries are automatically detected by the software based on
the CAD file,
You can select which of the boundaries will be compared from the drop-down menu. The
options are:
• Outer boundaries only.
• Inner boundaries only.
• Outer and inner boundaries.
These are illustrated below.

See To compare edges along whole boundary (see page 339).

Deviation type
This option is only available when calculating edge deviation along a whole boundary.
This enables you to select which deviations you wish to calculate.
Figure 29: Normal and tangential deviations
Sample Distance
This specifies the distance between the points that will be used to make the comparison and
for which data will be available. The default distance is 0.5mm.
Check the box to enter a different value.
Note: When this option is checked OFF, the default value is used.
Search distance
This specifies the distance between the corresponding points on the measured and the
nominal models that will be used for the calculation. If the distance between two points is
greater than this distance, no comparison will be made and the point will be displayed with
an X.
Figure 30: Search distance
The default value for the search distance is 0.1mm. Check the box ON to enter a new
value.
When the box is checked OFF, the default value is used.
The Caliper tab
An edge on the measured data is the corner where the surface of the model meets the trimmed
surface. The actual point to be used in calculation is determined by the position where a
caliper of a certain dimension touches the trimmed edge. This is shown in the figure below.
This point is then compared with the corresponding edge point on the normal data.
Note: when using this method, the nominal surface must be from a CAD file that has
NO thickness as illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 31: Caliper dimension
A default value for the distance "a" shown above is provided, but you can enter a different
value if required.
Note: this option is only available if you are using the "Along whole boundary"
method.
[ Inspect ]
The Inspect button starts the comparison of the selected edge points using the selected
method.
The comparisons are added under the Comparisons node in the Inspection tree. The Edge
Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the comparison results.
[ Close ]
Closes the Edge Inspection tool.

To compare edges along a specified boundary
1. Click on the Compare edges tool.

2. Enter a name for the comparison object.
3. By default all nominal models and measured models (pointsclouds and meshes), are
selected. To modify the selection, select the required item in the tree and then click
[Reselect Measured] or [Reselect Nominal].
4. Check the button next to "Along specified boundary".
5. Click on [Draw Line].
6. In the scene, click with the LMB to define the start of the edge to be compared. Continue
clicking with the LMB to define the line and click with the MMB when the edge is
complete.
Try to draw the line as close as possible to the edge of the data, otherwise points on the
edges can not be determined.
7. Enter a value for the Sample distance if required. The default value is 0.1mm. Entering a
larger value will reduce the number of points included in the comparison. Check the box
first then enter the required value.
8. Enter a new value for the Search distance if necessary.
9. Either click again with the MMB or click [Inspect] to start the comparison.
At the end of the comparison process, two new entries will appear in the Comparisons section
of the Inspect tree. These are called {name}_Normal and {name}_Tangent.
To compare edges along whole boundary
Note: when using this method, the nominal surface must be from a CAD file that has
NO thickness. See Figure 31: Caliper dimension (see page 338).
1. Click on the Compare edges tool.

2. Enter a name for the comparison object.
3. By default all nominal models and measured models (pointsclouds and meshes), are
selected. To modify the selection, select the required item in the tree and then click
[Reselect Measured] or [Reselect Nominal].
4. Check the button next to "Along whole boundary".
5. Click on the Caliper tab and check that the default value is suitable.
6. Check which boundaries you want to compare from the "Deviation type" drop down menu:
inner boundaries, outer boundary or both.
7. Check which deviations you want to calculate: tangential, normal or both.
8. Enter a value for the Sample distance if required. The default value is 0.1mm. Entering a
larger value will reduce the number of points included in the comparison. Check the box
first then enter the required value.
9. Enter a new value for the Search distance if necessary.
10.Either click with the MMB or click [Inspect] to start the comparison.
At the end of the comparison process, pairs of entries will appear in the Comparisons section
of the Inspect tree. One pair will be entered for each individual boundary (inner and outer)
found. These are called {name}_Normal and {name}_Tangent.
Points along the entire boundary where no comparison could be made are marked with a cross
as shown in the screenshot below. You can adapt the parameters (Search distance and Caliper
dimension) to obtain comparison data for these points.
6.5.1.6 Curvature
Creates a colored compare object expressed as the local radius of a point cloud (s) or
mesh(es)
In order to use this tool you nee to pre-select a pointcloud or mesh.
The Curvature property sheet

Keep Measured
Check this option to keep a copy of the measured model. Otherwise the measured object
will be removed from the Measured section of the tree.
Smallest Detail
This determines the highest curvature to be taken into account.
If a value of 0 is used, the smallest detail will be determined automatically.
You can set this parameter to be larger than the noisy areas in the model so as to discard
noise from the point cloud.
To compute the curvature radius
1. Select a measured point cloud/mesh from the tree or the scene.

2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the Curvature property sheet if required.
3. Set the options required.
The Curvature Radius Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the Curvature radius
results.
Note: If the Keep Measured option is checked OFF, the Curvature radius command is
disabled after the comparison.
6.5.1.7 Wall thickness
Computes the distance to the wall thickness of solds and meshes

This tool computes, the distance from one side to the opposite one for every point. The result
is reported as the standard wall thickness deviations. This tool can only used on solids or
meshes.
The Wall Thickness dialog box
Upper tolerance
This pre-sets the upper bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information
dialog. This value can also be used to calculate the deviations between the upper tolerance
and lower tolerance.
Lower tolerance
This pre-sets the lower bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information
dialog. This value can also be used to calculate the deviations with in the upper tolerance
and lower tolerance.
Nominal
This specifies the nominal distance to the opposite wall that needs to be considered for
computing the Wall Thickness.
Angle tolerance
For computing the Wall Thickness, a normal to the surface at every point is taken and
a line drawn in the opposite direction to hit the opposite surface. If difference in angle
between the line and the normal to the opposite surface is below the Angle tolerance, the
Wall Thickness is well defined.
Smooth direction
When the mesh data is noisy, then the normal directions are even more noisy and the
resulting computation inaccurate. To avoid this, you can check this box to "smooth" the
normals data.
Planar
This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the
maximum distance between the nearby vertices.
Angular
This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the
maximum angle (degrees) between normals in the nearby vertices.
Output separate faces (lower memory)
When this option is checked, then the Wall Thickness information will be created for each
face of the solid and added under the comparisons node in the Inspection tree.

[ Run ]
Starts the computation of Wall Thickness within the specified upper and lower tolerance.
The Wall Thickness information is added under Comparisons node in the Inspection tree.
The Wall Thickness Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the Wall Thickness
results.
[ Close ]
Closes the Wall Thickness tool.
To make a wall thickness comparison
1. Select the mesh or the solid, in the tree or the scene.

2. Click on the Wall Thickness tool and specify the required parameters.
3. Click [Run] button.
The Wall Thickness is computed for the selected model. The results appear in the
Comparisons section of the Inspect tree.
The Wall Thickness Information dialog (see page 501) opens to displays the results.
6.5.1.8 Evaluate GD&T
Evaluates defined GD&T tolerances for features

This tool evaluates features according to specific GD&T tolerances that were set. The
tolerances must have been set using the Create GD&T (see page 118) tool in the GD&T
Dimension ribbon group of the Nominal task. The result of the evaluation is shown in a flyout.
The flyout shows the nominal tolerances that were defined along with a graphic that indicates
the type of tolerance. The results of the evaluation are shown below the tolerance with colored
backgrounds; green indicates that the result lies within the tolerance and red that it is outside
of it.
The Evaluate GD&T property sheet
All GD&T Flyouts

When this check box is ON the evaluation will be performed on all features for which
GD&T tolerances have been defined. If this check box is OFF, then features for which the
evaluation is required must be pre-selected in the Inspection tree
Re-evaluate
When this check box is ON, then tolerances for all features selected for evaluation will
be computed even if they have previously been evaluated. This is the default setting.
Checking this button OFF may be interesting if you have a large number of tolerances to
evaluate and you know (for example) that only position and not shape tolerances need to be
re-evaluated.
Create Sections for Line Profile Evaluations
Sections for Line Profile Evaluations will be created.
Create Global Compares for Surface Profile Evaluations
Global Compares for Surface Profile Evaluations will be created.
To perform an evaluation of GD&T tolerances
1. If you wish to evaluate specific features, select them in the tree, then click on the Evaluate
GDT tool.
2. If you wish to evaluate ALL the features for which GD&T tolerances have been defined,
click on the arrow to open the property sheet first and then check the button All GD&T
Flyouts.
3. It is recommended to re-evaluate previously evaluated tolerances, unless there are a large
number that have not been modified.
4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet to start the evaluation process.
The properties of the GD&T flyout can be set by double clicking on the evaluation flyout or
by selecting the Flyout Properties tool.
Evaluating the results of a Surface Profile per Unit Area tolerance
Specific conditions can be applied to an evaluation of a surface profile, that enable you to
evaluate an overall tolerance on the surface as well as a tolerance per unit area. For details on
specifying these tolerances see Parameters for a Surface Profile (see page 122).
Surface profiles can be defined in up to three "segments". The definition of these three
segments is shown below.

The resulting flyout is shown below.
If the option Create Global Compares for Surface Profile Evaluations is selected, then up to
three objects will appear in the Inspection tree.
The number of the segment corresponds to the number of the row in which the tolerance was
defined.
Illustration of the evaluation of a Surface Profile per Unit Area evaluation
The figure below illustrates the use of the evaluation of a Surface Profile per Unit Area
evaluation.
The part shown above contains a depression in the surface.

The top left images shows the result of a "Global Compare" (distance between part and CAD
model). The entire depression is highlighted
The top right image shows the result of a Surface Profile per Unit Area evaluation. It acts as an
edge detector, highlighting the edges of the depression (top right) and not the flat middle part.
The bottom left image shows the result of increasing the area used in the evaluation.
When the area used in the evaluation is increased to the width of the depression, the entire
depression is highlighted as shown in the bottom right image.
6.5.1.9 Compare Features
Compares pairs of features of the same type

The Compare Features tool compares pairs of features of the same type. It generates a flyout
that displays all the information relating to the comparison of features.
Comparison of specific features can be made by pre-selecting the pairs of features in the
Nominal and Measured sections of the Inspection tree. If no features are pre-selected, all
current pairs of features will be compares.
To compare feature pairs
This tool requires that pairs of features in the corresponding nominal and measured models are
available.
1. To compare specific features, select the required the measured and corresponding nominal
features. If no features are selected, all existing feature pairs will be compared.
2. Click on the Compare Features tool.
The features will be compared and for each feature pair a flyout will be created.
An example of such a flyout is shown below.
3. The contents of the flyout can be edited by double clicking on the flyout. This will schedule
the Flyout Properties dialog in which the parameters to be displayed can be edited.

6.5.1.11 Flyout Properties

Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the
Flyouts ribbon group.
• The Compare Flyouts (see page 365) tool
• The Feature Flyouts (see page 377) tool
• The Create Rail Flyout (see page 381) tool
All Flyouts are listed under the "Flyouts" node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,
This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains
The Flyout Create tab (see page 365).
The Flyout Properties tab (see page 367).
The Flyout Colors tab (see page 375).
The Sign Indication tab (see page 376)
All of these are described for the Compare Flyouts tool.
6.5.2 Sections
from rails.
Compare Section (see page 355)
6.5.2.1 Create Section
Creates Sections on point clouds, meshes and solids

The Create Section tool creates one or more sections on data by user defined axis planes. It
schedules the Create Section dialog box.
This contains the following tabs
• The Intersect tab
• The Settings tab
• The Project tab
The Intersect tab
Objects
This field reports the total number of measured models that are available in the scene.
Section name
This field enables you to specify a name for the section(s) that are to be created. A default
name is created based on the type of section.
The name you specify here will be used as a prefix for the section name. This will take the
form {name}_Nom() and {name}_Meas(), where () contains a sequential number for the
series of sections to be created.
X,Y,Z
These options allow you to create sections parallel to the X, Y and Z directions. (see page
350)
3 points
This option allows you to create a section that passes through 3 points (see page 351).
Plane
This option allows you to create a section that passes based on a selected plane object (see
page 351).
Wire
This option allows you to create a section based on a wire (see page 352).

Solid edge
This option allows you to create a section that is perpendicular to a solid edge or feature
line (see page 352).
Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge

This option allows you to create a section that passes through a defined point and is
parallel to a solid edge (see page 353). This option requires that feature points have
been defined. The plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest solid
edge.
Concentric circles
This enables you to create a set of concentric circular sections (see page 354).
File
This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file (see page 354).
Section from section
This option allows you to create a new section from an existing section (see page 354).
Single Section
When this option is selected, a single section will be displayed. This is the primary section
that has been defined using the chosen method.
Parallel Sections
When this option is selected, all possible sections as defined will be displayed. The
primary section is shown with a gray fill.
Rail
This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A rail is a group
of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when used with
the Flush Caliper tool.
Note: Sections that are to be used for Airfoil Inspection must be added to a rail.
Separate
When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be
added to a rail (see page 362) at a later stage.
To Rail
When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.
A default rail is provided, but you can define others in the input field. Sections can be
removed from a rail (see page 363)if required.
[Lasso]
When you click on this button you can use the lasso operation to define the region where
the sections will be created.
Note: This option only works on point clouds.
1. Click on [Lasso].
2. In the scene click with the LMB to define the required region.
3. Click with the MMB to complete the definition.
4. Click [Done].
The region will be shown in red and define where sections will be created.
[Done]
Defines the region and activates the [Create section] button.
The Settings tab
The Settings tab defines how the points for the section are generated.
Point distribution
Measured
Measured points that lie on the section plane will be used.
Uniform
This option will generate section points at a regular interval on the section plane. The
distance between the points can be specified in the input field.
Chordal Deviation
This option will generate section points in such a way that the generated section does not
deviate by more than the specified distance from the actual section.
[Create Section]
The Create Section button starts the creation of sections on the selected data.
[Close]
Closes the Create Section tool.
To create sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axis
1.
Click the X, Y or Z buttons .
By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.
The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.
2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by entering
the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.
3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .
4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.
5. Enter either the number of sections between then in the Times field, or the distance between
each step in the Steps field.
6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of the
solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part.
7. A name for the section is set by default. You can enter a new name in the Section name
field.
8. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing rail.

To create sections using 3 points
1.
Click the 3 points button .
2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section button
to create parallel sections.
4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in the
Step field.
field.
To create sections using a plane
This option enables you to create a section based on a plane. The section can be parallel to the
selected plane or rotated through an angle relative to the plane.
1.
Click the Plane button .
2. Select the reference plane to be used to create the sections.

This can be done by clicking a planar object on the model, or by selecting a plane feature
from the drop-down list.
3. To create sections that are parallel to the plane click Parallel.
4. To create sections that are rotated relative to the plane, click Rotated.
a. Select the angle of rotation.
b. Select the axis about which the rotation is to be applied. This can be a coordinate axis or
a line feature.
c. Select the center of rotation. This can be the origin of the coordinate system, or a point
feature.
d. Specify an offset along the axis at which point the sections will be created.
5. By default, the complete plane is used to define the section. Click on the Bounded option to
define the dimensions of the plane. The dimensions specified are measured from the center
of the plane.
6. Click the Single Section button to create a single section. The primary section can be
moved by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
7. Click the Parallel Section button to create multiple sections. Specify the distance
between them in the Step field.
8. Choose whether to add the sections to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an
existing rail.
field.
10.Click [Create Section].
To create a section using a wire
1.
Click the sections from wire button .
The cursor shape will change.
2. Draw a wire curve by clicking with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.
3. To create a series of parallel sections define a step interval between them.
4. To define a radial set of sections, define the Angle between them.
field.
To create sections perpendicular to an edge or feature
1.
Click the edge button .
2. To create a single section click on .

3. Click on an edge on the model.
A plane section perpendicular to this edge will be located at the centre of the edge. The
coordinates of this point are displayed in the X, Y, Z fields. The position of this section is
indicated by the blue box.
4. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.

5. You can modify the position of this section by a number of methods.

• Check the Manual Location button and click on another position on the edge with the
LMB. The X,Y,Z coordinates are updated.
• Click on the X, Y or Z check buttons and enter the required value in the input field.
• In the Move panel enter a value in the Step field. Click on the left or right arrows. The
section will be moved along the edge by the specified amount.
6. To create multiple sections, click on and enter the required step between sections.
Sections will be created, starting at the blue box point, separated by this step distance to the
extent of selected edge or line
existing rail.
field.
To create a section parallel to an edge that passes through a point
This procedure requires that feature points have been created on the model.
1.
Click the button .
2. To select single points click on [Pick point(s)]. Click on a feature point. A section will be
created perpendicular to the edge that passes through the point. Click on other points to
create other sections. To remove a point from the selection click on the point while holding
the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys.
3. To select all the feature points click on [All points].
Sections will be created on all the points. The primary section will appear on the nearest
edge to the point.
4. To create parallel sections, click on and entered the required step between sections in
the Step field.
5. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.
field.
To create a set of concentric circular sections
1.
Click on the concentric circles button .
field.
3. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on the model or by entering the X, Y
and Z coordinates.
4. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.
5. To create a single section click on [Create section].
6.
To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .
7. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.
8. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.
10.Click [Create Section].
To create sections from a file
This procedure enables you to import sections that have previously been saved in a file. This is
most useful for comparing sections.
Sections can be exported using the Export section tools in the Export ribbon group in the
Report task (see page 410).
1.
Click the sections from file button .
2. Click on [Sections from file...] button and browse to the required file.
The sections will be displayed on the model.
To create a section from a section
This option enables you to create a section on one model from existing sections on another.
It means that you can create sections on a measured model without having to have the CAD
(nominal) model present.
1. Click on the sections from sections tool .
2. To create a measured section from a nominal section click on Section. Then select the
required section from the drop-down list.
3. To create measured sections from nominal sections in a rail click on Rail, then select the
required rail from the drop-down list.
4. If you wish to create a new section on the nominal model, click Resection nominal. This
option is only available if the nominal (CAD) model is available.

5. Click [Create section].

6.5.2.2 Compare Section
Compares sections on Point clouds / Meshes and compares them to (selected) Nominal
objects
This tool is only available when nominal and measured model(s) are available. It schedules the
Create and Compare Section dialog box.
This dialog allows you to compare sections through the nominal and the measured models and
creates a comparison object..
This dialog contains two tabs.
The Intersect tab
This tab is used to define the required sections.
Measured
This field displays the total number of measured models available in the scene.
Nominal
This field displays the total number of nominal models available in the scene.
X,Y,Z
These options allow you to create and compare sections parallel to the X, Y and Z
directions. (see page 358)
3 points
This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through 3 points (see
page 358).
Plane
This option allows you to create and compare a section based on a selected plane object
(see page 359).
Wire
This option allows you to create and compare a section based on a wire (see page 359).
Solid edge
This option allows you to create and compare a section that is perpendicular to a solid
edge (see page 360).
Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge

This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through a defined point
and is parallel to a solid edge (see page 361). This option requires that feature points
have been defined. The plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest
solid edge.
Concentric circles
This enables you to create and compare concentric circular sections (see page 361).
File
This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file (see page 362).
Section from section
This option allows you to create a new section from an existing section (see page 362).
Single Section
Selecting the Single Section button will display only one section preview in both the 2D
and 3D preview windows. This is the primary section, highlighted with a blue border and
a shaded gray fill that is different in color from any other previewed section. The primary
section preview is always displayed regardless of its position and regardless of whether or
not it intersects the model.
Parallel Sections
Selecting the Parallel section button will display the primary section preview in the
highlighted color and all feasible section previews in an alternate red-border color without
fill. Only the primary section preview is modifiable. Only the child section previews that
actually intersect the model (thus, can actually create a section result) will be shown.
Two sided nominal
The topology of the sections are 'detected' and aligned, than the comparison is made. Note:
this only works well when the curves have similar topology (shape).
Shape recognition
The measured section is to fitted to the Nominal section using a 2D Best Fit. For each
measured point the closest nominal point is taken. The measured section is re-positioned
in the original location and the measured points are compared to the nominal points found
after align 2D Best fit.

Rail
This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A rail is a group
of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when used with
the Flush Caliper tool.
Note: Sections that are to be used for Airfoil Inspection must be added to a rail.
Separate
When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be
added to a rail (see page 362) at a later stage.
To Rail
When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.
A default rail is provided, but you can define others in the input field. Sections can be
removed from a rail (see page 363)if required.
[Lasso]
When you click on this button you can use the lasso operation to define the region where
the sections will be created.
Note: This option only works on point clouds.
1. Click on [Lasso].
2. In the scene click with the LMB to define the required region.
3. Click with the MMB to complete the definition.
4. Click [Done].
The region will be shown in red and define where sections will be created.
[Done]
Defines the region and activates the [Compare] button.
The Settings tab
The Settings tab defines how the points for the section are generated.
Point distribution
Measured
Measured points that lie on the section plane will be used.
Uniform
This option will generate section points at a regular interval on the section plane. The
distance between the points can be specified in the input field.
Chordal Deviation
This option will generate section points in such a way that the generated section does not
deviate by more than the specified distance from the actual section.
[Compare]
This button creates the sections and generates the comparison information between them.
The results are places in the Comparisons node in the Inspect tree.
The Information dialog (see page 501) box displays the comparison results relating to
all the created compares sections.
To see the information for just one compare section, select it in the tree and click on the
Compare Info tool the Compare toolbar.
[Close]
Closes the Create Section tool.
To create and compare sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axis
1.
Click the X, Y or Z buttons .
By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.
The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.
2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by entering
the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.
3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .
4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.
5. Enter either the number of sections between then in the Times field, or the distance between
each step in the Steps field.
6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of the
solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part.
field.
9. Click [Compare].
To create and compare sections using 3 points
1.
Click the 3 points button .
2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section button
to create parallel sections.
4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in the
Step field.
field.
8. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.

To create and compare sections using a plane
1.
Click the Plane button .
2. Select the reference plane to be used to create the sections.

This can be done by clicking a planar object on the model, or by selecting a plane feature
from the drop-down list.
3. To create sections that are parallel to the plane click Parallel.
4. To create sections that are rotated relative to the plane, click Rotated.
a. Select the angle of rotation.
b. Select the axis about which the rotation is to be applied. This can be a coordinate axis or
a line feature.
c. Select the center of rotation. This can be the origin of the coordinate system, or a point
feature.
d. Specify an offset along the axis at which point the sections will be created.
5. By default, the complete plane is used to define the section. Click on the Bounded option to
define the dimensions of the plane. The dimensions specified are measured from the center
of the plane.
6. Click the Single Section button to create a single section. The primary section can be
moved by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
7. Click the Parallel Section button to create multiple sections. Specify the distance
between them in the Step field.
existing rail.
field.
10.Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
To create a section using a wire
1.
Click the sections from wire button .
The cursor shape will change.
2. Draw a wire curve by clicking with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.
3. To create a series of parallel sections define a step interval between them.
4. To define a radial set of sections, define the Angle between them.

field.
7. Click [Compare].
To create and compare sections perpendicular to a solid edge
1.
Click the edge button .
2. To create a single section click on .

3. Click on an edge on the model.
A plane section perpendicular to this edge will be located at the centre of the edge. The
coordinates of this point are displayed in the X, Y, Z fields. The position of this section is
indicated by the blue box.
4. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.
5. You can modify the position of this section by a number of methods.

• Check the Manual Location button and click on another position on the edge with the
LMB. The X,Y,Z coordinates are updated.
• Click on the X, Y or Z check buttons and enter the required value in the input field.
• In the Move panel enter a value in the Step field. Click on the left or right arrows. The
section will be moved along the edge by the specified amount.

6. To create multiple sections, click on and enter the required step between sections.
Sections will be created, starting at the blue box point, separated by this step distance to the
extent of selected edge or line
existing rail.
field.
9. Click [Compare].
To create and compare a section parallel to an edge that passes through a point
This procedure requires that feature points have been created on the model.
1.
Click the button .
2. To select single points click on [Pick point(s)]. Click on a feature point. A section will be
created perpendicular to the edge that passes through the point. Click on other points to
create other sections. To remove a point from the selection click on the point while holding
the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys.
3. To select all the feature points click on [All points].
Sections will be created on all the points. The primary section will appear on the nearest
edge to the point.
4. To create parallel sections, click on and entered the required step between sections in
the Step field.
5. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.
field.
8. Click [Compare].
To create and compare concentric circular sections
1.
Click on the concentric circles button .
field.
3. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on the model or by entering the X, Y
and Z coordinates.
4. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.
5. To create a single section click on [Create section].
6.
To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .
7. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.
8. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.
10.Click [Compare].
To review sections from file
This procedure enables you to import sections that have previously been saved in a file.
Sections can be exported using the Export section tools in the Export ribbon group in the
Report task (see page 410).
1.
Click the sections from file button .
2. Click on [Sections from file...] button and browse to the required file.
The sections will be displayed on the model.
To create and compare a section from a section
This option enables you to create a section on one model from existing sections on another.
It means that you can create sections on a measured model without having to have the CAD
(nominal) model present.
1. Click on the sections from sections tool .
2. To create a measured section from a nominal section click on Section, then select the
required section from the drop-down list.
3. To create measured sections from nominal sections in a rail click on Rail, then select the
required rail from the drop-down list.
4. If you wish to create a new section on the nominal model, click Resection nominal. This
option is only available if the nominal (CAD) model is available.
5. Click [Compare].
6.5.2.3 Add to Rail
Adds selected sections to a specified rail

This operation is sensitive when a section has been selected in the Inspection tree. .
The Add to Rail property sheet
Rail
This list allows you to select the rail to which the sections will be added. You can select an
existing rail or create a new rail by typing in the name. The default rail is always available.
To move sections from the separate region to a rail.
1. Select the section(s) to be added to a rail

2. Click on the arrow to see the property sheet in which you can specify the destination rail.
3. Click on the icon to add the sections to the selected rail.

6.5.2.4 Remove from Rail
Removes sections selected from a rail

This tool is sensitive when a section in a rail is selected in the tree. It moves it from the rail to
the ‘Sections’ area of the tree.
To remove a section from a rail
1. Select a section in a rail.

The section will be removed to the "‘Sections" area of the tree.
movement.
a green icon.

6.6 Report Task (solid)

The Report task is used to generate reports of the comparisons made using the Compare task
tools. Key Report tools are only available after a comparison process with Global or Section
compare.
Tools provided for reporting include:

• Creation and management of Flyouts to provide annotation.
• Creation and management of Reports.
• Determination of Dimensions.
• Export of various items including features, sections and deviations.
The Report task includes the following tool groups:
Flyouts (see page 364)
Reporting (see page 384)
Dimensions (see page 395)
Export (see page 410)
6.6.1 Flyouts

A Flyout is a label that displays information relating to a specific object. The tools in the
Flyouts Ribbon Group enable you to create, modify and manage a number of different types of
Flyouts and other annotation functions.
6.6.1.1 Compare Flyouts
Creates Flyouts for points with comparison information

A Flyout is a label that displays comparison information relating to a specific point. A Flyout
therefor can only be created if comparison information is available. Comparison information
is listed under the "Comparisons" node in the Inspect tree and is generated. Comparison
information can be generated using the tools in the Compare toolbar (see page 327) in the
Compare task.
The Flyout Properties dialog box
The Flyout properties dialog contains four tabs, that define all aspects of flyouts:
• The Flyout Create tab (see page 365)
• The Flyout Properties tab (see page 367)
• The Flyout Colors tab (see page 375)
• The Sign Indication tab (see page 376)
The Flyout Create tab
The Flyout Create tab defines which points will have flyouts attached to them.
Note: This tab only appears when a global compare object has been pre-selected.
All points outside this range

When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for those points whose values lie
outside the region defined by the defined range.
The ‘and one out of’ field is an additional filter that allows you to select only the
proportion of points defined in the input field. So for example if you enter a value of 10,
then only 1 point out of 10 of those points whose values lies within the range will be
selected for flyouts. This number of points is indicated in the field.
Worst
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that
have the maximum deviation in either a positive or negative sense.
Worst positive and negative points
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that
have the maximum deviation in both positive and negative direction of the nominal model.
One out of "N" points:
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the proportion of points defined. So
if a value of 10 is entered, 1 out of all 10 points will be randomly picked.
Manually selected points
When this option is selected, you can select points on the comparison object for which a
flyout will be created. This is the default selection mode for this tool, it is used without
opening the dialog.
All points
When this option is selected flyouts will be created for all points in the comparison object.
Flyout Numbering
This determines how the created flyouts will be numbered.
• Continuous: the flyouts are numbered serially. Deleting a flyout will not affect the order
of the new flyouts’ serial number when they are created.

• Compact: the flyouts are numbered serially, but if flyouts are deleted, their serial
numbers are reused by the new flyouts starting from the lowest available number.
• From points : the serial number is derived from the points order in the comparison
object.
The Flyout Properties tab
This tab allows you to define how the flyouts are presented.
Name
This field displays the name of a selected flyout. If it is empty it implies automatic naming.
If this option is checked you can use the input field to enter a name that will be added to
the top of the flyouts.
Compare flyouts
The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Compare Flyouts tool and
which concern flyouts that relate to comparison information.
Measured data
If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates
used are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Nominal data
If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates
used are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Deviation
When checked the deviation between the measured and nominal data will be displayed
in the flyout. The coordinate directions in which the deviations are displayed are
selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Coordinates
The coordinate values displayed can be selected from the drop down list.
Tolerance
When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the
upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.
3D deviation
When checked, the measured point’s 3D deviation from the nominal model will be
displayed in the flyout. The ‘+’ sign in the distance indicates that distance is measured
along the normal side of the nominal model and the ‘–‘ sign indicates the reverse side of
the nominal model.
If the Color bar option is checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.
If the Go/No Go option is checked then the term indicating whether the value has been
evaluated as being within tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set
in The Sign Indication tab (see page 376).
Number of points
When checked, the total number of compared points will be displayed in the flyout.
Range
When checked, the range of distances between the measured data and the nominal
model is displayed in the flyout.
Sigma
When checked, the statistical sigma of the measured data to the nominal model is
displayed in the flyout.
Mean
When checked, the mean distance between the measured data and the nominal model is
In tolerance
When checked, the percentage of the area of a mesh or number of points in a point
cloud that is inside tolerance is displayed in the flyout.
The figure below shows the flyout resulting from the a set of compare flyout properties.
Feature flyouts
The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Feature Flyouts (see page
377) tool and which concern flyouts that relate to features.
Measured
If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout.
Nominal
If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout.
Tolerance
When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the
upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.
Type
When checked the type of feature is displayed in the flyout.

Range
When checked, the range of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.
Sigma
When checked, the sigma of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.
Points
When checked, the number of points used in the feature statistics object will be
Angle
When checked the cone angle of a cone feature will be displayed.
Radius
When checked, the Radius of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout. (See the
additional options described below)
Diameter
When checked, the Diameter of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout. (See
the additional options described below.)
Length/width
When checked, the Length and Width of a length and width of a feature will be
displayed in the flyout. (This only applies to specific features) (See the additional
options described below.)
Total length
When checked, the total length of the feature will be displayed. (This only applies to
specific features) (See the additional options described below.)
Position
When checked, the position of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label
associated with the position will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Center" for a Circle
feature, "From" and "To" for a Line feature).
The coordinate values displayed can be selected from the drop down list. (See the
additional options described below.)
Orientation
When checked, the orientation of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label
associated with the orientation will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Normal" for a
Circle feature, "Direction" for a Line feature).
The format of the orientation can be selected from the drop down list.
Deviation
When checked, the associated deviation will be displayed in the flyout.
The figure below shows an example of a feature flyout with the corresponding
parameter settings.
Color bar
When checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.
Go/no go
When checked, the term indicating whether the value has been evaluated as being
within tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set in The Sign
Indication tab (see page 376).
Style
The options in this panel define how the information is presented in the flyout.
Flyout style
Flyouts can have following styles:
Normal
In the normal flyout style, the flyout can be dragged and repositioned. A leader line can
connect the flyouts to the measured point.
In Drawing
In the In Drawing flyout style, a flyout is created on the point of mouse click with
just an arrowhead pointing the measured point. The flyout cannot be dragged
or repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available as
information.
Dimension
In the Dimension flyout style, similar to In Drawing, the flyout is created on the point
of mouse click with two arrowheads, one pointing to the measured and the other to the
corresponding projected point on the nominal model. This is useful for sections, as it
allows you to display dimensions between from/to points. The flyout cannot be dragged
or repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available.

Decimals
This option sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for the values shown in the
flyout. Up to six decimal places can be set.
Text height
This option sets the size of the text. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, lower or
higher numbers can be set.
General
Show Units
When checked, the units associated with the displayed values will be shown in the
flyout.
Locked position
When checked, the flyout will remain in its position when the Arrange Flyouts (see
page 379) tool is used.
Fixed leaderline length
When checked, the length of the leaderline remains fixed. When the object is moved,
the flyouts will move by the same amount.
Leaderline
When checked, a leaderline connecting the flyout to the object will be displayed.
Arrow
When checked, an arrow will be displayed on the leaderline pointing from the flyout to
the connection point.
Tip Size
This sets the size of the arrow head.
Connection Point
When checked, the connection point is displayed as a colored box. The color can be
defined in the Flyout Colors tab.
Border
When checked, the flyout will be surrounded by a border.
Gridlines
When checked, the flyout will be displayed with gridlines.
Gridlines OFF Gridines ON
Show obscured flyouts

When checked ON, flyouts that are located on points that are behind the model will
be shown. When checked OFF, these flyouts will be hidden. This is illustrated by the
examples below.
The figure below shows two flyouts associated with two features that are both visible.
Figure 32: Flyouts on visible features
The figure below shows the effect of rotating the model so that the upper feature
(Meas_Line to Nom_Line) is obscured. The option Show obscured flyouts is OFF, so
the flyout is also obscured.
Figure 33: Show obscured flyouts ON
When the option Show obscured flyouts is ON, and the model is rotated, the flyout
remains visible even when the feature itself is obscured.

Figure 34: Show obscured flyouts OFF
Transparency
This sets the level of transparency associated with the flyout. When the value is
over 70%, the flyout is transparent. The figure below shows a flyout with the default
transparency level (15%).
Figure 35: Transparency level 15%
Figure 36: Transparency level 75%
Dimension
These options relate to the display of Dimension information.
ISO Dimension
When checked, the text height is defined in mm, and the dimension text is parallel to
Dimension line.
Prevent Inverted Text
This option is used to prevent text being reversed when the model is rotated in the
scene. The effect is illustrated in the figures below.
Show prefix
This option toggles the display of the pre-fix in the flyout, if a prefix exists.
Hide with object
This option refers to dimensions. When checked, the dimensions will be removed if the
object to which they are attached is hidden. If unchecked, the dimensions will remain on
screen when the object is hidden.
GD&T
These options are only available when a GD&T flyout has been pre-selected. A GD&T
flyout consists of two parts: the nominal tolerances that were defined, and the results of the
evaluation.
Show results
When this option is checked ON then the results of the evaluation (red or green) will be
displayed. If this option is checked OFF, then just the nominal tolerances are shown.
Hide nominal
When this option is checked ON then the nominal tolerances will be hidden and only
the results shown.
Show Results ON Show Results OFF Show Results ON

Hide Nominal OFF Hide Nominal ON

Use colors
When this option is checked, the results of a GD&T evaluation will be shown using a
colored back ground; green for within the tolerance, red for out of tolerance.
Hide deviation
When this option is checked ON then the deviation will be hidden.
Only when within tolerance
When this option is checked ON then the deviation will only be hidden if it within the
tolerance.
These options are illustrated below.
Hide deviations OFF Hide deviations ON Hide deviations ON Only

when within tolerance ON
The Flyout Colors tab
The Flyout Colors tab allows you to define the colors used in the flyout.
General
The parameters in this panel refer to general appearance of the flyout.
Title Background
Sets the background color for the title of the flyout.
Background
Sets the background color for the flyout.
Border
Sets the background color for the title border of the flyout.
Text
Sets the background color for the flyout text.
Title Background
Sets the background color for the title of the flyout.
Color from deviation for compare flyouts
When checked, the background color of the flyout will have the same color as the
deviation bar color.
Leader line
Sets the color of the leader line.
Connection point
Sets the color of the box defining the connection point.
Arrow tip
Sets the color of the arrow tip.
Dimensions
The parameters in this panel define which colors are used in the display of dimension
flyouts.
Fixed
When this button is checked the selected colors defined for the flyout background,
border and text will be applied to all types of dimension flyouts.
Variable
When these buttons are checked, different colors can be used for the background, the
border and the text of different dimensions; i.e. whether they are between Measured to
Measured, Measured to Nominal or Nominal to Nominal.
GD&T background and Feature Compare flyouts deviation bands
Out Tolerance positive
The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in a positive direction.
Above X% of tolerance
The color used when the deviation is above the defined % of tolerance.
In Tolerance
The color used when the deviation is in tolerance
Below X% of tolerance
The color used when the deviation is below the defined % of tolerance.
Out Tolerance negative
The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in a negative direction.
The Sign Indication tab
This tab can be used to enter a description for a deviation in flyout, such as front, back, left,
right depending on the position. Thus the string from the dialog replaces +/- sign in front of the
deviation.

Evaluation
These fields enable you to set the text that will be displayed when a value has been
evaluated as being in or out of tolerance. The default values are Go (In Tolerance) and No
Go (Out of Tolerance). This text will be displayed when the Go / no go option is set in the
Flyout Properties tab.
To create a flyout
1. Select the comparison object.

2. Click the Compare Flyouts tool.
3. Define which points will have a flyout created in the Flyout Create tab.
4. Set the parameters describing the display of the flyout in each of the remaining tabs
(These can all be edited at a later stage with the Feature Flyouts (see page 377) tool.)
5. If manual option is selected, click on the model to select the points.
Note: Without pre-selected model(s) or section(s) in the scene, this tool enables you to
create flyouts directly using the option "Manually Selected Points".
6.6.1.2 Feature Flyouts
Create flyouts detailing information about features

This tool displays a detailed information box about the feature(s) that have been defined on the
nominal and/or measured models. The figure below shows an example.
The Feature Flyouts property sheet
All Features
Check this feature ON to create feature flyouts are for all existing features without pre-
selection. If the features are not visible, the flyouts will be created and appear in the
Inspect area in the tree, but they will not be visible until the feature itself is made visible.
All Visible Features
When this button is checked ON, feature flyouts will only be created for those features that
are visible in the scene.
Note: If neither of these buttons is checked then you must select the features in the
Inspection tree.
To create feature flyouts for specific features
1. Select one or more nominal and/or measured features in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the Feature Flyouts tool.
3. The flyouts will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the scene.
They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.
To create feature flyouts for all features
1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the All features button ON.
4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the
scene.

The flyouts of ALL features will appear in the Inspect area of the tree. The flyouts will
appear in the scene when the feature is made visible.
To create flyouts for visible features
1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the All Visible Features button ON.
4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the
scene.
They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.
To delete a feature flyout
1.
Select the Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Click the feature flyout to delete.
3. Press the <Delete> key on keyboard.
OR
1. Select the flyout in the tree
2. Right click and select Delete.
6.6.1.3 Flyout Properties

Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the
Flyouts ribbon group.
• The Compare Flyouts (see page 365) tool
• The Feature Flyouts (see page 377) tool
• The Create Rail Flyout (see page 381) tool
All Flyouts are listed under the "Flyouts" node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,
This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains
The Flyout Create tab (see page 365).
The Flyout Properties tab (see page 367).
The Flyout Colors tab (see page 375).
The Sign Indication tab (see page 376)
All of these are described for the Compare Flyouts tool.
6.6.1.4 Arrange Flyouts
Automatically arranges flyouts and color bar in the current view
The Arrange Flyouts tool is used to automatically arrange all flyouts and color bars along the
sides of the screen.
6.6.1.5 Create Color Bar
Creates a deviation color bar

A color bar displays the color scale to represent the deviations between the selected Measured
and Nominal part.
Note: The Create Color Bar tool is only active when comparison data is available.
To create a color bar
1. Select the comparison data in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the Create Color bar tool.
A Color bar is placed in the center of the scene based on the color bar settings set in the
Color bar Properties (see page 380) tool.
3. You can click and drag to relocate it to the desired location.
The color bar is added to the Flyouts section of the Inspect tree. From here you can hide or
delete it.
Note: The Arrange Flyouts tool also arranges the color bar in the scene along with
other flyouts.
6.6.1.6 Color Bar Properties
Changes the deviation color bar properties

The Color bar Properties tool allows you to modify the properties of the deviation color bar. It
schedules the Color Bar Properties dialog.
The Color Bar Properties dialog box
Decimals
The Decimals option sets the number of decimal places for the numbers in the color bar
scale. Up to six decimal places can be set.

Text height
The Text height option sets the font size. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, other
lower or higher numbers can be set.
Number of levels
This option allows you to set the number of values that are indicated on the color scale.
The minimum and maximum values are always displayed. The number of equally spaced
values shown between these is set by this parameter.
Color bar height / width pixel size
The Color bar height/width pixel size options set the size of the bounding box of the color
bar in screen pixel units.
Bounding box
When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with a border surrounding it.
When this option is checked OFF, no border is displayed.
Fixed spacing
When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with equidistant spacing
between the color bar values and equally large color zones. When this option is checked
OFF the values display and the color zones are scaled according to these values.
Transparency
The higher the value entered here, the more transparent the background color of the color
bar.
6.6.1.7 Create Rail Flyout
Creates a flyout to show information about a rail
The information presented is:

• the average gap along the rail
• the maximum gap detected and the section on which this was found
• the minimum gap detected and the section on which this was found
• the gap/flush parallelism which is the range between the maximum and minimum
dimension of the gap or flush respectively
• number of sections contained in the rail.
To create a flyout for a rail
1. Select the rail for which the information is required.

2. Click on the Create Rail Flyout tool.
The flyout will appear on the rail
3. Drag the flyout to the required position.
6.6.1.8 Compare Rail Flyout
Creates a flyout to compare two rails
The information provided in the flyout is:

• the average difference between the rails
• the maximum difference between the rails
• the minimum difference between the rails
• the gap / flush center which is the maximum difference between the max gap / flush of one
section and the min gap / flush of the other section
To create a compare flyout for two rails
1. Select the pair of rails in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the 'Compare Rail Flyout' tool.
The flyout will appear.
3. Drag the flyout to the required position.
6.6.1.9 Annotation
Creates an annotation
The Annotation tool is used to add your own annotation to a measured point, nominal or
measured features.
To create annotation
1. Click the Annotation tool.

2. LMB click on the item to which you wish to add the annotation.
A field showing “Type your text here” with an arrow is created.

3. Drag the pointer to position the annotation and click to fix the position. The Annotation still
is in edit mode.
4. Edit the text with relevant information and press <Enter>.
5. If needed, another point can be clicked to add additional annotations.

The annotation will be listed under the "Flyouts" node in the Inspect section of the Inspection
Tree, and can be removed by deleting it from the tree.
The characteristics (colors) of the annotation flyout can be adjusted using the Flyout
Properties (see page 346) tool.
6.6.1.10 Scene Annotation
Enables you to add annotation to the display scene

This tool allows you to add textual annotation to a displayed scene. This annotation is un-
related to features.
To add your own annotation to a scene
1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.
2. Click in the scene where you want to add the annotation.

3. When the input field appears, click on the field.
4. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.
5. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.
To edit screen annotation
1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.

2. Click with MMB on the screen annotation text that you want to edit.
3. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.
4. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.

6.6.2 Reporting
The Reporting Ribbon Group contains a set of tools related to reporting.

6.6.2.1 Create Report
Creates a report using templates

The Create Report tool creates Excel reports of comparison results. Depending on the selected
template, the report can contain a title block, a global view, one or more section views, a table
and statistical information.
Reports appear in the Reports section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of operations
that can be performed on generated reports accessible from the pop up menu obtained by
clicking with the RMB.

The Select Report Style dialog box
Template no table
This creates a report with a title block and a global view.
Template with table
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and a table.
Statistic template
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and statistical information.
Section template
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and one section view per sheet.
Template no table A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block and a global view.
Template with table A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and a table.
Section template with view A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and three section views per
sheet.
Section template A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block and four section views per sheet.
TBI template 1 view
This creates TBI report with 1 section, TBI data and title block per sheet.
TBI template 2 view
This creates TBI report with 2 sections - respective TBI data and title block per sheet.
TBI template 3 views A3

This creates TBI report with 3 sections- respective TBI data and title block per sheet of A3
size.
TBI template with refA3
This creates TBI report with 3 sections and a TBI section selected as reference per sheet of
A3 size.
Template with Features
This creates a report on available features.
Template with Dimensions
This creates a report on available dimensions.
Template for Rails
This creates a report on available rails.
Template for GD&T
This creates a report which contains GD&T information. It schedules the Fill Report
Settings dialog on the GD&T Information tab described below.
Airfoil template 1 view
Creates a report containing data computed using the Airfoil Inspect tool. The report will
include the characteristics selected in the Airfoil Inspect tab. One sheet is generated for
each section included in the computations. Each sheet contains all the results for that
section.
Airfoil template 2
Creates a report containing data computed using the Airfoil Inspect tool. One sheet will be
created for characteristic selected in the Airfoil Inspect tab. Each sheet contains the results
for each section included in the computations.
Report name
This field specifies the name for the report.
[OK]
The OK button starts the creation of the report. The Fill Report Settings dialog box appears
to define the report settings.
[Cancel]
This button stops the creation of the report.
The Fill Report Settings dialog box
This dialog appears when the report template has been selected. It enables you to define the
information that is to be included in the report.
It contains three tabs. The Title tab always appears. The Table tab and the Airfoil tab only
appear when the template contains these items.
The Title tab

The Title tab allows you to set the content of the title block in the report.
Drawing title
The Drawing title parameter represents the name of the report that appears as the heading
in the Excel spreadsheet.
File name
The File name is derived from the mfi session file name. This field can not be edited.
Report name
The Report name is derived from the Report name field in the Select Report Style dialog
box.
Author name
The name of the person responsible for the report.
Client name
The Client name represents the part’s owner name.
Article No
The identification number of the part.
Reference
Any additional information related to the process.
Date meas
The date of measurement, to be entered by the user.
Date rep
The date of report. This date is derived from the pc-clock and can not be edited
Use a custom logo
Check this box to include a custom logo image.
Logo location
Defines the location of the logo that is currently being used. To choose a logo image file
click [Browse…] button and browse to select the required file.
The Table tab
The Table tab allows you to set the content of the table in the report.
Note: The Table tab only appears when a report template with table has been selected.
Column
Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.
The Pass / Fail column provides an indication whether a condition passed or failed.
The Airfoil Inspect tab
This tab allows you to setting the contents for an Airfoil Inspection report.
Note: This tab is only shown when a Airfoil Inspect view has been selected in the
Select Report Style dialog box.
Select the data to be included in the report. All of these characteristics are described in the
Airfoil Inspect tool. (see page 481).
The GD&T Information tab

This tab appears when the GD&T template has been selected.
Column
Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.
High Resolution Pictures
When this option is checked ON, the report will contain high resolution pictures. This
allows using you to use font size 4 in the application which means that the flyouts are too
small to read on screen but in the report they will be readable. This option is especially
useful to include a large amount of information on A3-size reports.
1:1 Pictures
When this option is checked, the screen shot in the report will be in scale 1 to 1, resulting
in printouts that allow distances to be measured with a ruler.
Show this dialog box during Automation playback
When this option is checked, this dialog will appear when automation is about to make a
report, allowing the user to edit the report table and general information.
[OK]
The OK button starts the creation of the report using the settings in this dialog box. Excel
will start, showing the report. The report and its contained objects will be added to the
Reports node in the Inspect tree.
Note: that a default Excel macro is run each time that a report is created. This
default macro can be adapted by users to run their own macro name
[Cancel]
This button stops the creation of the report.
To create a report
1. Click the Create Report tool.

2. The Select Report Style dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the report in the Report name text box.
4. Select the Template required.

5. Click [OK] .
The Fill Report Settings dialog box appears.
The number of tabs in this dialog will depend on the type of template selected.
6. Fill in the required information for the Title tab.
7. If the Table or the Airfoil Inspect tabs appear fill in the appropriate information.
8. Click [OK].
Excel will open showing the report. For all subsequent reports, the newly created report is
added as a new work sheet in the Excel report file. The report and its contained objects will
be added to the Reports node in the Inspect tree. Note that there are a number of options to
manage the reports in the Inspection tree using the RMB.
9. The report can be printed using the functions provided in Excel.
Note: There are a number of operations that can be performed on reports using the
RMB on the reports in the Inspection tree. This includes an option "Restore Report
State" which restores a report to its original state when modifications have been made.
6.6.2.2 Restore Report State
Restores the scene to correspond to the state in a report

This tool enables you to restore the scene to a state that corresponds to that of a selected
report. It is available when a report has been created. Reports appear in the Reports section
of the Inspection tree. There are a number of operations that can be performed on generated
reports accessible from the pop up menu obtained by clicking with the RMB.
The Select Report dialog box

List of reports
Select the report that you want to restore the scene to correspond with, from the current list
of reports available.
To restore the scene to correspond to a report
Reports must have created and be available in the Reports node of the Inspection tree.
1. Click on the Restore Report State tool.
2. Select the report that you wish to see the corresponding state.
3. Click [OK].
The scene will be restored to the state that corresponds to the selected report.
6.6.2.3 Update Report
Updates a report with new items in view and table

The Update Report View and Table tool updates an existing report using the status of the
current session. It can also be used to re-create lost Excel reports.
clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a report to its
original state when modifications have been made.
The Select Report dialog box
To update a report
Reports must have created and be available in the Reports node of the Inspection tree.
1. Select the reports to be updated or recreated.
2. Click [OK].
The report will be updated with the status of the current session, and will be presented in
Excel.
6.6.2.4 Edit or Recreate Report
Edits an existing report’s Title and Table settings, or recreates a lost report
clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a report to its
original state when modifications have been made.
To edit a report
1. Click on the Edit or recreate tool.

2. The Select report dialog appears in which you can select the report to be edited.
3. Click [OK] to select the report.
4. The Select Report Style dialog (see page 384) appears in which you can define all the
parameters relating to the report.

6.6.2.5 Object Information
Allows you to fill out the information required in a selected object information template.
See also : Defining object templates (see page 36)
The Object Information dialog
Template
By default this shows the currently selected template from those that have been defined.
[Other]
Clicking this button enables you to select another template. If password protection has
been set then you will need to enter the password in order to access a different template.
If the correct password is entered then a dialog appears in which defined templates can be
selected.
When the [OK] button is clicked a new template is selected, all existing fields are replaced
by those in the new template.
Object information
This contains a list of fields defined in the selected template. The value for each of the
fields can be filled in by the user.
[OK]
Saves the written information in the current mfi, ready to be used by Report Features tool
(now still called ‘Spec Inspection 8.3 - Reporting - Features in DMIS out.doc’)
[Close]
Closes the dialog.
See also : Defining object templates (see page 36)
To fill in template information
1. Select the required template if necessary by clicking on [Other].

2. Enter the password if necessary.
3. Select the template from the drop down list then click [OK].
4. Fill in the description for each of the fields.
5. Click [OK] when the information is complete.
6.6.2.6 Report Features
Generates a report output file with compared features defined in a template

This tool generates a dmo (DMIS Out) or a DFQ-QSTAT or a TXT file (depending on
the selected file format), with a header as defined in Object information template and the
descriptions as filled out using the Object Information (see page 393) tool. This tool
requires that you have feature comparison objects available.
Report Features property sheet
Export using dmi file

The dmi file contains a list of features to be reported. When this option is on, these features
will be reported, regardless of the user selection. When this option is off, only user selected
Export Object Information
When this option is checked the Object Information is exported in the header. When
unchecked, only the feature content is reported.
[Report features]
This writes a file containing the information. It schedules a "Save As" dialog, allowing you
specify a file name and format. The supported file formats are :
• DMIS Out
• DFQ-QSTAT file

• TXT Object Info File
To create a feature output file
1. Feature comparison objects need to have been created and be available in the Inspect
section of the data tree.
2. Select the required feature comparison objects in the Inspection tree.
3. Click on the Report Features tool and open the property sheet.
4. Select the required options
5. Click [Report Features].
6. In the "Report Features as" enter the name of the file.
7. Select the file format from the drop down list.
8. Click [Save].
6.6.3 Dimensions
The Dimensions Ribbon Group contains commands to add dimensions to the drawing.
6.6.3.1 Linear Perpendicular
Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and
defined direction
This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or between
a point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be determined
between any two points on the measured model or nominal features. When measuring
distances on a section, option are provided to choose values that lie on a search radius around
the points.
The Linear Perpendicular property sheet
Towards
When you click on this option a list appears from which you select how the distance from
the selected point is to be determined. The options provided are:
• Second click in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points
defined by mouse clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"Dim2pt".
• X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point
and the selected axis will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection
tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
• Origin in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the
coordinate system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree
labelled "Dim2pt".
• List of features in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point
and the perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear
in the Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
Extreme Distance
figure below.

Figure 37: Closest and Furthest distance linear perpendicular dimensions
To determine the true 3D distance between two points
This procedure can be used on a measured model.

2. Select the option Second Click from the Towards menu.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select the first point.
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second point.
6. Click again with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
To determine the closest/furthest distance between 2 points on a section

2. Select the required option from the Towards menu.
and the mouse wheel to adjust the value interactively.
mouse wheel.
10.Click with LMB to fix the measurement label.
Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement will relocate and stick to
their axes when the scene view is tumbled.
6.6.3.2 Aligned Parallel
Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature.

This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points can
be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the nominal
model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and includes the
model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.
When measuring distances on a section, options are provided to choose values that lie on a
search radius around the points.
The Aligned Parallel property sheet
Parallel To
The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension will
be measured. The following options are provided:
• Automatic XYZ
this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match
the screen axes.
• X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be
indicated on the flyout.
• List of defined features
in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the
selected feature.
Signed Distance
When this option is selected a sign will be assigned to the dimension.
In the example shown below, the signed distance would be positive, because moving from
point 1 to point 2 is along the direction of the positive X axis.

In the example shown below, the signed distance would be negative, because moving from
point 1 to point 2 is along the direction of the negative X axis.

Extreme Distance
figure below.
Figure 38: Closest and Furthest distance aligned perpendicular dimensions
To measure the aligned parallel distance between two points
1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.

2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the
Parallel To drop down list.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement label along the required axis.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The example below shows the distance along the X axis between two nominal feature
points.
To measure the closest/furthest distance along a section
1. Select the section in the tree.

2. Click on the down arrow to open the Aligned Parallel property sheet.

3. Select the direction in which the parallel dimension is to be measured.

and the mouse wheel to adjust the value interactively. .
mouse wheel.
In the example below the furthest distance between the two points has been selected.
In the example below the closest distance between the two points has been selected.

10.Click with the LMB to define the distance parallel.
6.6.3.3 Gap-Step Dimension
Creates a gap-step dimension by indicating 3 points

In any given process there will be an ideal separation (gap) and ideal relative depth (step) that
was specified at design time. The manufactured product however will deviate from this ideal
by a varying amount. The figure below gives a cross section through two flat panels, showing
the definition of gap and step.
The Gap-Step Dimension tool provides a manual way of measuring the relative position of two
panels in an assembled product. This tool works best on sections across the panels.
The Gap – Step Dimension property sheet
Use LSQ Fit

To measure the gap between two panels
1. Select a good view on the section or measurement (for example using the View Section (see
page 409) tool).
2. Indicate the line to represent one side of the gap. This is done by clicking with the LMB
on two positions along this line. The gap dimension is displayed as a bi-directional arrow
connecting the two yellow squares with the distance labeled.
3. Move the pointer to the other side of the gap and click the LMB on the location where the
gap needs to be measured to fix the gap dimension.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the distance labeled.
4. Optionally drag the mouse pointer to relocate the measurement labels and click to fix the
label.
The dimension appears on the data tree.
6.6.3.4 Gap Flush Caliper
Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable

manner along a rail
Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and
Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.
In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic ‘calipers’ to
check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is made on multiple
sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the statistics of these
Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers to determine Gap
and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.

It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.

Gap-Flush Dimension dialog
Dimension tab
Nominal
Measured
Manual
This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.
Least Square Fit
When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line
Caliper
This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers.
Use on Rail
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the
caliper.
Gap Caliper Definition tab
[Save]
[Load]
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the From File drop down list.
Distances
Angles
Flush Caliper Definition

[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the ‘current’
[Load]
Distances
Angles
Reverse dimension sign
When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the
detection of the dimension.
To create a gap / flush using a caliper
1. Use the Create Section (see page 347) tool to create sections and add them to a rail.
2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.
3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap
Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.
4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.
6. Click Calipers.
7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be placed.
8. Click [Dimension].
The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances
defined by the caliper.
When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the
Information dialog.
6.6.3.5 Radius
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs

This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the Nominal or
Measured task.
It will also measure the radius of a circle defined by a Least Squares Fit over a selected
number of points. These points must be selected using a lasso.
This tool measures the radius of a circle defined by three points, two on the cicumference and
one at the centre.
To determine the radius of a circular feature

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle
with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit

4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso. The area will be shown as selected.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the best fit circle that passes through the points.
A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the
circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
To measure the radius between three points


An circle will appear that passes through the two points with the current cursor position as
centre.
5. Adjust the centre point as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
6.6.3.6 Diameter
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs

The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created on the
Nominal or Measured models.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares Fit
is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be created
through the picked points.
To determine the diameter of a circular feature

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and
connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of
the diameter.
label to fix it.
To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit

4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the
circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.
label to fix it.
To measure the diameter between two points

A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
label to fix it.
6.6.3.7 Angle
Creates an angular dimension

This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the measured
object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if necessary. Use
this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points of the angle will
not necessarily be on the line.
The Angle property sheet
Use LSQ Fit

To create an Angular Dimension
1. Click on the Angular tool.

If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and
use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.
2. Pick a point on the measured object.
A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at the
selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the cursor
will immediately update the line preview.
3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.
4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the
angle between the two lines.
5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.
6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).
7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.

6.6.3.8 View Section
Shows and modifies the Section view for the Section report, allowing for fast
dimensioning
The 2D Section View command is used for dimensioning and reporting of a section created in
the Compare task . It schedules the View Section dialog box to set appropriate views.
The View Section dialog box
Rotate through angle

This button applies a rotation that is entered in the input field.
Note: Positive values rotate the view in 90 degrees clockwise and negative values
rotate the section view in counter clockwise.
Rotate through 90 degrees counterclockwise

Rotate the section view 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Rotate through 90 degree clockwise

Rotate the section view 90 degrees clockwise.
Flip vertically.
Flip the Section view vertically.
Flip horizontally.
Flip the Section view horizontally.
[X] [Y] [Z]
These buttons set the selected axis vertically in the scene.
Scale
Adapts the magnification of the section in the scene.
[Default Scale]
This restores the magnification scale to the default magnification so that it fits in the scene.
[Pick] / [Restore]
The [Pick] button provides the view of the selected section. The [Restore] button returns
the view to the complete models.
[Apply to All]
Assigns the current settings to all sections.
To view sections
1. Select a section in the Inspection tree if required.

2. Click on the View Section tool
3. Select a different section if required and click [Pick]
4. Set the parameters defining the View.
The view will be updated.
6.6.4 Export
This Ribbon Group contains a set of tools that enable you to export a variety of objects to file.
6.6.4.1 Features

Note: Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features (see page
413) tool in the Export ribbon group in the Report tab.
To export features


5. Click [Save].
6.6.4.2 Section Planes
Exports selected section planes to a file

The Section Planes tool exports selected compared sections to a text file (txt). The Save
Sections as dialog box will prompt for a file name.
The exported sections can later be used on similar parts for comparing sections (see page
355).
6.6.4.3 Section / Mesh Borders
Exports sections or mesh borders

This tool allows you to export sections or mesh borders in various formats.
The formats supported are:
• Igs Files (*.igs)
• Iges Files (*.iges)
The IGES sections should inherit the color of the sections and mesh borders in Inspection.
-For created sections, this is the color of the created section.
-For compare sections this is the color of the measured section of the compare section.
• Delimited ASCII files (*.asc)
the section/border is exported in the ascii format, listing the xyz coordinates of each point.
It schedules the "Export Sections / Mesh Borders as" dialog in which you can specify the
location and the name of the file containing the selected items.
6.6.4.4 Deviations
Export tabulated deviations to file

This tool allows you to export calculated deviations from a compare information object into a
text file for further treatment. All pre-selected compare objects can be exported.
It schedules the Select output file dialog box which will prompt for a file name. It then
schedules the Export Deviations dialog.
Export Deviations dialog box
Selected
These fields display the number of selected compare objects according to the item selected
from the Selection field, as well as the total number of available.
Selection
The following items can be used for selection.
Existing Flyouts
the points to which a flyout is connected.
All points
all point of the compare object.
Worst
the defined number of points with the worst deviation.
Worst x positive and negative points
the defined number of points with the worst deviation in both senses.
Points outside
a defined proportion of points whose value lies outside the range.
Information
The following parameters can set:
Statistics
This exports a header-type of information with all the numerical values as displayed in
the Compare Information dialog on the first page ‘Numbers’.
Point number
Each line with information of a point starts with the point number.
Measured point
The X, Y and Z coordinate of the measured point.
Nominal point
The X, Y and Z coordinate of the projected point.
XYZ deviations
The X, Y and Z deviation of the point.
3D deviation
The 3D deviation of the point.

Tolerances
The tolerances imported and used in Directional compare.
To export a deviation
1. Select a compare object in the data tree.

2. Click on the Export Deviation tool.
3. Select a file name and location where the exported data is to be located.
4. Click [Save].
5. In the Export Deviations dialog, select the data to be exported.
6. Select the information to be included.
7. Click [OK].
The file will be generated. The file name will be {the given name}-dev.txt.
6.6.4.5 Feature Compare Info
Exports Feature Compare Info to as user defined file

This tool enables you to export feature compare information object to a specific customer
defined file format. It schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location
and the file type.
To export feature compare info to a file
1. Select the features you wish to export. If no specific features are selected, then all features
will be exported.
3. In the "Export Feature Deviations as" dialog enter the name for the file and the file type.
4. Click [Save].
6.6.4.6 Failed Features
Exports failed feature information to a user defined file

This tool schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location and the file
type. Failed features are those that failed to be detected using the Auto Dimension (see page
274) tool in the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Measured task .
To export failed feature information

2. In the Export Failed Features dialog select the input file and specify the output file type.
3. Click [Export].
All Nominal features that did not produce a measured feature will be exported.
7 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (STL) Workflow
7 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (STL)

Workflow
The STL Based workflow uses meshes and pointclouds as primary nominal models.
• Nominal Task (stl) (see page 414)
• Handheld Measurement Task (stl) (see page 467)
• Measured Task (stl) (see page 468)
• Align Task (stl) (see page 469)
• Compare Task (stl) (see page 470)
• Report Task (stl) (see page 471)
7.1 Nominal Task (stl)

model(s) for comparison. The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal
models.

• Importing Nominal datasets and managing the membership of Nominal models in the
scene.
• Using Feature Fitting tools to detect a variety of shaped features (such as circles, planes
slots) as well as other objects such as edges borders and intersections. These can be used for
feature-based comparison with measured models.
dimensions.

• Manipulating the nominal dataset by merging, splitting and removing meshes as well as
removing unwanted areas.
• Modifying the nominal model objects by scaling, smoothing and reversing the normals as
Import Nominal stl (see page 415)
Cut/Merge (see page 420)
Filter / Mesh (see page 421)
Feature fitting (see page 422)
GD&T Dimensions (see page 118)
Modified Nominal (see page 466)
7.1.1 Import Nominal stl
The Import Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to import the nominal cloud/mesh
models.
It consists of the following tools :
• Import (see page 415)
• Import Features (see page 92)
• Solid to Mesh (see page 65)
• Add to Nominal (see page 68)
7.1.1.1 Import
Imports a point cloud / mesh

This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the object
in the nominal section of the Inspection data tree.
The Import dialog
Files of type
You can import files of the following types:
• Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a
delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)
• STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file
• IGES: points in an IGES file
• RIS: a Range Image Standard file.
• Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.
• Kube files (sab2 format)
• Focus Workspace files (*.mfi)
• PSL files (*.psl)
The options available depend on the type of file being imported.
Localizer type / Scanner type
For certain operations, (fusing point clouds for example) Focus needs to information
relating to the Localizer and the Scanner used in the generation of the point cloud. If the
point cloud was measured using recent versions of Focus software, this information is
stored with the point cloud.
If you are importing a point cloud where this information is not stored with the point cloud,
you need to specify the Localizer and Scanner type associated with the point cloud.
Import as a single point cloud
You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same
type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will
be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be
imported as a separate point cloud.
Import as Feature points
This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.
Use prefilter 1 out of
During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of
checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of {Prefilter step
points} of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.
Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.

When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan and Kube files are directly
imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This dialog
has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.
The General tab
The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between
brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning
and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to show
the whole file.
Note: that it may take some time to view a large file.
You can also set the following options in the General tab:
Skip first lines
Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)
Skip last lines
Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file footer)
The Delimiters tab
The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or more
delimiting characters.
Delimiters
Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.
Treat consecutive delimiters as one
This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.
Data preview
View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.
The Columns tab
The Columns tab allows you to set which columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z
coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to keep
it fixed at a certain value.
To import a point cloud / mesh
1. Click the Import Point cloud tool to open the Import dialog box.
2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.
4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,
Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.
The point cloud(s)/ meshes are imported and automatically placed under the "Data" node of
the Measured section of the Inspection tree.
7.1.1.2 Import Features
Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.
This tool enables you to import features. The .mff format is used to import features that have
been exported using Export features (see page 98) tool. Beside this there are other bespoke
client file formats. It schedules the Import Nominal Features dialog in which you can browse
for the file that contains the exported features.
The file types supported are:
- .TXT (client feature files)
- .MFF (Focus feature files)
- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)
- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)
The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.
To import nominal features
1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.

2. In the Import Nominal Features dialog browse for the file in which features have been
exported using the Export features (see page 98) tool.
3. Click [Import].
7.1.1.3 Solid to Mesh
Converts a solid to a mesh

This option enables you to convert a solid to a mesh from the tree or from a file.
The Solid to Mesh dialog
From tree
Use this option to select an already imported solid that is in the Nominal tree, or re-select
it.
From File
Click this option to select a solid that is not yet imported. It will be imported into the
current document when it is converted.
Solid sampling
These options control how the solid will be converted to a mesh.
Maximum error
The maximum deviation between the mesh tessellation and the real solid.
Planar sampling
This represents the maximum distance between the nearby vertices when creating the mesh
tessellation.
Angular sampling
This represents the maximum angle (degrees) between normals of the nearby vertices used
in creating the mesh tessellation.
Keep solid
This option is only available when the solid is already in the Nominal tree. When checked
the original solid will be retained.
[OK]
This button converts (and imports if necessary) the selected solid.
The mesh(es) appear in the Nominal tree. They can only be seen in the display if you are
working in the STL workflow .
To import a solid and convert it to a mesh
1. Click on the 'Solid to Mesh' tool.

2. In the "Solid to Mesh" dialog select the solid to be converted from the Inspection tree and
click [Reselect] if necessary
or
Click 'From File' and browse for the file to be imported and converted.
3. Enter the required solid sampling parameters.
4. If the solid has already been imported and is in the tree you can choose to keep the original
solid.
5. Click [OK] to import and convert the solid to a mesh.
7.1.1.4 Add to Nominal
Adds the Selection to the Nominal models

This tool adds an object (Solid / Point cloud /mesh / Feature ) to the Nominal model.
Note: This tool is only active when there is a model (Solid/Point cloud/mesh/Feature)
ready to be added to the membership. Since the application automatically adds the
model to the Models node when you import a Solid model, this tool is typically grayed
out after import.
All nominal models are displayed in the Nominal window of the Inspection tree. During
import, nominal models (Solid/Point cloud/mesh) are automatically placed under this node.
Note: Object types that are not accepted can be modified in the “Config Workflow
Tasks…” editor in the Workflows menu.
To add an object to the Nominal model
1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.

2. Click on the object to be added to the Nominal model. This can be a solid, a point cloud, a
mesh or a feature.
If the tool is not activated then the object is already a member of the Nominal Model node.
3. If the tool icon is active, click on the tool to add the object to the Nominal model node.
7.1.2 Cut/Merge
The Cut / Merge Ribbon Group contains commands to cut and merge point cloud data.

7.1.2.1 Merge
Merge point clouds/meshes into a single object

For details refer to Merge (see page 208).
7.1.2.2 Subtract
Subtracts a selected cloud or mesh from a reference to remove overlap errors

For details refer to Subtract (see page 208)
7.1.2.3 Separate
Separates selected areas of point clouds, meshes, compare objects and borders into
distinct objects
For details refer to Separate (see page 211)
7.1.2.4 Keep Selected
Retains a selected part of a point cloud or mesh

For details refer to Keep Selected (see page 213)
7.1.2.5 Delete Selected
Deletes selected regions of a point cloud or mesh

For details refer to Delete Selected (see page 215)
7.1.3 Filter / Mesh
The Filter / Mesh Ribbon Group contains commands to filter and triangulate cloud/mesh data.
7.1.3.1 Fuse
Fuses multiple clouds or meshes

For details refer to Fuse (see page 217)
7.1.3.2 Filter
Filters a point cloud using the scatter, grid and/or curvature filter
For details refer to Filter (see page 218)

7.1.3.3 Mesh
Triangulates a point cloud to a mesh

For details refer to Mesh (see page 221)
7.1.3.4 Remove mesh
Converts a mesh to point cloud

The Remove Mesh command removes the faces of a mesh. As a result, a new point cloud
object is created.
For details refer to Remove Mesh (see page 221)
7.1.4 Feature fitting
Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured data. The
purpose of features detection is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific
parameters such as a center point, axis direction, radius etc for use in alignment, comparison
and/or dimension verification.
Features in the actual measurements are approximated geometries. Their position and
parameters are extracted using a specific algorithm on a point cloud or mesh. In this
calculation, the user can fix some parameters, such as the radius of a circle to get a different
approximation of its center.
Because of the above fundamental differences between nominal and measured feature
detections, different methods are used:
• Mesh : features are detected from vertices within a given tolerance, starting from user
indicated vertices.
• Point cloud : features are detected from points within a given tolerance, starting from user
indicated points.
Feature fitting is supported for:
• Point cloud
• Mesh
• Border
Focus Inspection offers several feature fitting tools. All these feature-fitting tools support the
rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature without opening the feature's property sheet.
The following tools are provided:

Detect / Fit Feature (see page 423)

Export features (see page 98)
Surface Point from Point (see page 93)
Detect Edge (see page 94)
Mesh border (see page 463)
Flip Feature (see page 99)
7.1.4.1 Detect / Fit Feature
Opens the Feature Detection panel in which you can select the feature(s) to be fitted.
This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to
be detected and set the parameters to detect it. Some of the options in this panel may be
insensitive due to the context in which you are working.
Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.
The following features are provided.
Create Nominal Feature Point (see page 70)
Detect/Fit Nominal Line (see page 425)
Detect/Fit Nominal Circle (see page 427)
Detect Nominal Round Slot (see page 431)
Detect Nominal Rectangular Slot (see page 434)
Detect Nominal Key Slot (see page 438)
Detect Nominal Hexagonal Slot (see page 440)
Detect/Fit Nominal Plane (see page 443)
Detect/Fit Nominal Cylinder (see page 446)
Detect Nominal Cone (see page 449)
Detect/Fit Nominal Sphere (see page 451)
Create Nominal Point Cloud/Mesh Area (see page 453)
Detect Nominal Line Profile (see page 90)
Detect Nominal Surface Profile (see page 91)
7.1.4.1.1 Create Nominal Feature Point
Creates a point feature at a specified location
The Create Nominal Feature Point tool creates a feature point in the model at the specified
location.
Feature Name
contains the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
the feature name.
Fixed Center X, Y, Z
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]
To create a nominal feature point

2. Click the Create Nominal Feature Point tool.
3. In the Selection dialog choose the Pick Select option.

brackets.
EITHER
Click with the LMB on the solid where you want to create a nominal feature point. The co-
ordinates in the panel will be updated to show co-ordinates of the clicked point.
OR
EITHER
OR
The feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the Inspection tree.
7.1.4.1.2 Detect/Fit Nominal Line
Detects or creates a Line feature

This tool fits a straight line to the selected points in the data, or creates a line according to
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Fit
Fixed Length
When this option is checked, the line feature will have a specified length. This length is
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the line will be set in a specified location.
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the direction of the line will be defined by a specified
vector.
I, J, K
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.

[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Line tool.
5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.
EITHER
OR

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Line tool.
4. Check the Fit button ON.
6. Click [Create].
7.1.4.1.3 Detect/Fit Nominal Circle
Detects a Circle feature.

This tool fits a circle to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a circle based on
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced

Tolerance
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the shape is
Automatic
When this option is checked ON, the Depth and Depth Range parameters described
below will be determined automatically by the feature fitting algorithm. Optimum
values are found by searching for a zone with stable diameter values. It is
recommended that the automatic method is used initially. If the results are not
satisfactory you can un-check this option and set the values manually.
Depth
Depth Range
values are determined by the algorithm. When this manual option is selected, the user
must specify required values.
These two parameters define the circumferential range of the points used to determine
the reference plane. The Near Margin represents the inner circumference of the point
cloud used. The Far Margin represents the outer circumference of the point cloud used.
Both values are added to the nominal radius of the circle feature.
Note that these points must lie in the reference plane, so that in the example shown
above, the Near Margin must be greater than the radius of the larger hole.
Fit
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the circle feature will have a specified radius. This radius
is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the circle will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
I, J, K
[Detect]
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Circle tool.
4. If you want to detect the circle entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON. Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a circle on the model that has some defined characteristics, then click
the Fit option ON. Then enter a value for some of the circle characteristics.
EITHER
OR
7.1.4.1.4 Detect Nominal Round Slot
Detects a Round Slot feature.

The Detect Nominal Round Slot tool fits a round slot to the selected points in the Nominal
data.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the shape is
Automatic

Depth
Depth Range
Slot Type
The Slot Type parameter specifies at which ends the slot will be truly round. The
choices are between :
• Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.

• First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.
• Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Nominal Round Slot tool.
EITHER
OR
successful, then the feature will be created and the Statistics Information dialog will appear
to display, if requested. Otherwise a message will appear to say that feature detection was
attempted.
The feature will appear in the Nominal section of the Inspection Tree.
7.1.4.1.5 Detect Nominal Rectangular Slot
Detects a Rectangular Slot feature.

This tool fits a Rectangular Slot to the selected points in the data.

Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
slot is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with excessive noise or spoilers due
to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or 0.5mm may be more suitable.
Automatic
Depth
from this plane at which the feature will detected, The Depth defines the position of
middle of the point cloud range that will be used to detect the feature relative to the
reference plane (see the Figure above).

Depth Range
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Nominal Rectangular Slot tool.
EITHER
OR
attempted
7.1.4.1.6 Detect Nominal Key Slot
Detects a Key Slot feature.

The Detect Nominal Key Slot tool fits a key slot to the selected points in the data. A key slot
has two component holes, a small one and a big one, which are used as the base for key slot
construction.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.

Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
Depth
indicated in red.
Slot
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Nominal Key Slot tool.
4. Define the tolerance and the type of slot.
EITHER
OR
7.1.4.1.7 Detect Nominal Hexagonal Slot
Detects a hexagonal slot feature.

This tool fits a Hexagonal Slot to the selected points in the data.

Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the nominal feature. The default name contains
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
Tolerance
Depth
indicated in red.
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a hexagon slot feature

2. Click on the Detect Nominal Hexagon tool.
6. To detect the hexagon slot feature:
EITHER


OR
attempted.
7.1.4.1.8 Detect/Fit Nominal Plane
Detects or creates a plane feature.

This tool fits a plane to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a plane based on
specified parameters.
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the feature. The default name contains the prefix
Nom_, and indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
The default tolerance value of 0.1mm is suitable in most cases. If the plane is very well-
defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance value can be used. If the plane is
Fit
Fixed Size
When this option is checked, the each side of the plane feature will have a specified
Fixed Center
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the normal of the plane will be defined by a specified
vector.

I, J, K
[Detect]
[Create]
panel, i.e. the size, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Plane tool.
4. If you want to detect the plane entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the plane characteristics.
EITHER
OR

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Plane tool.
6. Click [Create].
7.1.4.1.9 Detect/Fit Nominal Cylinder
Detects or creates a Cylinder feature

This tool fits a cylinder to the selected points in the data or creates a cylinder according to
defined parameters.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.

Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
cases. If the feature is very well-defined in the point cloud, then a smaller tolerance
value can be used. If the shape is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud with
excessive noise or spoilers due to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3 or
0.5mm may be more suitable
Fit
When this option is checked, the feature will be fitted according to the dimensions defined
below.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. This
radius is specified in the input field
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the cylinder will be set in a specified
position.
X, Y, Z
Fixed Direction
I, J, K
[Detect]
[Create]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
4. If you want to detect the cylinder entirely from the measured model, click the Detect option
ON.
5. If you wish to detect a cylinder on the model that has some defined characteristics, then
click the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics.
EITHER
OR

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
direction.
6. Click [Create]

7.1.4.1.10 Detect Nominal Cone
Detects a Cone feature on an existing object

This tool fits a cone frustum to the selected points in the data.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
can be used. If the shape of the shape is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud
with excessive noise or spoilers due to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3
or 0.5mm may be more suitable
[Detect]
[Undo]
[Close]

2. Click on the Detect Nominal Cone tool.
EITHER
OR

7.1.4.1.11 Detect/Fit Nominal Sphere
Detects or creates a sphere feature.

This tool fits a sphere to the selected points in the Nominal data, or creates a sphere based on
defined parameters.
Feature Name
Statistics
Inspection tree.
Detect
Theoretical mesh
Advanced
measured feature.
Tolerance
can be used. If the shape of the shape is not well-defined (for example, a point cloud
with excessive noise or spoilers due to a difficult surface) then a tolerance value of 0.3
or 0.5mm may be more suitable
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the user
indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the tolerance
the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Fit
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the radius of the sphere feature will have a specified
Fixed Center
X, Y, Z
[Detect]
[Create]
the panel, i.e. the radius and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these
characteristics.

[Undo]
[Close]
To detect sphere feature

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
4. If you want to detect the sphere entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics.
EITHER
OR

2. Click on the Detect/Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
6. Click [Create].
7.1.4.1.12 Create Nominal Point Cloud/Mesh Area
Creates a Point cloud /Mesh-area feature

This tool duplicates and converts a set of polygon lasso selected points into a feature object.
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_, and indication of the feature type and a number.
[Detect]
This button will fit the detect the area once it has been defined on the model.
[Undo]
[Close]
To create a point cloud feature

2. Click the Create Nominal Point cloud/Mesh-Area tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature if required.
4. Click with the Lasso tool to define the required area on the model.
5. To create the area
EITHER
OR
Click [Detect] in the definition panel.
The area will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.

7.1.4.1.13 Detect Nominal Line Profile
Detects a line profile feature.

This tool creates a feature that characterises the profile of a section. It is used in GD&T feature
analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the line profile.
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_LineProfile an the identification of the associated section.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
This must be a line section or a part of a line section.
[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a line profile feature
1.
Click on the Create section tool to create the sections required.
3. Click on the Detect Nominal Line Profile tool.
5. Select a single section, either in the Inspection Tree or the Scene.

The Lasso option (see page 46) in the Selection dialog allows you to select just a part of a
section if required.
The Line Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree.
7.1.4.1.14 Detect Nominal Surface Profile
Detects a surface profile feature

This tool creates a features that characterizes the profile of a surface. It is used in GD&T
feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the surface profile. This feature can
only be detected on a solid or meshed surface.
Feature Name
the prefix Nom_SurfaceProfile and a number.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once a solid surface has been selected in the scene.

[Undo]
[Close]
To detect a surface profile feature

2. Click on the Fit Nominal Surface Profile tool.
single Pick option or using the Lasso option (see page 46) option.
5. Select surface areas on the solid or the mesh using the chosen tool.
The Surface Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree.
.
7.1.4.2 Export features

Note: Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features (see page 413)
tool in the Export ribbon group in the Report tab.
To export features

5. Click [Save].

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the
selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one feature
point must be visible to create surface points.
This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.
[ Reselect Points /Point clouds]

The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features
tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points will
be selected.
The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that have been selected in the
nominal models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the
nominal models will be selected.
Warning tolerance
Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal
model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then a warning
message will be appeared in the Warning Message panel. However, surface point(s) will be
created.
To tree
When checked, the surface point(s) will added to the Inspection tree.
To file
point(s) can be used for Directional Compare (see page 329).

[ Create ]
Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s).
[ Delete ]
irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after surface points have been
created.
[ Close ]
By default the current nominal model and all feature points in the tree will be selected.
3. To change the default selection, choose the required objects and then click on [Reselect
Points /Point clouds] and [Reselect Nominal ].
5. Choose where you want the resulting surface points to the located. (To tree and/or To file)
6. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s).
If To tree has been selected, the surface point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
7.1.4.4 Detect Edge
Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections.


Directions:

Directions:
The Detect tab.

Nominal
Measured
Caliper
the Caliper tab.
Use on Rail
Output
The Caliper tab.
[Save]
[Load]
Dimension
Angles
[Detect]
one.


the scene.
11.Click [Detect].
7.1.4.5 Mesh border
Generates the borders of a mesh

This tool generates the Outside and/or Inside border of a mesh. The resulting object can be
exported in IGES format.
The Mesh Border dialog
Outer border
When this button is checked an outer border for the mesh will be generated.
Inner border
When this button is checked an inner border for the mesh will be generated.
[OK]
Generates the specified borders.
[Close]
Closes the Generate Border dialog without creating the borders.
To generate borders on a mesh
1. Select the mesh.

3. Select the borders to be generated.
4. Click [OK].

[Flip Normals]
Two-sided lighting

movement.
a green icon.
7.1.6 GD&T Dimensions
The GD&T Dimensions Ribbon Group enables you to create dimensions that can be used for
GD&T evaluations.
Note: the dimensions that are detected using these tools can only be based on features.
This toolbar contains the following tools:

Create GD&T (see page 118)
Linear Perpendicular (see page 127)
Aligned Parallel (see page 130)
Radius (see page 133)
Angle (see page 136)
Gap Flush Caliper (see page 136)
7.1.7 Modified Nominal
The Modify Nominal Ribbon Group contains a number of tools to modify selected point
clouds and meshes.
7.1.7.1 Assembly Match
Joins multiple point cloud /meshes together

For details refer to Assembly Match (see page 281)
Creates a new mesh based on a selected surface

For details refer to Select Single Side (see page 287)
7.1.7.3 Offset Mesh
Applies an offset to a selected mesh

For details refer to Offset Mesh (see page 288)
7.1.7.4 Scale
Scales a selected Point cloud / Mesh / Feature

For details refer to Scale (see page 289)

7.1.7.5 Smooth
Smooths selected clouds or meshes

For details refer to Smooth (see page 290)
7.1.7.6 Reverse Mesh Normals
Switches the direction of selected normals

For details refer to Reverse Mesh Normals (see page 291)
7.1.7.7 Duplicate
Duplicates selected point cloud (s) / mesh(s)

For details refer to Duplicate (see page 292)
Mirrors objects around a plane

For details refer to Mirror Objects (see page 293)
7.1.8 Sections
from rails.
7.2 Handheld Measurement Task (stl)

measurement.
7.3 Measured Task (stl)

comparison.


for example).
• Using Feature Fitting tools to detector fit a variety of shaped features (such as circles,
determined.
The Measured task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
Import Measured (see page 205)
Modified Measured (see page 280)
7.4 Align Task (stl)


• Transform sections, using 2D Best Fit.
• Move models by translating or rotating them.
7.5 Compare Task (stl)

The Compare task is used to compare the measured data set with the nominal data set.

comparison.
• Compare the accuracy of an edge.


The Compare Task consists of the following tool groups:
7.6 Report Task (stl)

compare.

8 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Airfoil Inspection) Workflow
8 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Airfoil

Inspection) Workflow
The Airfoil Inspection workflow uses solids as primary nominal models.
Nominal Task (Airfoil Inspection) (see page 472)
Handheld Measurement Task (Airfoil Inspection) (see page 473)
Measured Task (Airfoil Inspection) (see page 474)
Align Task (Airfoil Inspection) (see page 475)
Airfoil Task (see page 476)
Report Task (Airfoil Inspection) (see page 499)
8.1 Nominal Task (Airfoil Inspection)

model(s) ready for comparison. The Airfoil Inspection based workflow deals with solids as
primary nominal models.

• Importing the Nominal datasets and managing the membership of Nominal models in the
scene.
• Fitting features such as lines, circles, rectangular slots, round slots, key slots, planes, point
cloud/mesh-areas, spheres and cylinders. These are used for feature-based alignment with
measured models in the Align task.
• Constructing features based on existing features.

• Modifying the model in various ways including, merging and mirroring solids, aligning
and flipping face normals, deleting, duplicating, hiding and manipulating layered faces
dimensions.
Import Nominal (see page 63)
GDT Dimensions (see page 118)
Modify Nominal (see page 112)
8.2 Handheld Measurement Task (Airfoil Inspection)

measurement.
8.3 Measured Task (Airfoil Inspection)

comparison.


for example).
• Using Feature Fitting tools to detect or fit a variety of shaped features (such as circles,
determined.
The Measured task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
Import Measured (see page 205)
Modified Measured (see page 280)
8.4 Align Task (Airfoil Inspection)


• Transform sections, using 2D Best Fit.

• Move the models by translating or rotating them.
8.5 Airfoil Task
The Airfoil task is used to compare the measured data set with the nominal data set.
comparison.
The Airfoil Task consists of the following tool groups:
Airfoil Inspect (see page 477)

8.5.1 Airfoil Inspect
The Airfoil Inspect Ribbon Group contains commands for airfoil inspection and creating
flyouts.
8.5.1.1 Airfoil Flyout
Creates flyouts on sections with airfoil inspection information

The Airfoil Flyout tool creates flyouts on sections with Airfoil Inspection information. The
following parameters are shown in the flyout:
Mean Line (see page 482)
Edge Point (see page 482)
Chord Line (see page 482)
Chord Angle (see page 483)
Tangent Angle (see page 484)
Edge Angles (see page 485)
Edge Radii (see page 486)
Maximum Width (see page 487)
Chord Width (see page 487)
Chord Length (see page 488)
Tangential Width (see page 489)
Angular Width (see page 490)
Stacking Point (see page 491)
Stacking Point Distance (see page 492)
Maximum Thickness (see page 493)
Edge Thickness (see page 493)
Profile Thickness (see page 494)
Profile Form (see page 496)
Edge Line Profile (see page 497)
Lean/Bow/Twist (see page 498)
All of these characteristics are described in the Airfoil Inspect (see page 478)tool.
To create flyouts
The required airfoil sections must be present in the Inspection tree.

The flyouts can be created on the sections before the airfoil data is computed.
1. Click on the Airfoil Flyout tool.
2. Click on the section for which the flyout is required in the scene.
3. If no airfoil information is available the following flyout will be seen.
4. Click on the Airfoil Inspect tool (see page 478) and compute all the results required.
5. The flyout will be updated to reflect the new information.
8.5.1.2 Airfoil Inspect
Evaluates the characteristics of airfoil sections along the length of an airfoil shaped
body.
This tool computes airfoil characteristics at each of the selected sections along the length of
the airfoil shaped body. It allows you to align measured to the nominal sections and assess
the quality of the measured airfoil-shape body. These results can be presented in specifically
designed report templates.
Pre-requisites for Airfoil Inspection
In order to use this tool you must have one or more rails with nominal sections, measured
sections, or compare sections. Most airfoil characteristics can be calculated on measured
sections, but for verifications against tolerances, and for profile line verifications, compare
sections are needed.
Measured and nominal sections can be generated using the Create Section (see page 347)
tool.
Compare sections can be created using the Compare Section (see page 355) tool.
Sections to be used for airfoil inspection must be on a rail. You can add sections directly to a
rail when using either the Create section or Compare section tool.
Existing sections can be added to a rail using the Add to Rail (see page 362) tool.
To compute airfoil characteristics
1. Click on the Airfoil Inspect tool.

This will open the Airfoil Characteristics panel. Through this panel you can view and
compute a complete set of characteristics.
2. Select the rail that contains the sections you wish to evaluate from the Active rail list.
3. Click on the characteristic that you wish to compute.

An explanation of the characteristic and the parameters required to compute it will appear.
(All of these are described below.) The results table will also show the results that will be
computed.
4. Specify any required parameters in the panel below the image.
5. Specify any tolerances if required.
If there is a tolerance on the characteristic being evaluated, you can enter the required
values in the upper and lower tolerance fields in the results panel. You can apply the
same tolerances to all the selected sections or you can set different tolerances on different
sections.
To apply the same tolerance to all sections: click on the arrow at the head of the
column and enter the value in the field that appears . Press <Enter> to
apply the value.
To apply the a tolerance to a single sections: click in the tolerance field for the
required section and enter the value .

When the values of the characteristic are evaluated, if the result is within the tolerance, the
indication "Pass" appears in the Pass/Fail column. If it is out of tolerance the indication
"Fail" appears.
Note: You can change a tolerance value by double-clicking in a tolerance field and
pressing <Enter>. The characteristics will be re-evaluated and the Pass/Fail field
updated.
6. Click the check box next to the characteristic.
The computation process will begin. The results will be generated for each section that has
been selected and appear in the results panel.
You can examine the results in a specific report.
7. Close the Airfoil Inspect panel.
8.
Go to report task and click on Create Report (see page 384)
9. Choose the templates designed for Airfoil Inspection data.
Note: The templates to be used are:
Number 17: "Airfoil template 1 view"
Number 18: "Airfoil template 2"
10.Create the report to examine the inspection results.
The Airfoil Characteristics panel
General options
Active Rail
This allows you to choose the rail that contains the sections to be evaluated.
Trailing Edge position
These two options enable you to define the position of the trailing edge, either on the left
side or on the right side.
Note: Since some characteristics will be reported for Leading Edge and Trailing
Edge separately, this option must be set correctly for the calculation results to be
relevant.
These buttons allow you to scroll through each of the sections available in the currently
active rail.

These buttons allow you to select which part of the airfoil section you want to view in the
center of the scene.
• L/E: view the leading edge side
• Full: view the full airfoil section
• T/E: view the trailing edge side
Advanced options
Clicking on the down-arrow in the right hand corner of the panel allows you to set
advanced options.
If the airfoil sections have been created at a certain angle to the main axis of the airfoil, it is
necessary that the sections be projected back onto a plane that is perpendicular to the main
axis of the airfoil before the evaluation of the characteristics is done.
The projection direction option allows you to project these “angled sections” back before
evaluating the characteristics of this section.
No projection: the evaluation will be on the initial section plane.
X: the normal direction of the projection plane is along the X axis.
Y: the normal direction of the projection plane is along the Y axis.
Z: the normal direction of the projection plane is along the Z axis.
For example, if you assume that a section (sectionA) has been created at an angle to the
Z axis (which in this example is the main or stacking axis of the airfoil), if you select
the option Z as the projection direction, sectionA will be projected onto a plane that is
perpendicular to the Z-axis resulting in a new section (sectionB). All of the characteristics
will be evaluated on sectionB.
If the selected projection direction is not a valid (if it is perpendicular to the section data
for example), an error message will be shown in the message line.
Characteristics
Mean Line (see page 482)

Edge Point (see page 482)
Chord Line (see page 482)
Chord Angle (see page 483)
Tangent Angle (see page 484)
Edge Angles (see page 485)
Edge Radii (see page 486)
Maximum Width (see page 487)
Chord Width (see page 487)
Chord Length (see page 488)
Tangential Width (see page 489)
Angular Width (see page 490)
Stacking Point (see page 491)
Stacking Point Distance (see page 492)
Maximum Thickness (see page 493)
Edge Thickness (see page 493)
Profile Thickness (see page 494)

Profile Form (see page 496)
Edge Line Profile (see page 497)
Lean/Bow/Twist (see page 498)
Construction elements
Displays the chosen elements on the selected sections
Mean Line
Displays the Mean (Camber) Line (MCL). This is defined as the locus of points that are
equidistant from the concave and convex sides (or two opposite convex sides if there is no
concave side) of an airfoil section from the leading edge to the trailing edge.
Figure 45: Mean Line
Edge Point
Displays the intersection points between the Mean Line and the airfoil section outline on
the leading and trailing edges.
Figure 46: Edge Points
Chord Line
Displays the line connecting the leading edge point and trailing edge point.
Figure 47: Chord Line

The dimension of the chord line is computed as the Chord Length (see page 488).
Angles
Chord Angle
Computes the angle between a chosen reference axis and the Chord Line (see page 482).
Figure 48: Chord angle
The Reference line can be selected from the Line drop down list. The options available are
the X or Y axes or the chord line from another section on the same rail.
The Reference line can be rotated through an angle defined in the Offset field.
Change sign: by default the chord line is evaluated starting from the reference line axis to
the chord line. When this option is checked, the chord angle will be computed starting from
the chord line to the reference line axis.
Complement displays the complement of the angle in relation to the current direction of the
chord angle.
Results
Section The id of the section.
Nominal The nominal chord angle (degrees) for the nominal

section.
Note: The nominal value can also be entered
manually. When you press <Enter> the
deviation will be re-calculated.
Lower Tol The defined lower tolerance value. See defining

tolerances (see page 479).
Upper Tol The defined upper tolerance value. See defining

Measured The chord angle (degrees) on the measured section.
Deviation The difference between the nominal and measured chord

angles.
Pass/Fail This field displays the result of the values compared

to the defined tolerance value. If the result is within
tolerance it shows "Pass". If not it shows "Fail".
Extract nominal value from nominal section

When evaluating a characteristic on a compare section, the software will extract the
measured value from the measured section and the nominal value from the nominal
section. If the nominal value is not exactly correct, it may be necessary to edit this
value.
If this is the case, click [Reset] to re-extract the nominal value from the nominal section.
Tangent Angle
Computes the angle between the tangent line and a selected reference axis. The tangent line
is the straight line that touches the airfoil section, without intersecting it, on the pressure
side of the airfoil section.
Figure 49: Tangent angle
The Reference line can be selected from the Line drop down list. The options available are
the X or Y axes.
Change sign: by default, the tangent angle is evaluated starting from the reference line to
the tangent line. If this option is checked, the tangent angle will be computed starting from
the tangent line to the reference line.
Complement: displays the complement of the angle in relation to the current direction of
the tangent angle.
Results
Nominal The nominal tangent angle (degrees) for the nominal

section.


Measured The tangent angle (degrees) on the nominal section.
Deviation The difference between the nominal and measured

tangent angles.


value.

Edge Angles
Computes the angle between a selected reference axis and the direction of a simulated edge
caliper placed on the edge. Both a leading edge angle (LE angle) and trailing edge angle
(TE angle) are computed.
Figure 50: Edge angles
To compute these angles you need to define the dimensions of the caliper.
Lengths: the dimensions of the two calipers as shown in the figure above.
L1: the distance of the middle jaw to the head line of the edge caliper at leading edge
side.
L2: the distance of the end jaw to the head line of the edge caliper at leading edge side.
L3: the distance of the middle jaw to the head line of the edge caliper at trailing edge
side.
L4: the distance of the end jaw to the head line of the edge caliper at trailing edge side.
The Reference line can be selected from the Line drop down list.
Change sign: by default the edge angle is evaluated starting from the reference line to
the edge caliper direction. If this checkbox is checked, the edge angle will be computed
starting from the edge caliper direction to the reference line.
Complement: displays the complement of the angle in relation to the current edge angle.
Results
Two tabs are presented for the leading and trailing edge angles.
Nominal The nominal leading/trailing edge angle (degrees) on the

nominal section.


Measured The leading/trailing edge angle (degrees) on the

measured section.
Deviation The difference between the nominal and measured edge

angles.


value.
Radii
Edge Radii
Computes the radii of edge circles at the leading edge and trailing edge sides. An edge
circle:
- passes through an Edge Point (see page 482),
- has a minimum deviation between its centre and a subset of data on the edge (which is
automatically selected to optimise the values obtained).
Figure 51: Edge radius
Results
Results for the leading and the trailing edges are presented in two separate tabs.
Nominal The nominal leading/trailing radius on the nominal

section.


Measured Leading/trailing radius on the measured section.
Deviation Difference between the nominal and measured radius

values.



value.
Widths
Maximum Width
Computes the maximum width as the maximum reading of a Vernier caliper obtained by
rotating the entire section.
Figure 52: Maximum width
Results
Nominal The nominal maximum width on the nominal section.



Measured The maximum width on the measured section.
Deviation The difference between the nominal and measured

values.


value.
Chord Width
Computes the chord width as the reading of a caliper when holding its jaws perpendicular
to the chord line (see page 482).
Figure 53: Chord width
Results
Nominal The chord width of the nominal section.



Measured The chord width of the measured section.
Deviation Deviations between the nominal and measured width

values.


value.
Chord Length
Computes the distance between the leading and trailing edge points (see page 482).
Figure 54: Chord length
Results

Nominal The chord length of the nominal section.



Measured The chord length of the measured section.
Deviation Deviations between the nominal and measured length

values.


value.
Tangential Width
Computes the tangential width as the reading of a caliper when holding its jaws
perpendicular to the tangent line.
Figure 55: Tangential width
Results
Nominal The tangential width of the nominal section.



Measured The tangential width of the measured section
Deviation Deviations between the nominal and measured values.


value.
Angular Width
Computes a distance that is the reading of a caliper when holding its jaws perpendicular
to the reference line that is at the predefined angle to the X axis of the local coordinate
system.
Figure 56: Angular width
Angle: the required angle in degrees between the reference line and the X axis of the local
coordinate system.
Results
Nominal The angular width of the nominal section.



Measured The angular width of the measured section.
Deviation Deviations between the nominal and measured values.


value.

Stacking Point
Stacking Point
The nominal stacking point is the intersection point between the section plane and the Z
axis of the world coordinate system. The actual stacking point is computed by applying the
reverse transformation of the alignment between the nominal and measured sections to the
nominal stacking point.
Figure 57: Stacking point
The actual stacking point should be located within a specified tolerance zone around the
reference point. Generally, the tolerance zone is defined as a square zone. The deviation of
the actual stacking point to the reference point are represented as the X and Y deviations,
which are the components of the total deviation in the corresponding axis directions. The
reference point is defined as the intersection point between the given airfoil section plane
and the reference stacking line. There are two different methods to construct the reference
stacking line.
Figure 58: Reference stacking line
Parallel stacking line

When this option is selected, the reference stacking line will be constructed as the line
that passes through the actual stacking point of the selected section and which is parallel
to the nominal stacking line (Z axis of the world coordinate system).
Through stacking point: choose the section whose actual stacking point is going to be
used to construct the reference stacking line. When the Z axis is selected, the reference
stacking line is the nominal stacking line itself.
Line through two stacking points
When this option is selected, the reference stacking line is constructed as the line
passing through the actual stacking points from two different sections.
First stacking point: the first section on which the actual stacking point is to be used.
Second stacking point: the second section on which the actual stacking point is to be
used.
Results
The X and Y coordinates are presented in different tabs.
Tolerance You can enter a tolerance for all the sections to be

evaluated by clicking on the down arrow. You can enter
a tolerance for any particular section by typing it into the
corresponding field.
Measured X/Y deviation

Stacking Point Distance

Stacking point distance is defined as the distance between the actual stacking point and
the line perpendicular to the chord line and tangential to the current airfoil section at the
leading edge side.
Figure 59: Stacking point distance
Results
Nominal Stacking point distance on the nominal section.

Lower tol The defined lower tolerance value. See defining

Upper tol The defined upper tolerance value. See defining

Measured Stacking point distance on the measured section.
Deviation Deviation between the nominal and measured values.



value.
Thickness
Maximum Thickness
Computes the diameter of the maximum inscribed circle of the current airfoil section.
Figure 60: Maximum thickness
Results
Nominal Maximum thickness on the nominal section.



Measured Maximum thickness on the measured section.
Deviation Difference between the nominal and measured values.


value.
Edge Thickness
Computes the edge thickness values for both the leading and the trailing edge. An
edge thickness is the thickness of the section at a selected point on the Mean Line (see
page 482) at a given distance from an edge point. The edge thickness segments are
perpendicular to the mean camber line at the defined points.
Figure 61: Leading and Trailing edge thicknesses
L1:the distance from the leading edge point at which the edge thickness will be computed.
L2:the distance from the trailing edge point at which the edge thickness will be computed.
Results
The edge thickness results are presented in separate tabs for the Leading and Trailing
edges.
Nominal Edge thickness on the nominal section.



Measured Edge thickness on the measured section.
Deviation Difference between the nominal and measured values.


value.
Profile
Profile Thickness
This characteristic evaluates the deviation within a predefined band which has fixed
distances to both edges. The thickness profile tolerance zone is specified by two
parameters: t1 and t2 (as shown in the figure below). t1 is the distance between the upper
limit of the tolerance zone and the nominal data. t2 is the total tolerance band.

Figure 62: Profile thickness
L1: the distance from the leading edge point which defines the start of the band at which
the profile thickness will be evaluated.
L2: the distance from the trailing edge point which defines the start of the band at which
the profile thickness will be evaluated.
Method: specifies the method used to align the nominal and measured polylines for the
profile thickness tolerance evaluation.
• 2D Section least-squares fit: the entire nominal and measured 2D sections are used to
find the best alignment based on a least-squares fit. After that, only the data within the
specified band are used for thickness profile tolerance evaluation.
• Minimum zone fit: only the data within the specified band are used for finding the
best alignment based on a minimum zone fit method. The same data are then used for
thickness tolerance evaluation.
Missing data detection. When a profile tolerance is evaluated, the actual (measured) shape
of the defined band to be analysed is compared with the nominal shape of the section.
If measured data defining the actual shape is missing, this can lead to erroneous results.
Three options are provided to deal with this situation.
• Off: missing data is not taken into account. Use this option if you are confident that the
data is complete.
• Automatic: the software automatically selects an "allowed gap in the measured data".
The value of the gap (distance) for which no measured data is available is determined
by the characteristic dimensions of the airfoil section. If no measured data can be found
over a distance that is greater than the selected gap distance, the software will trigger
a warning. This warning is shown as a yellow exclamation mark in the results table.
When the computation is complete, the value automatically selected by the software
will be displayed in the “Max allowed gap in measured data” field.
• Manual: the user enters a value for the “Max allowed gap in measured data” parameter.
This represents a distance along the nominal section. If no corresponding measured
data can be found for a distance greater than this value along the nominal section, the
software will trigger a warning. This warning is shown as a yellow exclamation mark in
the results table.
Results
Upper Tol (t1) The distance between the section edge and the upper
tolerance limit. See Figure 62: Profile thickness (see
page 495).
Total Tol (t2) The total tolerance. See Figure 62: Profile thickness
(see page 495). See also defining tolerances (see page
479).
Max dev. Maximum deviation within the defined evaluation band.
Min dev. Minimum deviation within the defined evaluation band.

Profile Form
This characteristic evaluates the deviation of the measured section to the form of the
nominal section along the concave and convex edges of the airfoil shape. The evaluation
is performed within a band that is defined by the distances L1 and L2 from the leading and
trailing edge points as shown in the Figure below.
L1: the distance from the leading edge point at which the profile form will be evaluated.
L2: the distance from the trailing edge point at which the profile form will be evaluated.
Method: specifies the method used to align the nominal and measured polylines for the
profile form evaluation.
specified band are used for the profile tolerance evaluation.
• Minimum zone fit: only the data within the specified band are used for finding the best
alignment based on a minimum zone fit method. The convex and concave form profile
tolerances are evaluated separately.
Note: In whatever case, the same data are used to find the best alignment for both
thickness profile tolerance and form tolerance evaluation. The same transformation
is therefore used in evaluation of thickness and form profile tolerances.
data is complete.

the results table.
Results
Results for the convex and concave forms are presented in separate tabs.
Tolerance You can enter a tolerance value for all the sections to be
a tolerance for any one section by typing the value into
the corresponding field.
Measured Deviation of the measured section from the nominal

section.

Edge Line Profile

This characteristic evaluates the deviation of the measured section from the nominal
section along the leading and trailing edge lines. The leading and trailing edge line profiles
are evaluated at the same time but separately. The length of the line to be evaluated is
defined by the distances L1 and L2 as shown in the figure below.
Figure 63: Edge Line Profile
L1: the distance from the leading edge point over which the characteristic is evaluated.
L2: the distance from the trailing edge point over which the characteristic is evaluated.
Method: specifies the method used for the edge profile of a line evaluation
specified band are used for the profile tolerance evaluation.
• Minimum zone fit: the leading edge and trailing edge profile of a line tolerances are
evaluated independently. The leading edge data portion is transformed to its best
alignment position based on a minimum zone fit method. The leading edge profile
of a line tolerance is then evaluated based on this best alignment position. The same
procedure is applied to the trailing edge data portion.
data is complete.
the results table.
Results
Results for the leading and trailing line profiles are presented in separate tabs.
Tolerance You can enter a tolerance value for all the sections to be
a tolerance for any one section by typing the value into
the corresponding field.
Measured Deviation of the measured section.

Lean/Bow/Twist
Lean/Bow/Twist
The evaluation of the Lean/Bow/Twist characteristics involves a best fit of the measured
section onto the nominal section. The Lean and Bow are the shift in the horizontal and
vertical directions of the of the measured section. The twist is the angle of the rotation of
the measured section to the nominal section.
Figure 64: Lean/Bow/Twist
Constrain rotation: When this option is checked, the evaluation is made but without
rotating the section. Results will be obtained for Lean and Bow (though these will be

slightly different to those obtained with the option is not checked). The value of Twist will
be 0.
Note: this is not the same as just putting the twist option to 0.
Results
Results for the lean, bow and twist are presented in separate tabs.


Deviation Bow/Lean/Twist values.

8.6 Report Task (Airfoil Inspection)

compare.



9 Information Dialog
This document describes the fields that appear in a number of informational dialogs.
These dialogs are:
• The Attributes dialog
• The Global Comparison dialog
• The Section Information dialog box
• The Directional Compare Information dialog
• The Feature Statistics Information dialog
• The Golden Template statistics dialog
• The Curvature Radius dialog
• The Wall thickness dialog
There are five tabs in these dialogs. The tabs that are available will depend on the dialog and
whether a single or multiple comparisons are selected.
9.1 The Numbers tab

The Numbers tab shows statistical information about the comparison. This parameters on the
Numbers tab are listed below for the following dialog boxes:
• The Global Comparison dialog box
• The Directional Compare Information dialog box
• The Compare Edges dialog box
• The Feature Statistics Information dialog box that also displays information about the actual
feature.
See also:
• The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab (see page 502).
• The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab (see page 502)
Number of valid Points

The number of points actually used for the comparison.
Maximum Deviation
The largest positive distance between a compared point and the nominal model.
Minimum Deviation
The smallest distance or the largest negative distance between a compared point and the
nominal model.
Range
The range of distances of the measured data to the nominal model.
Mean Deviation
The average of the distances of the measured data to the nominal model.
Sigma
The statistical sigma of the distances of the measured data to the nominal model.
Root Mean Square
The statistical root mean square of the distances of the measured data to the nominal
model.
The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab
This dialog contains the parameters listed below:
Number of Valid Points

The number of points actually used for compare.
Maximum Radius
The maximum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.
Minimum Radius
The minimum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.
Range
The difference between the Maximum Radius and the Minimum radius.
The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab
This dialog contains the following additional parameters:

Maximum Thickness
The global maximum distance to the opposite wall.
Minimum Thickness
The global minimum distance to the opposite wall.
Range
The difference between the Maximum and the Minimum Thickness.
9.2 The Colors tab

The Colors tab shows the colors and tolerances used in the display of the comparison result.
This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:


• The Global Compare dialog
• The Curvature Radius Information dialog box
• The Wall Thickness Information dialog box
• The Feature Statistics Information dialog box
Note: the values set for the limits of the color range correspond to the upper and lower
Compare Tolerance values set as an attribute of the object.
Save/Load
[Save]
This saves the current color scale.
[Load]
Enables you to browse to find a color scale that has been saved .
You can also select a saved color scale from the drop-down list.
Rendering
Discrete
Displays the results as discrete colors. 16 colors are available.
Smooth
Displays the results as smooth colors. 15 colors are available.
Color Scale
Slider
The slider restricts the range of colours used.
1. Move the slider up until the required number of colors is set.
The range of values assigned to each color is automatically adjusted.

2. Click [Apply].
Check boxes
When the box next to a color is checked, then this colour is not included in the "Fill"
operation.
Automatic fill of the range between +3 Set the range between +2 and -2 and When the range is changed from +3,
and -3. perform [Fill numbers]. No values are -3 to +2, -2 and check boxes are set
checked. on, the original values are retained.
Colors
You can choose the color that is to be applied to a particular range of values.
[Fill numbers]
This distributes the values evenly between the upper and lower limits. It applies to color
defined within the slider range.
Values for which the check box is checked on are not modified.
It operates on the range of colors (values) defined by the slider.
[Reset colors]
If specific colors have been assigned to specific values, this resets the colors used to the
default ones.
[Invert colors]
Inverts the order of the colors with the scale values.
[Apply]
Applies the current color scale parameters and updates the display of the object.
9.3 The Interrogate tab

The Interrogate tab shows the number of points with values in specific ranges.
This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:

• The Curvature Radius Information dialog box

Points
The Points section lists how many points lie inside or outside the specified bounds. Values
are shown as an absolute number and as a percentage. The bound values can be modified.
[Recalculate]
Recalculates the number of points that lie inside or outside the specified bounds when the
bounds have been modified.
Color groups
The Color groups section contains a pie chart and a bar displaying how many points lie
between the color boundaries set on the Color tab.
Apply
Applies the current parameters and updates the display of the object.
9.4 The Drawstyle tab

The Drawstyle tab shows the drawstyle options for the selected object display.
This information applies to the:
• The Comparison Information dialog box
See also :
• The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab (see page 506)
• The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab (see page 507)
• The Attributes Information dialog – Drawstyle tab (see page 507)
General drawstyle tab
Points
Check the Points option to display the comparison information as colored points.
Lines
Check the Lines check box to display the comparison information as colored lines.
Deviation scale factor
The scale factor of the deviation lines can be set and modified using the Deviation scale
factor edit box and slider. The scale factor gives the amplification of the deviation lines on
the screen with respect to their real length. Initially, the range of the slider bar is limited
to 100. A larger scale factor can be typed in the edit box, followed by pressing the Apply
button. The range of the slider bar will automatically expand.
Note: the Deviation scale factor edit box and slider is only enabled if the Lines
drawstyle is chosen
The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab
This dialog contains an additional Section drawstyle panel which is only visible for section
comparison information. The General drawstyle panel is the same as described above.
Measured section
Check this option to show (or hide) the measured section. Choose the color from the drop
down list.
Nominal section
Check this option to show (or hide) the nominal section. Choose the color from the drop
down list.

Tolerance bands
Check this option to show (or hide) the tolerance bands as offsets from the nominal
section.
Bounding rectangle
Check this option to show (or hide) the the bounding rectangle of the section. Choose the
color from the drop down list.
The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab
Arrows
Check this option to display the comparison information as colored arrows. The arrow size
can be edited using the text boxes as shown above.
Edges drawstyle
Projected border
Check this option to show (or hide) the projected border. Choose the color from the drop
down list.
Measured border
Check this option to show (or hide) the measured border. Choose the color from the drop
down list.
Nominal border
Check this option to show (or hide) the nominal border. Choose the color from the drop
down list.
The Attributes Information dialog – Drawstyle tab
The Attributes dialog appears when the Colors tool is selected in the Info / Visibility
toolbar. It allows you to define the display color of individual objects.
Color
The required color for the selected object can be selected from the drop down list.
Randomize
When this option is checked then each of the selected objects will be assigned a different
(random) color. This function is useful when you have a number of point clouds selected
and you wish to easily distinguish between them without having to assign individual
different colors.
Separate solid faces
This option assigns a random color to each of the faces in the selected object. It thus
enables you to easily distinguish all the different faces on a single object.
Default
This removes the randomly assigned colors and returns the color to the default color for the
type of object.
Transparency
This makes the colors transparent to the alpha level indicated.
9.5 The Attributes tab

The Attributes tab displays attribute values for selected objects.
The objects that can be selected are:
• Nominal solids / meshes / point clouds or features
• Nominal features
The values for attributes in this tab are used for all alignment and comparison operation, and
no longer need to be defined specifically for these operations.
The attribute values that can be edited in this tab depend on the selected items.
Attributes for Nominal solids/ meshes /point clouds
Nominal Solid/Mesh
Material thickness
This parameter defines the sheet metal thickness associated with the part. This does not
apply to point clouds. It is used in comparison info.
The value must entered in the current unit of length, visible in the bottom right corner of
the scene.
Roughness
Displays the roughness values that have been imported with the CAD model.
Nominal Solid/Mesh/Point cloud
Compare tolerance
This is the tolerance used for alignment and comparison. Upper and lower values can be
defined. Sheet metal parts often have different tolerances depending on whether their faces

and edges have to mate with other parts. Parts that have no connection with other parts can
have larger tolerance values.
The values that are defined here relate to the object selected. When performing a
comparison the number of created compare objects depends on the number of ranges that
are defined here.
Attributes for Measured solids/ meshes /point clouds

Localizer Type
Select the required value from the drop down list
Scanner Type
Select the required value from the drop down list
To define attributes
1. Click on the Attribute info tool in the Info toolbar.

2. Select the object in the tree.
3. Enter the required values.
4. Click [Apply].
10 Automation
10 Automation
Automation allows you to record a series of actions that form a script that can be saved, loaded
and played back.
The Automation window is opened by selecting View > Automation from the main menu bar.
It contains a number of functions for creating and playing the automation scripts.
Note: in previous versions of the software, changes to the view of the model were
stored as a separate line in the automation script. This is no longer the case in the
current version of the software. Commands that need view specific information will
store this information in the background instead.
All existing scripts that include these statements are still valid and will be executed in
the same manner.
The Function buttons
New
This creates a new script. If the current script has been modified since it was last saved you
will prompted to save the current script. The automation tree will be cleared and the single
"end" entry will be visible.
Load
This will load an existing script in the Automation window. If the current script has been
modified since it was last saved you will prompted to save the current script. The newly
commands contained in the newly loaded script will appear in the Automation tree.

10 Automation
Save As
This saves the current script. The Save Focus Automation Document dialog appears
in which you can enter the file name and the location where the file will be stored.
Automation scripts are saved with the file extension .mfa
Record
When this button is pressed, all the following user actions performed will be recorded in
the current script.
Pressing this button again ends the recording.
Play
This starts the playback of the current script. A small arrow ( ) shows the command that
is currently being executed. Play will continue until the Stop button is pressed.
Step
This allows you to step through the automation script, command by command. The current
command is indicated by the presence of the small arrow ( ).
Stop
This stops the playback or the recording of the current script.
Insert
This button allows you to insert an action into the current script.
When the button has an colored background (as shown here), the command will be inserted
above the currently selected command.
If the button has a clear background, the command will be inserted at the end of the script.
Repeat
This button will schedule the Focus Automation software if it is installed, from which you
can run a number of automated batch jobs. If Focus Automation is not installed then this
button will cause the automation script to be replayed repeatedly until the Stop button is
clicked.
Eventing
This enables you to insert a condition where the script will wait for a specific event to take
place. It schedules the "Wait for an Event" dialog.
10 Automation
Wait for file

When this option is checked, the automation script will wait for a certain file to appear at a
given location. When the file is there, automation continues.
User message
When this option is checked, you can enter text in the dialog, that will appear in a message
box that will be displayed when this line is executed in the script. If the Display image
option is checked, the picture specified here will be also appear.
During play back, a dialog will pop up showing the text and image. The dialog has 2
buttons:
[Continue] which will cause the automation script to continue with the next statement.
[Stop]: which causes the automation script to stop.
The user can access the scene while this dialog is open.
Timeout
When this option is checked, automation will continue after the timeout time has elapsed,
regardless of whether the condition was fulfilled or not.
Toggle Breakpoint
This inserts a breakpoint into the automation script that causes the script to halt. The
actions in the script can be continued either by clicking the Play or the Step buttons.
The Delete breakpoint deletes all the breakpoints inserted in the script.
The Script Tree
Each of the commands contained in the automation script are listed in Script Tree. Items can
be selected in the Script Tree and operations carried out on them.
Multiple items can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys.

10 Automation
command node
Each command is a node in the tree and each of the parameters associated with the
command can be seen by clicking on the + sign next to it.
Double clicking on any of the parameters allows you to edit them as shown above. This
thus allows you to easily adapt a script to use a different file or model for example.
current command
The arrow indicates the current command.
If the script has halted at this command because there is problem, this command is shown
in red.
break
A command at which the script will halt is indicated by a hand.
The Contextual menu
This can be obtained by clicking on selected command(s) with the RMB. Multiple commands
can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys, thus providing extensive editing
facilities.
Undo
This will undo the last action performed on items in the Script tree. It does not undo the
action performed by the script. Only one level of undo is possible.
Redo
This will redo the last action that was undone.
Cut
This will cut the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to another
position.
Copy
This will copy the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to
another position.
Insert
This will insert items that have been cut or copied from the tree into the tree. They will be
inserted above a selected item.
10 Automation
Delete
This will remove the selected item(s) from the Script Tree
Set Execution Pointer
This Moves the execution pointer to the current command as indicated by the arrow ( ).
The script will then be executed from this command.
To create an automation script
1. Click on the New button if necessary to start a new script file.

2. Click on the Record button to start the recording mode.
3. Insert actions by executing commands which will then be recorded in the script.
4. When the required actions have been recorded, stop the recording either by clicking on the
Stop button or by clicking on the record button again.
5. Click the Save As button to save the script.
Note: Automation is not supported for all the commands. Though most of the
commands have automation support, there may be some that can not be recorded into a
script.
To load and playback a script
1. Click on the Load button .

2. In the dialog that appears browse to the location where the require file is to be found.
3. Click [Open].
4. Click on the Play button to playback the script.
To insert a command into a existing script
1. Click on the Load button and select the required script file.
2. Click on the Insert button until it is in the required mode. If you wish to insert a
command at a specific point in the script, the Insert button needs to have a colored
background. If you wish to insert the command at the end of the script then the button
should have a clear background.
3. Click on the Record button to start the recording mode.
4. To insert the command at a specific point, click on the script line above which new
command should be inserted.
5. Execute the required commands. They will be inserted into the script at the required
location.
Note: that items that are already in the automation tree can be copied and pasted.
To edit a script
2. Click on the button in front of a command to open up the tree and show all the
parameters associated with that command.

10 Automation
3. Double click on the parameter line.

4. The value of the editable parameter will appear in the input field.
5. Enter a new value then click outside of the input field. The new value will be displayed in
the command parameter list.
To add a break point to a script
2. Click on a script line to select it.
3. Click on the Toggle Breakpoint button to insert a breakpoint at that script line.
When the script is played back it will halt at this line. The script can be continued by clicking
on the Step or the Play button.
A break point can be removed using the Delete Breakpoint button .
11 Glossary
11 Glossary
A
Alignment
An operation that moves the measured data so that it aligns more closely with the nominal
data. A number of methods are provided to compute the translation and rotation required to
align the measured to the nominal data.
Attribute
Additional information attached to an object. This information can be visible or invisible in
the scene.
C
CMM
Coordinate Measuring Machine.
CNC
Computer Numerically Controlled.
Comparison information
Information object that contains comparison information of a global, section, directional
compare, edge and wall thickness comparison.
D
Deviation
The dimensional difference between a Measured and Nominal object.
Dimension
A distance/angle between 2 points/lines.
Drawstyle
Scene representation of objects.
E
Edge
The border of a mesh or solid.
F
Face
The smallest part of a mesh or solid.
Feature
Functional element in an object, such as a hole or a slot.
Flush
The distance between 2 points perpendicular to a line.
Flyout
Label that contains the information on the object it is attached to.
G
Gap
The distance between 2 point parallel to a line.

11 Glossary
GD&T
Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing based on the ASME Y14.5M Standard.
I
IGES
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification; a neutral exchange format for 2D or 3D CAD
product models, drawings, or graphics. Only 3D surface/solid information is imported in
Focus Inspection.
L
Laser line
Projection of the laser light emitted by the scanner on the physical object to be measured.
Laser plane
Plane of the laser light emitted by the scanner.
LMB
Left mouse button.
M
Mesh
Representation of a physical object as a collection of connected triangular faces. It can be
created from a point cloud.
MFI
Focus Inspection Workspace file , the native file format of Focus Inspection.
MMB
Middle mouse button
N
Nominal model
Model to compare the measured model against, such as a surface/solid model or a STL
model.
O
Object
All things represented in the scene.
Orientation
A scanner orientation. An orientation can be red = orientation not computed, orange
= orientation is computed but less accurate than the threshold, green = orientation is
computed and more accurate than the threshold.
P
Point cloud
Central object that represents a physical object as a set of points in space.
R
Rail
Series of sections defined in parallel for which information can be viewed for the group.
Reference sphere
The sphere that is used for qualifications, calibration update and alignments.
11 Glossary
Report
Output of the comparison results in a specific layout.
RMB
Right mouse button
RPS
Reference Position System, a tool to align objects and features by subsequently fixing the
known degrees of freedom to a reference position and matching the remaining degrees of
freedom while maintaining the fixed ones.
S
Scan line
Path between two positions, representing one linear movement of the scanner.
Scene
The graphical display of the application.
Section
A 2D object representing a cut through a point cloud/mesh or solid.
Solid
Closed geometric model.
Statistics information object
Information object that contains statistics information on a feature detected from a point
cloud.
STL
Stereolithography Interface file format that has become the Rapid Prototyping industry's
defacto standard data transmission format. This format approximates the surfaces of a solid
model with triangles and lacks engineering data. The STL format was designed to give just
the amount of data in the form of meshes. STL files may be ASCII or binary in form.
Stripe
Set of scanned points that result from a single shot.
Subtract:
Automatic cutting of point cloud/meshes based on inter-distance and point cloud/mesh
density.
T
Task
A part of a workflow. Each task represents a separate part of a workflow.
TBI
Turbine Blade Inspection.
Transformation
A movement (translation and rotation) applied to an object.
U
UCS
User Coordinate System, a coordinate system created by the user.
W
Wall thickness
The thickness of a double sided mesh/solid.

11 Glossary
WCS
World Coordinate System. The system's default coordinate system.
Workflow
A list of tasks that describe all steps to follow between start and end.

Focus Handheld-Inspection User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Focus Handheld-Inspection User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual

Copyright © Nikon Metrology

2 Authorizing Focus Software............................................................................ 7

3 Using the software.......................................................................................... 13

4 The Focus Menus............................................................................................23

5 The Focus Toolbars........................................................................................ 43

6 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Solid) Workflow.................... 62

7 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (STL) Workflow.................. 414

8 The Inspection - Handheld Measurements (Airfoil Inspection)

9 Information Dialog....................................................................................... 501

6 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual

2 Authorizing Focus Software

2.1 Obtaining a license

Hardware key (Dongle)

A hardware key (Dongle) can be used :

8 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User Manual

3. Click on the Collect Status Information tab.

It is possible to install a network license on your company's network.

2.2 Transferring a software key license

10 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

2.3 License Admin Control Center

: this icon indicates a software key

: this icon indicates a hardware key

12 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

3 Using the software

3.1 The User Interface

The File menu

The Graphical scene

The Units panel

3.2 Using the three mouse buttons

14 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

3.3 Getting started

Click on a tab to execute a task.

16 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

To deactivate a tool: click on the Mixed Object Select tool.

3.4 Configuring Ribbon groups

Add to Quick Access Toolbar

3.5 Property sheets

18 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

Opening Property sheets

Not opening the Property sheets

3.7 Modifying the view of the model

3.8 Keyboard shortcuts

Key Action Explanation

20 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

Key Action Explanation

3.9 Conventions used in the documentation

Model Units The name of a dialog or a tab within the dialog.

Opens a document short description of a tool.

user interface field indicates a field in the user interface

file name the name of a file or path

3.10 Starting Focus from a command line

To start Focus from a command line

The following is an example of starting start Focus from a command window:

The various parts of the command are described below:

"C:\Program Files\Nikon\Focus 10.3\Focus.exe"

22 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User

4 The Focus Menus

The File menu

The View menu

The Workflow menu

Note: an Action menu is available from a pop-up menu in the scene.

4.1 The File menu

24 Focus 2019 Inspection HandHeld Measurement User